Desamark

Desarrollo web y Marketing digital en Bilbao

  • English
    • Home
    • Seo Bilbao
    • Posicionamiento web Bilbao
    • Diseño web Bilbao
    • Drupal Bilbao
    • Pluggins
    • Ipage
    • Raiola Networks

    Inicio » Certifications

    Réponses de Certification Google Ads pour la publicité sur le Réseau de Recherche

    16 December, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Réponses de Certification Google Ads pour la publicité sur le Réseau de Recherche

    Réponses de Certification Google Ads pour la publicité sur le Réseau de Recherche

    During the exam you get 50 questions randomly from 150 possible questions pool.

    Get Certified in Réseau De Recherche NOW!!!
    Questions:

     

    Clara est responsable publicitaire. Elle a été chargée d’optimiser la campagne de son entreprise sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Quel est l’intérêt du score d’optimisation pour la campagne de Clara ?

    • Savoir si sa campagne est en bonne voie d’atteindre les résultats souhaités
    • Comprendre les performances de son site Web sur le réseau
    • Comparer l’efficacité du texte de son annonce avec celui d’autres annonces
    • Évaluer la popularité de son site Web par rapport à d’autres

     

    Vous avez récemment lancé un nouveau produit : le Fauteuil Fantastique. Vous voulez attirer davantage de trafic à l’aide de Google Ads. Cependant, vous souhaitez cibler seulement les recherches qui concernent le nom de votre produit. Comment pouvez-vous attirer du trafic uniquement à partir des requêtes pour “Fauteuil Fantastique” ?

    • En utilisant l’option “Ciblage par mots clés”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    • En utilisant l’option “Mot clé exact”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    • En utilisant l’option “Expression exacte”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    • En utilisant l’option “Requête large”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.

     

    Swee Yin possède un grand magasin de vêtements qui organise deux fois par an une vente de chapeaux pour hommes, avec d’importantes remises et des bonus surprise. Elle souhaite adapter sa campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google afin de promouvoir cet événement. Comment peut-elle procéder ?

    • En ciblant des systèmes d’exploitation spécifiques.
    • En définissant les dates de début et de fin de la campagne.
    • En ajoutant des alertes de bons de réduction pour les internautes situés à proximité du magasin.
    • En créant un nouveau groupe d’annonces pour la vente.
    • En sélectionnant l’objectif “Prospects” pour la campagne.

     

    Quels sont les trois signaux sur lesquels la requête large se base pour mettre en correspondance les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche avec les requêtes ?

    • Langue
    • Appareil
    • Centres d’intérêt
    • Zone géographique
    • Stratégies d’enchères intelligentes

     

    En tant qu’annonceur, vous pouvez créer votre première annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche dans Google Ads en cinq étapes simples. Dans quel ordre devez-vous les suivre ?

    • Se connecter au compte Google Ads à utiliser pour créer l’annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche. Choisir l’objectif, sélectionner “Annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche” parmi les options disponibles et saisir les détails de la campagne. Dans le menu de la page sur la gauche, sélectionner le bouton +. Sélectionner “Publier la campagne”. Vérifier les paramètres de la campagne et s’assurer que l’annonce respecte les consignes éditoriales de Google.
    • Dans le menu de la page sur la gauche, sélectionner le bouton +. Se connecter au compte Google Ads à utiliser pour créer l’annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche. Choisir l’objectif, sélectionner “Annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche” parmi les options disponibles et saisir les détails de la campagne. Sélectionner “Publier la campagne”. Vérifier les paramètres de la campagne et s’assurer que l’annonce respecte les consignes éditoriales de Google.
    • Vérifier les paramètres de la campagne et s’assurer que l’annonce respecte les consignes éditoriales de Google. Se connecter au compte Google Ads à utiliser pour créer l’annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche. Dans le menu de la page sur la gauche, sélectionner le bouton +. Choisir l’objectif, sélectionner “Annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche” parmi les options disponibles et saisir les détails de la campagne. Sélectionner “Publier la campagne”.
    • Se connecter au compte Google Ads à utiliser pour créer l’annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche. Dans le menu de la page sur la gauche, sélectionner le bouton +. Choisir l’objectif, sélectionner “Annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche” parmi les options disponibles et saisir les détails de la campagne. Vérifier les paramètres de la campagne et s’assurer que l’annonce respecte les consignes éditoriales de Google. Sélectionner “Publier la campagne”.
    • Choisir l’objectif, sélectionner “Annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche” parmi les options disponibles et saisir les détails de la campagne. Dans le menu de la page sur la gauche, sélectionner le bouton +. Sélectionner “Publier la campagne”. Se connecter au compte Google Ads à utiliser pour créer l’annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche. Vérifier les paramètres de la campagne et s’assurer que l’annonce respecte les consignes éditoriales de Google.

     

    Où pouvez-vous aller pour voir l’état de vos enchères, vos performances au fil du temps et des données sur les délais de conversion ?

    • Analyse des enchères
    • Rapport sur la stratégie d’enchères
    • Rapport sur les mots clés d’enchères
    • Planificateur de stratégies de performances

     

    Un directeur marketing souhaite diffuser une campagne publicitaire sur le Réseau de Recherche Google pour susciter l’intérêt des clients recherchant du matériel de camping en ligne. Quel est l’un des principaux avantages d’une campagne bien gérée sur ce réseau ?

    • Les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche peuvent apparaître en réponse aux recherches pertinentes des clients potentiels.
    • Les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche peuvent envoyer automatiquement des informations de suivi aux clients potentiels.
    • Les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche peuvent inclure des vidéos de produits pertinents.
    • Les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche peuvent apparaître dans les résultats de recherche naturels.

     

    Comment le score d’optimisation peut-il aider les marketeurs à réussir ? (Deux réponses possibles)

    • Il accélère l’implémentation d’améliorations dans les campagnes.
    • Il permet aux équipes marketing de justifier le budget des campagnes.
    • Il détermine les campagnes à améliorer en priorité.
    • Il utilise l’IA de Google pour planifier des campagnes sans intervention manuelle.

     

    La campagne que Ben gère actuellement bénéficie d’un investissement total de 7 000 €, génère 1 400 conversions et affiche un CPA (coût par acquisition) de 5 €. Ben souhaite vendre son excédent de stock. Pour ce faire, il est prêt à augmenter son CPA et le budget alloué à sa campagne. Quel plan budgétaire, élaboré à l’aide du Planificateur de performances, permettra à Ben d’atteindre son objectif marketing ?

    • Un investissement de 9 800 € pour générer 1 400 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 7 €.
    • Un investissement de 9 100 € pour générer 1 300 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 7 €.
    • Un investissement de 9 600 € pour générer 1 600 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 6 €.
    • Un investissement de 8 400 € pour générer 1 400 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 6 €.

     

    Quand vous implémentez des enchères basées sur la valeur, quelles sont les trois solutions qui vous permettent de créer des bases solides de mesure des conversions ?

    • Suivi avancé des conversions
    • Mode Consentement
    • Global site tag
    • Stratégies d’enchères intelligentes
    • Requête large

     

    Vous avez récemment lancé un nouveau produit : les Wonder Boots. Vous voulez attirer davantage de trafic à l’aide de Google Ads. Cependant, vous souhaitez cibler seulement les recherches qui concernent le nom de votre produit, les Wonder Boots. Comment pouvez-vous attirer du trafic uniquement à partir des requêtes pour “Wonder Boots” ?

    • En utilisant des mots clés exacts
    • En utilisant des expressions exactes
    • En utilisant la requête large
    • En utilisant le ciblage par mots clés

     

    Michael a créé une annonce de haute qualité avec une liste de mots clés performante. Il est déçu qu’elle ne soit pas diffusée autant qu’il le souhaiterait. Pourquoi n’obtient-il pas les résultats attendus ?

    • L’enchère proposée pour l’annonce n’est pas assez élevée.
    • Il n’a pas fourni de lien pour l’annonce.
    • Les utilisateurs orthographient mal ses mots clés.
    • Ses composants d’annonce contiennent trop d’informations.

     

    Vous êtes responsable marketing au sein d’une compagnie aérienne, et vous devez établir son budget mensuel de publicité en ligne. Vous avez choisi d’utiliser le Planificateur de performances de Google Ads pour effectuer cette tâche. Quels en sont les deux avantages ?

    • Le Planificateur de performances vous aidera à identifier des fonds provenant d’autres budgets opérationnels à allouer au marketing.
    • Les prévisions du Planificateur de performances s’appuient sur des milliards de recherches Google effectuées chaque semaine.
    • Le Planificateur de performances utilise le machine learning pour effectuer des prévisions.
    • Le Planificateur de performances s’intègre à d’autres logiciels de budgétisation tels que QuickBooks.

     

    Charlie cherche à améliorer le niveau de qualité d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche Google en augmentant le taux de clics attendu. Quelle mesure permettrait d’augmenter ce taux ?

    • Augmenter la vitesse du site Web
    • Diminuer l’enchère proposée pour l’annonce
    • Cloner l’annonce plusieurs fois
    • Inclure des mots clés dans le texte de l’annonce

     

    Vous souhaitez améliorer la pertinence d’une annonce avec un ensemble de mots clés spécifique. L’objectif est d’améliorer son classement afin qu’elle gagne en visibilité. Quelle mesure permettrait de renforcer la pertinence de cette annonce ?

    • Mettre en avant l’originalité du produit.
    • Mettre l’accent sur l’élargissement de l’audience.
    • Optimiser la navigation sur la page de destination.
    • Ajouter des mots clés à exclure.

     

    Si votre objectif est de tester plusieurs combinaisons de titres et de descriptions pour optimiser vos résultats, quels sont les deux avantages des annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche qui vous permettront de l’atteindre ?

    • Des entonnoirs de conversion plus longs.
    • Une fraude au clic plus faible.
    • Leur pertinence accrue.
    • Un CTR attendu plus faible.
    • Leur flexibilité accrue.

     

    Comment l’IA de Google peut-elle aider les marketeurs à toucher leurs clients potentiels ?

    • En reconnaissant les nuances du langage humain et en se basant sur cette capacité pour permettre aux marketeurs de toucher les personnes qui recherchent leurs offres
    • En définissant des objectifs commerciaux pour les marketeurs, qui sont basés sur leurs données de conversion hors connexion
    • En permettant aux annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche de fournir aux marketeurs des recommandations sur l’optimisation de leur site Web
    • En prédisant la valeur de chaque requête pour le trimestre à venir, ce qui permet aux stratégies d’enchères intelligentes d’aider les marketeurs à planifier leurs dépenses

     

    Quelles sont les deux façons dont le score d’optimisation aide les marketeurs à réussir ?

    • Il identifie les campagnes à améliorer en priorité.
    • Il se sert de l’IA de Google pour planifier des campagnes sans intervention manuelle.
    • Il aide les équipes marketing à justifier le budget des campagnes.
    • Il permet d’accélérer l’implémentation d’améliorations dans les campagnes.

     

    Laverne a créé sa première campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google pour faire la publicité de son école de yoga. Elle sélectionne ce réseau et, par défaut, les partenaires du Réseau de Recherche de Google. Quel est l’intérêt d’apparaître sur les sites de ces partenaires ?

    • Augmenter la répartition géographique de l’annonce.
    • Collaborer avec d’autres entreprises similaires.
    • Élargir l’audience à d’autres sites.
    • Toucher les internautes sur tous les types d’appareils.

     

    L’application automatique des recommandations vous offre trois avantages. Lesquels ?

    • Vous constatez des améliorations des performances de campagne.
    • Vous pouvez l’activer sans augmenter votre budget.
    • Vous implémentez automatiquement les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche.
    • Vous appliquez régulièrement les bonnes pratiques sur vos comptes Google Ads.
    • Vous activez les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes automatiquement.

     

    De quelle façon les marketeurs peuvent-ils prédire l’impact de l’application des recommandations sur leur score d’optimisation ?

    • Grâce à l’IA de Google, car elle est utilisée pour prévoir comment les conversions augmenteront à la suite des recommandations.
    • Grâce aux recommandations, car chacune indique son impact sur le score d’optimisation sous la forme d’un pourcentage.
    • Grâce à des outils tiers de confiance qui permettent d’analyser et d’optimiser les campagnes.
    • Grâce aux paramètres de campagnes semblables, car ils sont comparés avec des scores d’optimisation supérieurs.

     

    Quelles sont les deux choses que les utilisateurs attendent de leurs requêtes de recherche et que les composants offrent ?

    • Les composants offrent des informations au moment opportun.
    • Les composants offrent des comparaisons de produits et de services.
    • Les composants offrent des images attrayantes.
    • Les composants offrent des informations pertinentes.

     

    Alex a lancé une campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google pour promouvoir sa boutique en ligne d’accessoires de moto, spécialisée dans les casques personnalisés. Quel peut être l’avantage des annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche de Google pour lui ?

    • Son annonce sera diffusée sur un site Web d’avis sur les casques de moto.
    • Son annonce sera diffusée auprès de groupes ciblés sur les réseaux sociaux.
    • Son annonce sera intégrée à des sites Web similaires d’accessoires de moto.
    • Son annonce sera diffusée auprès des internautes recherchant des informations sur des casques.

     

    Votre client, Vince’s Veggies, souhaite augmenter le nombre de téléchargements de ses recettes populaires en version imprimée. Vous lui suggérez de créer des groupes d’annonces en fonction des catégories de recettes apparaissant sur son site Web. Que devra-t-il définir dans son premier groupe d’annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche Google ?

    • Les pays cibles
    • Les types d’appareils
    • Les horaires de livraison
    • Le montant par défaut de l’enchère

     

    Votre entreprise propose des services d’entretien des maisons, et vous souhaitez toucher davantage de clients potentiels. Vous disposez d’un budget limité. Pourquoi Google Ads est-elle la meilleure solution dans votre cas ?

    • Vos annonces seront diffusées sur tous les moteurs de recherche.
    • Les modèles de machine learning déterminent automatiquement votre budget publicitaire.
    • Vous pouvez définir votre propre budget et le modifier à tout moment.
    • Avec Google Ads, vous payez toujours au coût par couverture, prédéterminé par votre budget.

     

    Quels sont les deux types de campagnes sans mot clé que les marketeurs peuvent diffuser afin d’améliorer la couverture incrémentielle ?

    • Les annonces textuelles agrandies peuvent aider les marketeurs à améliorer la couverture incrémentielle.
    • Les campagnes Performance Max peuvent aider les marketeurs à améliorer la couverture incrémentielle.
    • Les annonces dynamiques du Réseau de Recherche peuvent aider les marketeurs à améliorer la couverture incrémentielle.
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche peuvent aider les marketeurs à améliorer la couverture incrémentielle.

     

    Quel avantage présente l’utilisation des stratégies d’enchères intelligentes avec la requête large ?

    • Elles permettent de se servir du budget pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.
    • Elles utilisent le nom du groupe d’annonces pour choisir les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.
    • Elles permettent de ne participer qu’aux enchères pertinentes, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée. Pour cela, ces stratégies identifient des signaux de contexte lors de la mise aux enchères.
    • Elles utilisent les pages de destination pour choisir les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.

     

    Google Ads a été conçu pour offrir trois éléments à chaque annonceur : pertinence, contrôle et résultats. Pour la pertinence, il permet aux annonceurs d’interagir avec les bonnes personnes, au bon moment. Pour les résultats, il ne vous facture que lorsque vous enregistrez un clic. Comment Google Ads vous permet-il de contrôler vos actions publicitaires ?

    • Il permet aux annonceurs de contrôler le nombre d’actions spécifiques que leurs dépenses généreront.
    • Il permet aux annonceurs de contrôler le montant maximum dépensé chaque mois.
    • Il permet aux annonceurs de contrôler les concurrents face auxquels ils diffuseront leurs annonces lors des mises aux enchères.
    • Il permet aux annonceurs de contrôler la prochaine enchère la plus élevée autorisée lors des mises aux enchères auxquelles ils participent.

     

    Lorsqu’il crée une annonce, comment Greg peut-il savoir à quoi elle ressemblera sur l’écran de ses clients potentiels ?

    • Greg peut prévisualiser toutes ses annonces en se connectant à son compte Google My Business et en cliquant sur l’onglet “Aperçu”.
    • Greg doit saisir les mots clés spécifiques qu’il ciblera une fois son annonce approuvée, puis la visualiser dans un navigateur.
    • Google fournit des exemples d’annonces pour ordinateur utilisant les mots clés sélectionnés dans la campagne, afin de créer un aperçu générique.
    • À mesure qu’il tape l’URL, le titre et la description de l’annonce, un aperçu des versions mobile et classique s’affiche.

     

    Qu’est-ce qui détermine si une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche apparaît dans les résultats de recherche, et à quelle position elle est diffusée ?

    • L’impact du composant, qui inclut les liens annexes et les composants Image.
    • Les enchères, qui correspondent au montant que les marketeurs paieront pour un clic.
    • Le classement de l’annonce, qui est basé sur plusieurs facteurs pour diffuser des annonces utiles.
    • La qualité de l’annonce, qui est basée sur la pertinence de l’annonce et du site Web.

     

    Brian gère la campagne de son entreprise sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Il examine régulièrement le score d’optimisation pour s’assurer que la campagne est aussi efficace que possible. Sur quoi se base le score d’optimisation de Brian ?

    • L’évaluation de la popularité des annonces sur les réseaux sociaux
    • La comparaison des ventes de Brian avec les données sur la diffusion des annonces
    • Les aspects clés de ses comptes, y compris les statistiques, les paramètres et les tendances du secteur
    • Les tests et rapports sur la vitesse d’exécution des sites Web de Brian

     

    D’après l’analyse de ses données marketing, une entreprise de développement Web a déterminé que ses clients à plus forte valeur la contactaient par le biais d’un formulaire de participation sur son site. Elle veut trouver plus de clients potentiels à qui présenter ce formulaire. Quel est le bon objectif de campagne pour cette entreprise ?

    • Prospects
    • Couverture et notoriété de la marque
    • Considération du produit et de la marque
    • Trafic vers le site Web

     

    Quelles sont les deux façons dont le Planificateur de performances peut révéler les possibilités qu’offrent vos campagnes Google Ads ?

    • Instrumentation
    • Simulation
    • Validation
    • Distribution
    • Différenciation

     

    Trois facteurs ont une incidence sur la qualité d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche au moment des enchères. Lesquels ?

    • Le taux de clics attendu.
    • L’expérience sur la page de destination de l’annonce.
    • Le classement de l’annonce.
    • La pertinence de l’annonce.
    • La stratégie d’enchères.

     

    Deux types de composants peuvent aussi être diffusés en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte. Lesquels ?

    • Les accroches dynamiques.
    • Les accroches promotionnelles.
    • Les liens annexes dynamiques.
    • Les composants Appel.

     

    Ingrid lance une nouvelle gamme de produits dont elle souhaite optimiser la visibilité. Elle sait qu’une campagne display lui permettra de toucher un grand nombre d’internautes. De quelle manière cette campagne lui permettra-t-elle d’atteindre ses objectifs marketing ?

    • Ses annonces seront diffusées sur des sites Web liés à son activité ou aux centres d’intérêt de ses clients, en fonction des options de ciblage qu’elle a choisies.
    • La boutique d’Ingrid sera mise en avant sur Google Maps, et les clients pourront directement y afficher sa gamme de produits.
    • Lorsque les utilisateurs rechercheront des mots clés associés à ses annonces, celles-ci s’afficheront au-dessus et en dessous des résultats.
    • Le système créera automatiquement une vidéo récapitulative de sa gamme de produits et la diffusera sur YouTube.

     

    Rashid souhaite faire connaître son entreprise et créer des campagnes utilisant des termes associés à sa marque. Il n’a pas beaucoup de temps à consacrer à la gestion quotidienne des enchères. Il a donc décidé de recourir aux enchères automatiques pour alléger sa charge de travail. Quelle stratégie d’enchères automatiques Rashid devrait-il envisager d’utiliser ?

    • ROAS cible
    • Maximiser les conversions
    • Coût par clic optimisé (eCPC)
    • Taux d’impressions cible

     

    Quels sont les trois signaux que la requête large utilise pour mettre en correspondance les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche avec les requêtes ?

    • Stratégies d’enchères intelligentes
    • Centres d’intérêt
    • Appareil
    • Langue
    • Zone géographique

     

    Un responsable publicitaire prend en charge une campagne d’annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Sur la page “Recommandations” de Google Ads, il constate que le score d’optimisation de la campagne est de 40 %. Que signifie ce pourcentage ?

    • La campagne est 60 % moins efficace que les autres campagnes de l’entreprise.
    • La campagne est optimisée à 40 % pour les mots clés choisis par le gestionnaire de campagne précédent.
    • La campagne est susceptible d’améliorer ses performances de 60 % si les recommandations associées sont suivies.
    • La campagne dépasse le budget de 40 %.

     

    Où pouvez-vous trouver l’état de vos enchères, vos performances au fil du temps et des données sur les délais de conversion ?

    • Vous pouvez les trouver dans le rapport sur les mots clés d’enchères.
    • Vous pouvez les trouver dans le Planificateur de stratégies de performances.
    • Vous pouvez les trouver dans l’analyse des enchères.
    • Vous pouvez les trouver dans le rapport sur la stratégie d’enchères.

     

    Que font les enchères basées sur la valeur ?

    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui utilise le machine learning pour générer le taux de clics le plus élevé possible.
    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui utilise le machine learning pour générer le plus d’impressions possible.
    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui utilise le machine learning pour générer la valeur de conversion la plus élevée possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui utilise le machine learning pour générer le taux d’impressions cible le plus élevé possible.

     

    Un vendeur de bougies est sur le point de se lancer dans plusieurs villes à travers tout le pays. Il utilise une expression exacte dans sa campagne d’annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche avec les mots clés “livraison”, “bougie” et “parfumée”. En quoi l’expression exacte sera-t-elle utile pour la campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche de l’entreprise ?

    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche ont la même signification que le mot clé.
    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche incluent la signification du mot clé.
    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche sont liés au mot clé.
    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche contiennent les trois mots clés exacts.

     

    Quelles recherches peuvent déclencher une annonce contenant le mot clé en requête large “réparation vitre voiture” ?

    • remplacer vitre voiture
    • remplacement vitre automobile
    • voitures d’occasion à vendre
    • voitures à vendre

     

    Après avoir implémenté les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et la requête large, quelles sont les trois bonnes pratiques de campagne que vous devriez suivre ?

    • Vous devriez faire attention au ciblage par mots clés à exclure.
    • Vous devriez utiliser des signaux de contexte.
    • Vous devriez utiliser les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche.
    • Vous devriez suivre le niveau de qualité.
    • Vous devriez utiliser les rapports multi-appareils.

     

    Jimmy a renseigné la section “Titre” de son annonce textuelle et rédige maintenant la section “Description”. Que devrait-il y inclure ?

    • D’autres pages de destination à consulter
    • Des emoji pour attirer l’attention de ses clients potentiels
    • Ce qui fait l’originalité de son entreprise
    • Une mention des prix, des promotions ou des offres exclusives
    • Une incitation à l’action pour les clients potentiels

     

    Combien d’annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche pouvez-vous avoir dans Google Ads ?

    • Il n’y a pas de limite concernant le nombre d’annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.
    • Il y a une limite de cinq annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte qui doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.
    • Il y a une limite de trois annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.
    • Il y a une limite de six annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.

     

    Leo gère la publicité des lignes de vêtements d’un grand fabricant. Il consulte la page “Recommandations” de Google Ads pour évaluer ses campagnes sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. En quoi les recommandations d’optimisation sont-elles utiles pour Leo ?

    • Les recommandations s’appliquent uniquement à la sélection de mots clés.
    • Les recommandations fournissent des tendances générales identifiées par Google.
    • Les recommandations sont créées par les responsables de compte de niveau supérieur.
    • Les recommandations sont adaptées au compte spécifique.

     

    Peggy possède une société de services de ménage à domicile. Elle a créé un site Web de réservation et s’apprête à promouvoir ses services en ligne. Elle souhaite que ses annonces touchent les internautes qui recherchent activement des sociétés semblables à la sienne. Quels sont les deux types de campagnes Google Ads que Peggy devrait utiliser pour s’assurer que les clients potentiels envisagent de faire appel à elle et passent à l’action en réservant des prestations de ménage ?

    • Campagne Shopping
    • Campagne Discovery
    • Campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • Campagne Display
    • Campagne vidéo

     

    Quels sont les trois moyens efficaces permettant aux marketeurs d’appliquer des recommandations qui ont un impact sur le score d’optimisation ?

    • Consulter et appliquer des recommandations individuelles dans chaque catégorie
    • Consulter les recommandations et effectuer des ajustements dans les paramètres de campagne
    • Activer l’application automatique d’une sélection de recommandations
    • Sélectionner “Tout appliquer” pour implémenter toutes les recommandations en un clic
    • Consulter et appliquer des recommandations individuelles dans votre rapport sur les mots clés

     

    Comment l’IA de Google aide-t-elle les marketeurs à maximiser les performances de leurs annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche parmi les milliards de recherches Google chaque jour ?

    • L’IA de Google permet à la requête large et aux stratégies d’enchères intelligentes de mettre en correspondance les annonces avec les requêtes et d’ajuster les enchères en temps réel.
    • L’IA de Google permet au classement de l’annonce de donner la priorité soit à l’estimation du taux de clics, soit à la pertinence de l’annonce.
    • L’IA de Google est si efficace que les marketeurs n’ont même pas besoin d’investir dans des composants Image de haute qualité pour maximiser leur impact.
    • L’IA de Google permet aux stratégies d’enchères intelligentes d’anticiper les requêtes au volume le plus élevé et définit automatiquement des enchères en conséquence.

     

    Quels sont les deux avantages dont vous pouvez bénéficier si vous combinez la requête large, les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche ?

    • Vous pouvez gagner du temps, ce qui vous permet de vous consacrer davantage à vos priorités marketing
    • Les titres sont créés automatiquement en réponse au contenu des sites Web des annonceurs
    • Vous pouvez toucher le bon utilisateur, au bon prix et avec des annonces pertinentes
    • Vous n’avez plus besoin d’optimiser les campagnes sur le Réseau de Recherche si vous êtes marketeur

     

    Jasmine est la directrice marketing d’une chaîne de magasins de vêtements. Elle dispose d’un budget défini pour attirer autant de clients potentiels que possible sur son site Web. Quelle stratégie d’enchères automatiques devrait-elle utiliser pour sa campagne ?

    • Taux d’impressions cible
    • Maximiser les conversions
    • ROAS cible
    • Maximiser les clics

     

    Quelles propositions correspondent à deux types de stratégies d’enchères intelligentes basées sur la valeur ?

    • Taux d’impressions cible
    • CPC manuel
    • Maximiser la valeur de conversion
    • Maximiser la valeur de conversion avec ROAS cible

     

    Vous envisagez d’utiliser les enchères automatiques pour rendre la gestion des campagnes plus efficace. Parmi les réponses ci-dessous, quelles sont les trois façons dont ces enchères peuvent vous permettre d’atteindre cet objectif ?

    • En définissant l’enchère adaptée pour chaque mise aux enchères
    • En vous permettant de gagner du temps et d’économiser des ressources marketing
    • En déterminant les valeurs minimale et maximale des enchères selon le budget quotidien
    • En intégrant de nombreux signaux pour évaluer l’intention des utilisateurs
    • En définissant des enchères manuelles pour des moments précis de la journée

     

    Jim a créé une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche avec une enchère de 5 €. Deux autres annonceurs ont défini des enchères de 2,50 € et 2 € lors d’une mise aux enchères. Quelle somme Jim paiera-t-il pour obtenir la première place ?

    • 2,5 €
    • 5 €
    • 2,51 €
    • 4,5 €

     

    Quelles sont les trois solutions qui vous permettent de développer des bases solides de mesure des conversions quand vous implémentez des enchères basées sur la valeur ?

    • Mode Consentement
    • Suivi avancé des conversions
    • Global site tag
    • Requête large
    • Stratégies d’enchères intelligentes

     

    Quel est l’avantage des enchères automatiques par rapport aux enchères manuelles pour diffuser une campagne Google Ads réussie ?

    • L’enchère “appropriée” peut devenir une cible statique difficile à atteindre.
    • Si vous ne définissez pas vos enchères efficacement, vous risquez de passer à côté de conversions cruciales.
    • Comme le parcours client s’est complexifié, les enchères doivent être définies en fonction du comportement général des utilisateurs.
    • L’intention des utilisateurs et la probabilité qu’ils réalisent une action intéressante pour votre entreprise ne varient pas selon la zone géographique, l’heure, ni le type d’appareil.

     

    Comment les marketeurs devraient-ils utiliser les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche basées sur l’IA pour atteindre leurs objectifs commerciaux ?

    • Ils devraient utiliser les mots clés exacts pour aider les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche basées sur l’IA à atteindre des audiences spécifiques.
    • Ils devraient combiner la requête large, les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche.
    • Ils devraient réduire et réinvestir les budgets de recherche sponsorisée dans des composants Image de haute qualité.
    • Ils devraient s’appuyer sur les enchères manuelles pour les requêtes qui généreront le plus de valeur selon eux.

     

    Quelle méthode devriez-vous utiliser pour réussir à implémenter et à tester la requête large sur les campagnes basées sur cette option de ciblage afin de pouvoir analyser les données de conversion ?

    • Vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité de suivi des conversions dans Google Ads pour suivre le nombre de conversions qui sont générées par vos mots clés en requête large.
    • Vous pouvez implémenter les mots clés en requête large en configurant un test en un clic. Cela créera automatiquement un test qui respectera toutes les bonnes pratiques.
    • Vous pouvez utiliser l’Outil de planification des mots clés pour trouver de nouveaux mots clés pertinents pour votre entreprise et votre audience cible.
    • Vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité Types de correspondance des mots clés dans Google Ads pour voir comment vos mots clés en requête large sont mis en correspondance.

     

    Comment les marketeurs peuvent-ils prédire l’impact de l’application des recommandations sur leur score d’optimisation ?

    • En utilisant l’IA de Google pour prévoir l’augmentation des conversions à la suite des recommandations.
    • En utilisant des outils tiers de confiance pour analyser et optimiser leurs campagnes.
    • En comparant les paramètres de campagnes semblables avec des scores d’optimisation supérieurs.
    • En se référant aux recommandations, car chacune indique son impact sur le score d’optimisation sous la forme d’un pourcentage.

     

    Vous devez expliquer à quelqu’un comment les enchères automatiques peuvent rendre la gestion de ses campagnes plus efficace. Quels sont les trois avantages que vous pouvez citer pour l’aider à atteindre ses objectifs ?

    • Les enchères automatiques intègrent de nombreux signaux pour évaluer l’intention des utilisateurs
    • Les enchères automatiques définissent des valeurs d’enchères minimales et maximales selon le budget quotidien
    • Les enchères automatiques font gagner du temps et économiser des ressources marketing
    • Les enchères automatiques définissent l’enchère adaptée pour chaque mise aux enchères
    • Les enchères automatiques définissent des enchères manuelles pour des moments précis de la journée

     

    Comment le Planificateur de performances peut-il vous aider ?

    • En analysant le rapport sur les termes de recherche, et en ajoutant des mots clés et des mots clés à exclure en fonction de l’historique des performances
    • En optimisant le retour sur investissement afin de générer davantage de conversions sans dépasser votre CPA (coût par acquisition) cible
    • En déterminant les fonctionnalités Google Ads que vous devriez activer afin que vos campagnes génèrent des performances optimales
    • En créant une copie optimisée de votre campagne existante à laquelle appliquer les outils de brouillon et de test

     

    La société de Singh, spécialisée dans le marketing, a créé une annonce attrayante qui enregistre de nombreux clics. Quel effet pourrait-elle avoir sur la mise aux enchères Google Ads ?

    • La qualité de l’annonce permettra de réduire d’au moins 40 % le coût par clic.
    • L’annonce générera un coût par clic plus élevé pour l’annonceur.
    • L’annonceur obtiendra plus d’enchères lors de la mise aux enchères.
    • L’annonce obtiendra un meilleur classement grâce à un taux de clics attendu plus élevé.

     

    Quels sont les deux types actuels de campagnes sans mot clé que les marketeurs peuvent utiliser pour améliorer la couverture incrémentielle ?

    • Les annonces textuelles agrandies
    • Les campagnes Performance Max
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • Les annonces dynamiques du Réseau de Recherche

     

    Comment les marketeurs peuvent-ils utiliser les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche basées sur l’IA pour répondre à leurs besoins commerciaux ?

    • En s’appuyant sur les enchères manuelles pour les requêtes qui généreront le plus de valeur selon eux
    • En combinant la requête large, les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • En utilisant les mots clés exacts pour aider les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche basées sur l’IA à atteindre des audiences spécifiques
    • En réduisant et en réinvestissant les budgets de recherche sponsorisée dans des composants Image de haute qualité

     

    Marta dispose d’un budget marketing restreint. Elle doit adopter une stratégie qui lui permettra d’attirer des clients sur son site Web pour un coût fixe. Quelle stratégie d’enchères pourrait lui convenir ?

    • Coût par acquisition (CPA) cible
    • ROAS cible
    • Maximiser les clics
    • Taux d’impressions cible

     

    Quelles recherches peuvent déclencher une annonce contenant le mot clé en requête large “réparation pneu vélo” ?

    • vélos à vendre
    • remplacer pneu vélo
    • vélos d’occasion à vendre
    • remplacement chambre à air vélo

     

    Vous essayez d’améliorer la qualité d’une annonce pour obtenir de meilleures performances lors des enchères publicitaires. Quel changement serait le moins efficace ?

    • Afficher une page de destination claire et simple.
    • Élever le montant des enchères.
    • Créer des annonces susceptibles d’enregistrer des clics.
    • Créer des annonces qui ont un rapport avec les mots clés.

     

    Votre but est de tester différentes combinaisons de titres et de description pour optimiser vos résultats. Vos collègues du service marketing vous suggèrent d’utiliser les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche. Quels sont les deux avantages de ces annonces ?

    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche offrent des entonnoirs de conversion plus longs.
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche offrent un CTR attendu plus faible.
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche offrent une pertinence accrue.
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche réduisent la fraude au clic.
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche offrent une flexibilité accrue.

     

    La qualité de l’annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche au moment des enchères dépend de trois facteurs. Lesquels ?

    • La pertinence de l’annonce impacte la qualité de l’annonce au moment des enchères.
    • Le classement de l’annonce impacte la qualité de l’annonce au moment des enchères.
    • Le taux de clics attendu impacte la qualité de l’annonce au moment des enchères.
    • La stratégie d’enchères impacte la qualité de l’annonce au moment des enchères.
    • L’expérience sur la page de destination de l’annonce impacte la qualité de l’annonce au moment des enchères.

     

    Quelles sont les trois solutions qui vous permettent de créer des bases solides de mesure des conversions quand vous implémentez des enchères basées sur la valeur ?

    • Requête large
    • Mode Consentement
    • Global site tag
    • Suivi avancé des conversions
    • Stratégies d’enchères intelligentes

     

    Comment fonctionnent les enchères basées sur la valeur ?

    • Les enchères basées sur la valeur sont une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes. Cette stratégie utilise le machine learning pour générer le taux de clics le plus élevé possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Les enchères basées sur la valeur sont une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes. Cette stratégie utilise le machine learning pour générer le taux d’impressions cible le plus élevé possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Les enchères basées sur la valeur sont une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes. Cette stratégie utilise le machine learning pour générer la valeur de conversion la plus élevée possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Les enchères basées sur la valeur sont une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes. Cette stratégie utilise le machine learning pour générer le plus d’impressions possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.

     

    Quels sont les deux types de composants qui peuvent aussi être diffusés en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte ?

    • Les composants Appel
    • Les liens annexes dynamiques
    • Les accroches promotionnelles
    • Les accroches dynamiques

     

    Par quel moyen l’IA de Google aide-t-elle les marketeurs à toucher des clients potentiels ?

    • L’IA de Google définit des objectifs commerciaux pour les marketeurs, qui sont basés sur leurs données de conversion hors connexion.
    • L’IA de Google comprend les nuances du langage humain et permet aux marketeurs de toucher les personnes qui recherchent ce qu’ils proposent.
    • L’IA de Google est utilisée par les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche pour fournir aux marketeurs des recommandations sur l’optimisation de leur site Web.
    • L’IA de Google est utilisée par les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes pour prédire la valeur de chaque requête du trimestre à venir, ce qui permet aux marketeurs de planifier leurs dépenses.

     

    Avec des milliards de recherches sur Google chaque jour, comment l’IA de Google aide-t-elle les marketeurs à maximiser les performances de leurs annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche ?

    • Avec l’IA de Google, les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes prédisent les requêtes avec le volume le plus élevé pour définir des enchères automatiquement.
    • Avec l’IA de Google, la requête large et les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes mettent en correspondance les annonces avec les requêtes et ajustent les enchères en temps réel.
    • Avec l’IA de Google, le classement de l’annonce donne priorité au taux de clics attendu plutôt qu’à la pertinence de l’annonce ou inversement.
    • Avec l’IA de Google, les marketeurs n’ont plus besoin d’investir dans des composants Image de haute qualité.

     

    Marisol gère les campagnes de publicité en ligne d’une chaîne de magasins de jouets qui possède une boutique en ligne et des magasins physiques. Quels sont les deux types de campagnes Google Ads que Marisol devrait utiliser pour montrer des images de ses produits, faire la promotion de son entreprise en ligne et de ses inventaires de jouets en magasin, et booster le trafic sur son site Web et ses magasins de jouets ?

    • Campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • Campagne Display
    • Campagne Shopping
    • Campagne vidéo
    • Campagne Discovery

     

    Google Ads examine les annonces avant de les diffuser afin de s’assurer qu’elles respectent les règles en matière de publicité. Quels sont les critères étudiés ?

    • Longueur et extensions.
    • Contenu et mise en forme.
    • Chargement et vitesse du site.
    • Objectifs et données analytiques.

     

    Quel est l’intérêt d’utiliser les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes avec la requête large ?

    • La requête large avec les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes vous assure de ne participer qu’aux enchères pertinentes, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée. Pour cela, ces stratégies identifient des signaux de contexte lors de la mise aux enchères.
    • La requête large avec les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes utilise le nom de votre groupe d’annonces pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.
    • La requête large avec les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes utilise votre budget pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.
    • La requête large avec les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes utilise vos pages de destination pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.

     

    Pourquoi est-il préférable d’utiliser les enchères automatiques plutôt que les enchères manuelles pour créer une campagne Google Ads réussie ?

    • Parce que la complexité croissante du parcours client nécessite de baser les enchères sur le comportement général des utilisateurs.
    • Parce que vous risquez de passer à côté de conversions cruciales si vous ne définissez pas vos enchères efficacement.
    • Parce que l’enchère “appropriée” peut devenir une cible statique difficile à atteindre.
    • Parce que l’intention des utilisateurs et la probabilité qu’ils réalisent une action intéressante pour votre entreprise ne varient pas selon la zone géographique, l’heure ou le type d’appareil.

     

    Quelles sont les deux choses que les utilisateurs attendent de leurs requêtes de recherche et que les composants leur permettent d’obtenir ?

    • Ils leur permettent d’obtenir des informations au moment opportun.
    • Ils leur permettent d’obtenir des images attrayantes.
    • Ils leur permettent d’obtenir des comparaisons de produits et de services.
    • Ils leur permettent d’obtenir des informations pertinentes.

     

    Pete est le directeur marketing d’une entreprise de voitures électriques. Il a récemment sélectionné l’objectif “Prospects” pour ses campagnes sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Quel résultat souhaite-t-il obtenir en choisissant cet objectif ?

    • Augmenter le nombre d’inscriptions de clients potentiels à la newsletter.
    • Encourager les clients à acheter des voitures électriques.
    • Inciter davantage d’internautes à parcourir son site Web.
    • Promouvoir des vidéos qui parlent de la mission de l’entreprise.

     

    Le score d’optimisation des annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche Google est calculé par un algorithme qui examine les aspects clés de vos comptes. Ce score vous permet d’optimiser vos campagnes d’annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche. Quelles sont les sources de données utilisées pour calculer les recommandations d’optimisation ?

    • Les scénarios générés par les utilisateurs
    • Les responsables de compte
    • Les paramètres de compte
    • Les chiffres de vente de l’entreprise
    • Les données sur le secteur

     

    Une start-up qui propose un service de livraison de produits bio se lance dans plusieurs villes à travers tout le pays. L’entreprise décide d’utiliser une expression exacte dans sa campagne publicitaire sur le Réseau de Recherche avec les mots clés “livraison”, “produits” et “bio”.

    • En quoi l’expression exacte sera-t-elle utile pour la campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche de l’entreprise ?
    • Si les termes de recherche ont la même signification que le mot clé, son annonce apparaîtra.
    • Si les termes de recherche contiennent les trois mots clés, son annonce apparaîtra.
    • Si les termes de recherche incluent la signification des mots clés, son annonce apparaîtra.
    • Si les termes de recherche sont liés au mot clé, son annonce apparaîtra.

     

    Une fois que les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et la requête large sont implémentées, quelles sont les trois bonnes pratiques de campagne à suivre ?

    • Utiliser les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • Faire attention au ciblage par mots clés à exclure
    • Utiliser des signaux de contexte
    • Utiliser des rapports multi-appareils
    • Suivre le niveau de qualité

     

    Une société d’auto-édition a déterminé que ses clients potentiels à plus forte valeur la contactaient par le biais d’un formulaire sur son site Web. Elle voudrait que plus de prospects lui envoient ce formulaire. Quel est le bon objectif de campagne pour cette entreprise ?

    • Couverture et notoriété de la marque
    • Trafic vers le site Web
    • Prospects
    • Considération du produit et de la marque

     

    Rina a entendu parler du niveau de qualité et souhaiterait savoir de quoi il s’agit exactement. Quelle description est correcte ?

    • C’est une estimation de la qualité de vos annonces, mots clés et pages de destination.
    • C’est une métrique qui évalue la qualité du trafic généré par les utilisateurs cliquant sur vos annonces.
    • Il s’agit d’un score final basé sur l’ensemble des éléments constituant la structure de votre compte.
    • Il s’agit des commentaires laissés par les utilisateurs qui ont cliqué sur votre annonce et qui ont parcouru votre site Web.

     

    Où se trouvent l’état de vos enchères, vos performances au fil du temps et des données sur les délais de conversion ?

    • Dans le rapport sur les mots clés d’enchères
    • Dans le rapport sur la stratégie d’enchères
    • Dans le Planificateur de stratégies de performances
    • Dans l’analyse des enchères

     

    Vous gérez l’activité marketing d’une petite entreprise et disposez d’un budget limité pour atteindre un maximum de personnes. Comment Google Ads peut-il vous aider ?

    • Google Ads vous permet de définir un montant maximum à dépenser par mois.
    • Avec Google Ads, vous payez toujours au coût par couverture, prédéterminé par votre budget.
    • Google Ads vous fait gagner du temps en définissant lui-même votre budget quotidien.
    • Avec Google Ads, vos annonces seront diffusées sur tous les moteurs de recherche disponibles.

     

    Linda est consciente qu’une campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche de Google serait très bénéfique pour son entreprise d’e-commerce. Quels sont les deux moyens d’action qu’elle peut mettre en œuvre à l’aide d’une telle campagne ?

    • Elle peut diffuser une photo de chacun de ses produits, accompagnée d’un titre, d’un prix, du nom du magasin, etc.
    • Son entreprise peut être présente au moment précis où un utilisateur recherche le type de produits qu’elle propose.
    • Son entreprise peut figurer dans les résultats de recherche lorsque des entreprises semblables à la sienne y apparaissent.
    • Une vidéo peut présenter ses produits auprès des utilisateurs qui témoignent d’un intérêt pour son entreprise.
    • Son entreprise peut attirer l’attention des utilisateurs lorsqu’ils interagissent avec une application mobile.

     

    Combien d’annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche Google Ads autorise-t-il ?

    • Google Ads autorise cinq annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte qui doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.
    • Google Ads autorise trois annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.
    • Google Ads autorise six annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.
    • Google Ads autorise un nombre illimité d’annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit apparaître dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, du titre 2 ou de la description 1.

     

    Mary se familiarise avec les composants d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche. Associez chaque description au bon composant.

    • Donne aux utilisateurs une idée de la page vers laquelle ils seront redirigés s’ils cliquent sur l’annonce (1)
    • Permet aux annonceurs de fournir des informations sur leur produit ou leur service (2)
    • Les utilisateurs remarquent généralement ce composant en premier (3)
    • Redirige les utilisateurs vers une page spécifique d’un site Web (4)
    • Description (2)
    • URL à afficher (1)
    • Titre (3)
    • URL finale (4)

     

    Parmi les réponses suivantes, quels sont les deux types de stratégies d’enchères intelligentes basées sur la valeur ?

    • CPC manuel
    • Taux d’impressions cible
    • Maximiser la valeur de conversion
    • Maximiser la valeur de conversion avec ROAS cible

     

    Trois moyens efficaces permettent aux marketeurs d’appliquer des recommandations qui ont un impact sur le score d’optimisation. Lesquels ?

    • Examiner les recommandations et ajuster les paramètres de campagne en conséquence
    • Examiner et appliquer des recommandations individuelles dans votre rapport sur les mots clés
    • Activer l’application automatique de recommandations spécifiques
    • Examiner et appliquer des recommandations individuelles dans chacune des catégories
    • Choisir “Tout appliquer” pour implémenter toutes les recommandations en un clic

     

    Quelle méthode devriez-vous choisir pour réussir à implémenter et à tester la requête large sur les campagnes basées sur cette option de ciblage qui ont pour but d’analyser les données de conversion ?

    • Vous devriez utiliser l’Outil de planification des mots clés pour trouver de nouveaux mots clés pertinents pour votre entreprise et votre audience cible.
    • Vous devriez utiliser la fonctionnalité Types de correspondance des mots clés dans Google Ads. Cela vous permettra de voir comment vos mots clés en requête large sont mis en correspondance.
    • Vous devriez implémenter les mots clés en requête large en configurant un test en un clic. Cela créera automatiquement un test qui suivra toutes les bonnes pratiques.
    • Vous devriez utiliser la fonctionnalité de suivi des conversions dans Google Ads. Elle vous permettra de suivre le nombre de conversions générées via vos mots clés en requête large.

     

    Vous souhaitez améliorer la pertinence d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche Google afin de la rendre plus intéressante pour les clients potentiels et d’apporter des informations utiles à leurs recherches. Quelles sont les deux mesures que vous pouvez prendre ?

    • Sélectionner des zones géographiques distinctes.
    • Sélectionner uniquement les langues pertinentes dans la configuration de la campagne.
    • Modifier le message d’incitation à l’action de l’annonce.
    • Réécrire la page de destination de façon plus claire.
    • Publier des déclarations de transparence sur le site Web.

     

    Une agence de recrutement en ligne a déterminé que ses clients à plus forte valeur la contactaient par le biais de son site Web. Elle voudrait que davantage de clients potentiels lui envoient un formulaire de participation. Quel est le bon objectif de campagne pour cette entreprise ?

    • Couverture et notoriété de la marque
    • Prospects
    • Ventes
    • Considération du produit et de la marque

     

    Quels sont les deux avantages de combiner la requête large, les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche ?

    • Cela permet aux annonceurs de toucher le bon utilisateur, au bon prix et avec des annonces pertinentes.
    • Cela permet de générer automatiquement des titres basés sur les sites Web des annonceurs.
    • Cela permet aux marketeurs de gagner du temps et de le réinvestir dans les axes prioritaires.
    • Cela permet aux marketeurs de ne plus avoir à optimiser les campagnes sur le Réseau de Recherche.

     

    Vous êtes responsable marketing et devez établir chaque mois un budget de publicité en ligne. Vous décidez d’utiliser le Planificateur de performances de Google Ads pour vous aider. Quels en sont les deux avantages ?

    • Les prévisions du Planificateur de performances reposent sur des milliards de recherches Google effectuées chaque semaine.
    • Le Planificateur de performances peut vous aider à identifier des fonds provenant d’autres budgets opérationnels afin de les allouer au marketing.
    • Le Planificateur de performances utilise le machine learning pour effectuer des prévisions.
    • Le Planificateur de performances peut s’intégrer à d’autres logiciels de budgétisation comme QuickBooks.

     

    Quels sont les trois moyens efficaces pour les marketeurs d’appliquer des recommandations qui ont un impact sur le score d’optimisation ?

    • Passer en revue et appliquer des recommandations individuelles dans votre rapport sur les mots clés.
    • Passer en revue les recommandations et effectuer des ajustements dans les paramètres de campagne.
    • Utiliser “Tout appliquer” pour implémenter toutes les recommandations en un clic.
    • Activer l’application automatique de certaines recommandations.
    • Passer en revue et appliquer des recommandations individuelles dans chaque catégorie.

     

    Toutes les annonces contiennent une URL qui indique l’adresse de votre site Web. Vous pouvez ajouter, dans l’URL à afficher de chaque annonce textuelle, deux champs de “chemin d’accès” facultatifs. Quel avantage ces champs facultatifs offrent-ils ?

    • Ils permettent au système Google Ads de prévoir le contenu affiché sur la page de destination
    • Ils permettent aux utilisateurs de choisir la page de destination à laquelle ils souhaitent accéder
    • Ils donnent aux utilisateurs une idée de ce qu’ils verront en cliquant sur l’annonce
    • Ils associent la bonne page de destination au terme de recherche ayant déclenché la diffusion de l’annonce

     

    Steven est responsable publicitaire dans une grande entreprise spécialisée dans la vente de pièces de rechange automobiles. Il consulte la page “Recommandations” de Google Ads pour élaborer des stratégies d’optimisation de ses campagnes sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Il s’intéresse de près au score d’optimisation. À quoi lui sert-il ?

    • À recevoir des informations sur les tendances générales
    • À se concentrer sur certains mots clés
    • À exploiter pleinement la fréquence étendue de mises à jour quotidiennes
    • À appliquer des recommandations à plusieurs niveaux de sa stratégie publicitaire

     

    Une entreprise d’électronique lance un téléviseur qui inclut une fonctionnalité d’accessibilité à commande vocale. Elle décide de recourir à une expression exacte dans sa campagne publicitaire sur le Réseau de Recherche avec les mots clés “téléviseur”, “accessible” et “voix”. Quel sera l’avantage de l’expression exacte pour la campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche de l’entreprise ?

    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche contiennent les trois mots clés exacts.
    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche incluent la signification du mot clé.
    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche ont la même signification que le mot clé.
    • Son annonce apparaîtra si les termes de recherche sont liés au mot clé.

     

    Quels sont les trois avantages de l’application automatique des recommandations ?

    • Vous appliquez systématiquement les bonnes pratiques sur vos comptes Google Ads.
    • Vous activez automatiquement les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes.
    • Vous pouvez l’activer sans augmentation du budget.
    • Vous implémentez les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche automatiquement.
    • Vous constatez de meilleures performances de campagne.

     

    Comment l’IA de Google répond-elle aux besoins des marketeurs qui veulent maximiser les performances des annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche parmi les milliards de recherches Google chaque jour ?

    • Elle est si efficace que les marketeurs n’ont même pas besoin d’investir dans des composants Image de haute qualité pour obtenir le résultat souhaité.
    • Elle permet à la requête large et aux stratégies d’enchères intelligentes de mettre en correspondance les annonces avec les requêtes et d’ajuster les enchères automatiquement de façon instantanée.
    • Elle permet au classement de l’annonce de donner la priorité soit à la pertinence de l’annonce, soit à l’estimation du taux de clics.
    • Elle permet aux stratégies d’enchères intelligentes de prédire les requêtes à volume élevé et définit automatiquement des enchères en conséquence.

     

    Théo souhaite améliorer sa campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Sur la page “Recommandations” de Google Ads, il constate que le score d’optimisation de la campagne est de 75 %. Pourquoi ?

    • La campagne peut améliorer ses performances de 25 % si les recommandations associées sont suivies.
    • La campagne est plus performante que 75 % des campagnes sur le Réseau de Recherche.
    • La campagne doit améliorer ses performances de 75 % pour être totalement optimisée.
    • La campagne pourrait améliorer ses performances de 25 % dans la limite du budget alloué.

     

    Quelle est la variable qui détermine si une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche apparaît dans les résultats d’une recherche, et à quelle position elle est diffusée ?

    • Il s’agit des enchères. Elles sont basées sur le montant que les marketeurs paieront pour un clic.
    • Il s’agit du composant. Il est basé sur les liens annexes et les composants Image.
    • Il s’agit de la qualité de l’annonce. Elle est basée sur la pertinence de l’annonce et du site Web.
    • Il s’agit du classement de l’annonce. Il est basé sur plusieurs facteurs pour diffuser des annonces utiles.

     

    Jerry sait que le taux de clics attendu fait partie des trois principaux facteurs qui définissent le niveau de qualité d’une annonce. Quels sont les deux autres facteurs sur lesquels Jerry devrait se concentrer pour l’améliorer ?

    • Le montant de l’enchère
    • La pertinence de l’annonce
    • L’expérience sur la page de destination de l’annonce
    • Les dimensions de l’annonce
    • Le taux de conversion

     

    Comment les stratégies d’enchères intelligentes avec la requête large peuvent-elles aider les marketeurs ?

    • Elles leur permettent de s’assurer que leur entreprise ne participe qu’aux enchères pertinentes, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée. Pour cela, ces stratégies identifient des signaux de contexte lors de la mise aux enchères.
    • Elles utilisent vos pages de destination pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.
    • Elles leur permettent de s’assurer qu’ils utilisent leur budget pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.
    • Elles utilisent le nom de leur groupe d’annonces pour déterminer les enchères pertinentes auxquelles participer, pour le bon utilisateur et avec une offre adaptée.

     

    Google Ads a été développé autour de trois principes fondamentaux pour aider les entreprises à réussir en ligne. Le premier d’entre eux est la pertinence. Google Ads aide les entreprises à interagir avec les bons clients, au bon moment. Quels sont les deux autres principes ?

    • Contrôle et résultats
    • Crédits et contexte
    • Bénéfices et confidentialité
    • Options et suivi

     

    Que fait automatiquement le Planificateur de performances ?

    • Il prévoit les futures performances de vos campagnes en cours
    • Il recommande une structure d’annonces optimale en fonction de votre budget
    • Il définit votre budget publicitaire en vue d’une croissance maximale
    • Il cible de nouvelles catégories démographiques à l’aide du machine learning

     

    Combien d’annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche Google Ads permet-il de diffuser ?

    • Google Ads permet de diffuser six annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit s’afficher dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, la position du titre 2 ou la position de la description 1
    • Google Ads permet de diffuser un nombre illimité d’annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit s’afficher dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, la position du titre 2 ou la position de la description 1
    • Google Ads permet de diffuser trois annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit s’afficher dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, la position du titre 2 ou la position de la description 1
    • Google Ads permet de diffuser cinq annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche activées par groupe d’annonces. Si du texte doit s’afficher dans chaque annonce, il faut l’ajouter à la position du titre 1, la position du titre 2 ou la position de la description 1.

     

    La boutique en ligne de Marta vend des accessoires pour un smartphone populaire. Sa clientèle actuelle partage plusieurs caractéristiques pertinentes. Elle pense pouvoir obtenir le meilleur retour sur investissement possible en limitant l’audience de sa campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Quels paramètres de campagne peut-elle configurer pour toucher des clients plus spécifiques ?

    • Budget
    • Emplacement
    • Type de budget
    • Type d’appareil
    • Navigateur Web

     

    Priya souhaite attirer un maximum de clients potentiels sur son site Web avec seulement 500 € de budget mensuel. Quel type de stratégie d’enchères automatiques conviendrait le mieux pour sa campagne ?

    • Coût par clic optimisé (eCPC)
    • ROAS cible
    • Maximiser les clics
    • Taux d’impressions cible

     

    Quels sont les deux types de composants pouvant aussi être diffusés en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte ?

    • Les liens annexes dynamiques peuvent aussi être diffusés en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte.
    • Les accroches promotionnelles peuvent aussi être diffusées en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte.
    • Les composants Appel peuvent aussi être diffusés en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte.
    • Les accroches dynamiques peuvent aussi être diffusées en tant que composants automatiques au niveau du compte.

     

    Le score d’optimisation favorise la réussite des marketeurs de deux façons. Lesquelles ?

    • En utilisant l’IA de Google pour planifier des campagnes sans intervention manuelle
    • En déterminant les campagnes à améliorer en priorité
    • En permettant aux équipes marketing de justifier le budget des campagnes
    • En accélérant l’implémentation d’améliorations dans les campagnes

     

    Vous voulez essayer plusieurs combinaisons de titres et de descriptions afin d’optimiser vos résultats. Le service marketing vous suggère d’utiliser les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche. Quels sont deux avantages de ces annonces ?

    • Entonnoirs de conversion plus longs
    • Flexibilité accrue
    • Pertinence accrue
    • Fraude au clic moins importante
    • CTR attendu plus faible

     

    Molly souhaite liquider son stock restant en vue de commander une nouvelle ligne de produits à commercialiser. Elle est prête à augmenter son CPA (coût par acquisition) et le budget alloué à sa campagne, tant que celle-ci génère davantage de ventes. Sa campagne bénéficie d’un investissement total de 25 500 €, génère 1 500 conversions et affiche un CPA de 17 €. Quel plan budgétaire, élaboré à l’aide du Planificateur de performances, permettra à Molly d’atteindre son objectif marketing ?

    • Un investissement de 30 000 € pour générer 1 500 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 20 €.
    • Un investissement de 28 000 € pour générer 1 400 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 20 €.
    • Un investissement de 21 000 € pour générer 1 400 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 15 €.
    • Un investissement de 40 000 € pour générer 2 000 conversions et obtenir un CPA de 20 €.

     

    Quelles sont les deux choses que les utilisateurs attendent de leurs requêtes de recherche et que les composants les aident à obtenir ?

    • Des images attrayantes
    • Des résultats pertinents
    • Des comparaisons de produits et services
    • Des informations opportunes

     

    La requête large utilise trois signaux pour mettre en correspondance les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche avec les requêtes. Lesquels ?

    • Centres d’intérêt
    • Appareil
    • Langue
    • Stratégies d’enchères intelligentes
    • Zone géographique

     

    Que sont les enchères basées sur la valeur ?

    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui s’appuie sur le machine learning pour générer le taux d’impressions cible le plus élevé possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui s’appuie sur le machine learning pour générer le taux de clics le plus élevé possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui s’appuie sur le machine learning pour générer le plus d’impressions possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.
    • Il s’agit d’une stratégie d’enchères intelligentes qui s’appuie sur le machine learning pour générer la valeur de conversion la plus élevée possible en définissant des enchères pour les conversions afin d’atteindre les objectifs d’entreprise.

     

    Quelles recherches peuvent déclencher une annonce contenant le mot clé en requête large “réparation chaudière maison” ?

    • remplacement chaudière maison
    • maisons neuves à vendre
    • maisons à vendre
    • remplacer chaudière maison

     

    Comment le Planificateur de performances aide-t-il les entreprises à augmenter leurs ventes ?

    • En générant le plus de conversions possible pour chaque scénario de dépenses
    • En s’appuyant sur les commentaires des clients pour optimiser l’emplacement des annonces
    • En choisissant un type d’annonce que votre catégorie démographique ciblée trouve attrayante
    • En proposant une remise dans toutes les annonces après l’achat d’une licence

     

    Pourquoi vaut-il mieux utiliser les enchères automatiques plutôt que les enchères manuelles pour créer une campagne Google Ads réussie ?

    • Parce que si vous ne définissez pas vos enchères efficacement, vous risquez de passer à côté de conversions cruciales
    • Parce que le parcours client s’est complexifié et que les enchères doivent être définies en fonction du comportement général des utilisateurs
    • Parce que l’intention des utilisateurs et la probabilité qu’ils réalisent une action intéressante pour votre entreprise ne varient pas selon la zone géographique, l’heure ou le type d’appareil
    • Parce que l’enchère “appropriée” peut devenir une cible statique difficile à atteindre

     

    Brenda essaie d’améliorer le niveau de qualité d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche Google, afin d’augmenter ses chances de progresser dans le classement et de réaliser de meilleures performances lors des enchères publicitaires. Quel changement peut-elle apporter à l’annonce pour améliorer son classement ?

    • Utiliser des couleurs dans le texte du message pour améliorer le niveau de qualité.
    • Rédiger un titre plus percutant pour avoir plus de chances d’améliorer le CTR attendu.
    • Ajouter des messages saisonniers en période de fêtes.
    • Intégrer une image pour rendre l’annonce plus attrayante.

     

    Quels sont les deux types de campagnes sans mot clé dont les marketeurs peuvent se servir afin d’améliorer la couverture incrémentielle ?

    • Les annonces dynamiques du Réseau de Recherche peuvent les aider à atteindre cet objectif.
    • Les annonces textuelles agrandies peuvent les aider à atteindre cet objectif.
    • Les campagnes Performance Max peuvent les aider à atteindre cet objectif.
    • Les annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche peuvent les aider à atteindre cet objectif.

     

    Quels sont les trois facteurs qui ont une incidence sur la qualité d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche au moment des enchères ?

    • L’expérience sur la page de destination de l’annonce
    • La stratégie d’enchères
    • Le classement de l’annonce
    • Le taux de clics attendu
    • La pertinence de l’annonce

     

    Lorsque l’objectif d’une campagne est de gagner en visibilité, quelle stratégie d’enchères l’annonceur doit-il choisir ?

    • Maximiser les clics
    • Maximiser les conversions
    • Coût par clic optimisé (eCPC)
    • Taux d’impressions cible

     

    Karen a évalué le score d’optimisation de sa campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google après avoir constaté une baisse des performances. Il a fortement diminué depuis un mois. Elle accepte l’une des recommandations d’optimisation proposées par Google. Comment évoluera le score d’optimisation de sa campagne ?

    • Il s’améliorera progressivement d’ici la fin de la semaine.
    • Il s’améliorera d’ici la fin du mois.
    • Il s’améliorera dès qu’elle aura accepté la recommandation.
    • Il s’améliorera d’ici la fin de la journée.

     

    Google Ads a pour objectif d’aider les entreprises à réussir en ligne. À cette fin, la solution a été développée autour de trois principes fondamentaux. Lesquels ?

    • Ventes, décision d’achat et intégrité
    • Influence, notoriété et promotion
    • Croissance, couverture et trafic
    • Pertinence, contrôle et résultats

     

    Après avoir diffusé une campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche Google pendant plusieurs mois, Meredith remarque que les ventes des produits concernés commencent à ralentir. Sur la page “Recommandations” de Google Ads, elle constate que le score d’optimisation de la campagne est de 22 %. Que signifie ce score ?

    • 22 % des revenus qu’elle alloue à sa campagne sont mal utilisés.
    • La campagne est susceptible d’améliorer ses performances de 78 % si les recommandations associées sont suivies.
    • La campagne doit augmenter son budget de 22 % pour être totalement optimisée.
    • 78 % des entreprises semblables à la sienne réalisent de meilleures performances.

     

    Lequel de ces facteurs a un impact sur la diffusion d’une annonce sur le Réseau de Recherche dans les résultats d’une requête et sur sa position ?

    • Le classement de l’annonce a un impact, et il est basé sur plusieurs facteurs pour diffuser des annonces utiles.
    • Le composant a un impact, et il est basé sur les liens annexes et les composants Image.
    • La qualité de l’annonce a un impact, et elle est basée sur la pertinence de l’annonce et du site Web.
    • Les enchères ont un impact, et elles sont déterminées par le montant que les marketeurs paieront pour un clic.

     

    Lola est en train de choisir le type de campagne le mieux adapté à ses objectifs commerciaux. Pourquoi doit-elle évaluer ses objectifs avant de déterminer la campagne à utiliser ?

    • Certains types de campagnes ne diffusent des annonces qu’à certains moments de la journée et de la semaine.
    • Les exigences budgétaires minimales et maximales varient en fonction du type de campagne.
    • Le type de campagne déterminera où ses annonces seront affichées et sous quel format.
    • Google Ads créera automatiquement des messages publicitaires adaptés au type de campagne choisi.

     

    Vous avez récemment lancé un nouveau produit : les Sabots Confort. Vous voulez attirer davantage de trafic à l’aide de Google Ads. Cependant, vous souhaitez cibler seulement les recherches qui concernent le nom de votre produit. Comment pouvez-vous attirer du trafic uniquement à partir des requêtes pour “Sabots Confort” ?

    • Avec le ciblage par mots clés
    • Avec la requête large
    • Avec des expressions exactes
    • Avec des mots clés exacts

     

    Siona souhaite s’assurer que ses annonces obtiennent un nombre minimal d’impressions en haut de page. Quel type de stratégie d’enchères automatiques devrait-elle utiliser ?

    • Taux d’impressions cible
    • Maximiser les clics
    • Coût par acquisition (CPA) cible
    • ROAS cible

     

    Quelle est la meilleure méthode pour que les marketeurs atteignent leurs objectifs en utilisant les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche basées sur l’IA ?

    • La combinaison de la requête large, des stratégies d’enchères intelligentes et des annonces responsives sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • L’utilisation de mots clés exacts pour aider les annonces sur le Réseau de Recherche basées sur l’IA à atteindre des audiences spécifiques
    • La réduction et le réinvestissement des budgets de recherche sponsorisée dans des composants Image de haute qualité
    • L’utilisation des enchères manuelles pour les requêtes qui généreront le plus de valeur selon les marketeurs

     

    Vous devez promouvoir une nouvelle gamme de services de plomberie. Vous disposez pour cela d’un budget fixe que vous ne pouvez pas dépasser. Pourquoi Google Ads constitue-t-il une solution viable ?

    • Google Ads garantit que votre entreprise recevra des appels téléphoniques.
    • Google Ads propose des mises aux enchères distinctes pour les petits budgets.
    • Google Ads vous permet de limiter le nombre d’annonces pour lesquelles vous payez, en fonction de votre activité.
    • Google Ads vous offre une maîtrise totale de votre budget.

     

    Reggie gère les campagnes de marketing en ligne d’un magasin spécialisé dans les vitamines et autres compléments alimentaires. Il a lancé une campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche de Google et choisi le trafic vers le site Web comme objectif marketing. Quel résultat attend-il de la campagne ?

    • Obtenir des inscriptions à la newsletter de la part d’internautes intéressés par un mode de vie sain.
    • Générer plus de ventes sur la boutique en ligne.
    • Faire en sorte qu’un plus grand nombre de clients découvrent ses produits.
    • Gagner de nouveaux abonnés aux comptes du magasin sur les réseaux sociaux.

     

    Comment les marketeurs peuvent-ils déterminer l’impact potentiel de l’application des recommandations sur leur score d’optimisation ?

    • En consultant les recommandations, car chacune indique son impact sur le score d’optimisation sous la forme d’un pourcentage.
    • En ayant recours à l’IA de Google pour prévoir comment les conversions augmenteront à la suite des recommandations.
    • En utilisant des outils tiers de confiance pour analyser et optimiser les campagnes.
    • En comparant les paramètres de campagnes semblables avec des scores d’optimisation plus élevés.

     

    Trevor possède une entreprise de fabrication de matériel spécialisé pour la randonnée et l’escalade. Il est encore peu connu dans le secteur, mais est prêt à développer son entreprise. Quels sont les deux types de campagnes Google Ads que Trevor devrait utiliser pour accroître l’exposition de sa marque et toucher des audiences qui s’intéressent à la randonnée et à l’escalade sur le Web ?

    • Campagne vidéo
    • Campagne sur le Réseau de Recherche
    • Campagne Display
    • Campagne Shopping
    • Campagne Discovery

     

    Clara est responsable publicitaire. Elle a été chargée d’optimiser la campagne de son entreprise sur le Réseau de Recherche Google. Quel est l’intérêt du score d’optimisation pour la campagne de Clara ?

    • Savoir si sa campagne est en bonne voie d’atteindre les résultats souhaités
    • Comprendre les performances de son site Web sur le réseau
    • Comparer l’efficacité du texte de son annonce avec celui d’autres annonces
    • Évaluer la popularité de son site Web par rapport à d’autres

     

    Vous avez récemment lancé un nouveau produit : le Fauteuil Fantastique. Vous voulez attirer davantage de trafic à l’aide de Google Ads. Cependant, vous souhaitez cibler seulement les recherches qui concernent le nom de votre produit. Comment pouvez-vous attirer du trafic uniquement à partir des requêtes pour “Fauteuil Fantastique” ?

    • En utilisant l’option “Ciblage par mots clés”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    • En utilisant l’option “Mot clé exact”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    • En utilisant l’option “Expression exacte”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    • En utilisant l’option “Requête large”, car elle attirera du trafic de recherche pour les requêtes avec le nom de produit uniquement.
    Get Certified in Réseau De Recherche NOW!!!

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Google Ads Search Professional Certification Exam Answers

    5 September, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Google Ads Search Professional Certification Exam Answers

    Google Ads Search Professional Certification Answers

    Google Ads Search Professional certification assessment answers are provided in this file. The file encompasses all potential real certification exam questions, which have been generated through multiple exam attempts. Furthermore, detailed explanations have been included for each exam question. This resource can be utilized for exam preparation.

    Familiarize yourself with authentic exam questions to achieve success on your initial attempt.

    Please be aware that Google Ads PROFESSIONAL certifications are “semi-proctored,” meaning the file cannot be directly used on the same device. However, although not encouraged, you can access the file on your phone or another device during the exam.

    • The Google Ads Search assessment consists of 50 questions
    • You have 75 minutes to complete.
    • You will need a score of 80% or higher to pass

     

    Exam URL: https://skillshop.exceedlms.com/student/path/306646/activity/546509

     

    Google Ads Search Professional Certification Exam Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    If a retailer wanted to create responsive search ads to promote their online business, how could they enhance the performance of those ads?

    • By providing at least five unique headlines based on popular keywords related to their business.
    • By using one description to reinforce their message and attaining a consistent brand message.
    • By writing more similar headlines for consistency and driving a uniform message to users.
    • By avoiding the re-use of content from previous successful expanded text ads so that fresh ad content can be created and used instead.

     

    If a local shop in Spain wants to improve ad relevance for their campaigns, what’s a recommended action can they take to do so?

    • Try out a new call-to-action, telling customers to submit their orders via messages.
    • Target the right region and language by focusing on the business’s metro area and using Spanish.
    • Make it easy for users to find the store’s local address on the website landing page.
    • Highlight the shop’s best-selling items to help their business stand out.

     

    Which two of the following options are types of value-based Smart bidding strategies? Select two.

    • Maximize conversion value with target ROAS is a value-based Smart bidding strategy.
    • Manual CPC is a value-based Smart bidding strategy.
    • Maximize conversion value is a value-based Smart bidding strategy.
    • Target impression share is a value-based Smart bidding strategy.

     

    If you were trying to promote a newly launched product and wanted to drive as many sales of the product as possible within your current daily campaign budget, which Smart bidding strategy should you use to reach your objective?

    • Target CPA could help reach the objective.
    • Maximize conversions could help reach the objective.
    • Target ROAS could help reach the objective.
    • Maximize impression share could help reach the objective.

     

    Karla wants to find a way to quickly identify available opportunities that could enhance her Search campaign’s performance. Which resource could assist her in meeting her objective?

    • She could use the search terms report.
    • She could use optimization score.
    • She could use auction insights.
    • She could use the locations report.

     

    What three benefits can you typically expect from implementing a Performance Max campaign? Choose three.

    • You can find queries likely to convert, because Search Ads’s targeting capability uses advertiser-provided assets as a signal for finding them. This is especially useful for advertisers with sparse landing pages or websites.
    • You can grow your reach with Google AI by finding more search queries to convert. You can find more queries to convert because Performance Max exclusively focuses on conversion and value-based bidding strategies.
    • You can factor a wide range of signals into bid optimizations, including attributes like device and location and other signal combinations exclusive to Performance Max.
    • You can drive additional conversions because Performance Max uses assets to create highly relevant ads for Search queries from customers who might be interested in your offerings.
    • You can find audience segments you might have missed otherwise, because Performance Max campaigns look beyond manually selected audience segments.

     

    A marketing manager is setting up Dynamic Search Ads for a future sales promotion. They’d like their Dynamic Search Ads to bring users to the same webpages that their standard search ads already lead to. Which Dynamic Search Ads targeting option could achieve this objective?

    • Using URL.
    • Using all webpages.
    • Using Landing pages from standard ad groups.
    • Using categories.

     

    When you’re using Performance Planner, which two options are recommended best practices to follow? Choose two.

    • Create an 18-month plan across all campaign types: Search, Shopping, Local, Display, Video, Performance Max, and App.
    • Once you have an 18-month plan, check in each month or quarter to make sure you can implement your plan based on the past seven to 10 days.
    • Optimize your campaigns by viewing your keyword report on a regular basis and adding negative keywords.
    • Drive consistency and a uniform message by keeping your headlines similar across the campaign.

     

    An online music school offers bookings for lessons through their website as well as over the phone. They’re using Google Search ads to promote their business and want to set up assets to enhance customer engagement on their ads. Which two assets would help the agency meet their objectives? Choose two.

    • Call assets.
    • Dynamic sitelink.
    • Location assets.
    • App assets.

     

    When you want to view performance trends over time, conversion delay reporting, and bid status, where would you look to get that information?

    • Look at the bidding keyword report.
    • Look at the AMP Validator test.
    • Look at the bid strategy report.
    • Look at the brand Lift survey.

     

    If an ad isn’t performing as well as expected, what’s a recommended way to help improve its clickthrough rate?

    • Optimizing the website for mobile devices
    • Adding negative keywords for enhanced targeting
    • Making sure traffic gets sent to the correct landing page
    • Experimenting with different calls to action

     

    Faith decides to use a Maximize clicks bid strategy on her Google Search campaign, but she wants control over what she’s paying per interaction. What should Faith do when setting up this bid strategy?

    • Provide the system with a maximum cost-per-click limit to control what she’s willing to pay per interaction.
    • Use the Performance Planner to gauge seasonal trends and identify what the daily best bids will be.
    • Set the Google Ads system to ask for authorization before it makes a decision to a bid.
    • Set her daily budget based on estimated cost-per-click.

     

    What are two benefits of Performance Max? Choose two.

    • Gaining more control over when and where your ad is shown, with bid adjustments that can be set at the campaign and ad group level
    • Helping you to multiply conversions across Google Ads inventory with the power of Google AI
    • Ensuring your bids are used when your ads show on websites related to a particular topic for which custom bids have been enabled with topic targeting
    • Finding untapped growth opportunities from new search queries and channels to drive better results towards your goals

     

    An AI-powered Search campaign contains which of these three elements? Choose three.

    • It contains Smart bidding.
    • It contains marketing objectives.
    • It contains expanded text ads.
    • It contains responsive search ads.
    • It contains broad match.

     

    Tamika, the owner of a hotel, uses Performance Planner to identify seasonal trends and plan ahead. When using Performance Planner, what best practice should Tamika follow?

    • She should use Performance Planner only when it’s necessary to forecast the costs of running specific campaigns and their keyword groups.
    • She should develop month-by-month plans in Performance Planner, regularly view the updated forecasts, and check them for changes every week.
    • She should harness the data from her campaign’s last month to build plans in Performance Planner. Then, she should align her campaigns to those forecasts.
    • So that she’s aware of what’s happening in the ad auction, she should use the Reach Report to investigate what her competitors are doing.

     

    You are a marketer. Which option can be a helpful way to save yourself time while improving your optimization score?

    • You can opt in to apply assets at the campaign level.
    • You can opt in to apply recommendations automatically as they surface.
    • You can select “View all” to get recommendations for a given category.
    • You can select “Apply all” for negative keyword targeting.

     

    What are the ways that advertisers who manage multiple Google Ads accounts can streamline reporting, access control, and consolidate billing?

    • Adhere to Google’s best practices for setting up, evaluating, and optimizing campaigns.
    • Develop ad groups with sets of similar ads and keywords.
    • Manage a collection of paid search ads campaigns using a Google Ads account.
    • View and manage Google Ads accounts in a single place using a manager account.

     

    A client has a set campaign budget that they want to spend in order to maximize lead acquisitions. They’re not concerned with a cost-per-action or ROI targets at this time. Which Smart bidding strategy is aligned to these goals?

    • Maximize conversion value
    • Target impression share
    • Maximize conversions
    • Enhanced CPC

     

    Joe has recently launched a new menswear line in his store, and he’d like to promote online purchases of this new line. To reach this objective, what campaign goal should Joe select?

    • Sales
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Website traffic
    • Leads

     

    How can marketers revisit a dismissed recommendation?

    • Consider similar recommendations to the item that’s been dismissed.
    • Wait until the dismissed recommendation resurfaces.
    • Select the Dismissed filter and choose Un-dismiss.
    • Search Google Help Center for the topic on dismissed recommendations.

     

    A national automotive supply chain is working on their annual winter promotion. Their marketing manager intends to use Performance Planner to grow ROI so that they can decide what to focus on for the winter promotion. How might Performance Planner be able to help with this goal?

    • Performance Planner shares insight into optimization strategies for each campaign based on competitive insights.
    • Performance Planner uses competitor bids and budgets to decide the best possible budget for a specific location.
    • Performance Planner uses sales figures to provide a historical conversion total for each location.
    • Performance Planner forecasts opportunities to help make the most of seasonal demand.

     

    A recreational sports complex wants to promote their upgraded batting cages through responsive search ads. Which example correctly shows some of the key elements for an responsive search ad that could help meet their objectives?

    • A final URL and two headlines that focus on an upcoming batting competition www.brandnewbatting.com/tokens/promotion
    • A final URL that links to their payments page, with a display URL of www.brandnewbatting.com/tokens/promotion
    • A final URL that links to their general homepage www.brandnewbatting.com/tokens/promotion
    • A final URL that links to their lessons page, with a display URL of www.brandnewbatting.com/tokens/promotion

     

    What’s one responsive search ad’s benefits?

    • That Google Ads automatically creates customized headlines based on web content
    • That Google Ads automatically tests different combinations to learn which ones will be highest-performing
    • That there’s a single headline format to make things simple, intuitive, and easy to experiment with
    • That there’s an unlimited number of usable headlines to draw from, making testing easy

     

    As a member of the marketing team for a clothing retailer, you plan your company’s monthly online advertising budget. You’ve just decided to use Google Ads’ Performance Planner to do this. Which of the following are two advantages of using Performance Planner? Choose two.

    • You can use it to harness the power of machine learning for forecasting.
    • You can use it to identify funds from other operational budgets to allocate to marketing.
    • You can tap into its forecasting, which is informed by billions of Google searches every week.
    • You can integrate it with other budgeting software, such as Quickbooks.

     

    A pet supplies shop sells cat food and kitty litter. They’re looking to expand their reach. In which way does AI-powered Search Ads help them reach this goal?

    • Phrase match uses Google AI to show ads for queries that include keywords the retailer provides.
    • Responsive search ads lets them use company headlines and descriptions to create an ad relevant for each individual query.
    • Smart bidding data helps the retailer set the best bid for possible queries.
    • Broad match lets the company run their campaign without having to add keywords.

     

    Franklin is creating a Google Search campaign using a conversion-based Smart bidding strategy. He’s decided to use Target ROAS, which will meet his value-based objectives. What best practice can he use to set an initial ROAS target?

    • He could provide a Target ROAS that’s exactly 10x the highest keyword cost in the campaign.
    • He could check on the campaign’s historical conversion value per cost metric in Google Ads and rely on that as a guide.
    • He could provide the system with the conversion cost that he’s hoping to pay in his campaign.
    • He could use an average of what he gauges all his competitors are paying for conversions.

     

    In which ways do responsive search ads decide the combinations of headlines and descriptions to use in a Responsive Search Ad?

    • By automatically testing various combinations of headlines and descriptions to determine which option may deliver optimal performance.
    • By automatically testing various combinations of headlines and descriptions so you can pick the one that’s most likely to convert.
    • By automatically testing various combinations of headlines and descriptions so you can decide which is most likely to be clicked.
    • By automatically testing combinations of headlines and descriptions to help you pick the one that’s most likely to generate the most impressions.

     

    How does value-based bidding work to bid for conversions that drive business objectives?

    • It uses machine learning to drive the highest impressions possible.
    • It uses machine learning to maximize conversion value.
    • It uses machine learning to drive the highest target impression share possible.
    • It uses machine learning to drive the highest clickthrough rate possible.

     

    Omar is launching a Google Search campaign to generate traffic to his store. He wants to ensure that his ads appear only during his store’s business hours. What should he do when he creates his campaign?

    • Submit a form to Google that outlines his store’s hours of operation.
    • Set a code snippet on his website to inform Google Ads of his business hours of operation.
    • Set his ad schedule to only show ads when the store is open.
    • Create a Google My Business listing and sync it with his Google Ads campaign.

     

    Which of these two searches would result in an ad showing for broad match keyword “car window repair?” Choose two.

    • replace car window
    • second-hand cars for sale
    • cars for sale
    • automobile glass replacement

     

    What’s a way that AI-powered Search helps to maximize performance for any auction?

    • It utilizes a broad match strategy that permits marketers to select the signals used to align their ads to queries.
    • It serves ads on all Google channels, which expands a campaign’s reach.
    • It matches ads to queries, tailors bids, and generates relevant ads for every individual query.
    • It gives marketers data they need to enhance their search campaigns manually.

     

    An account manager is setting up assets for their Google Search campaign. They create several sitelink assets at the account level and then create more sitelinks for their campaign as well as for a particular ad group. Which sitelink assets will serve with ads?

    • The sitelink assets served will always change based on the user’s query.
    • The campaign sitelinks, because campaigns include a collection of ad groups and will serve by default.
    • The account sitelinks, because the higher-level assets will override the lower-level assets.
    • The ad group sitelinks, because the lower-level assets will override the higher-level assets.

     

    The structure of Google Ads accounts features three different levels. If an advertiser would like to update their budget, at which level could they make the change?

    • At the account level
    • At either the account level or the campaign level
    • At the ad group level
    • At the campaign level

     

    An urban landscaping company is about to launch a campaign directed at potential government customers. These customers typically reach out to them via email. Which campaign objective should be used for this campaign?

    • Leads is the best-suited objective.
    • Website traffic is the best-suited objective.
    • Product or brand consideration is the best-suited objective.
    • Brand awareness is the best-suited objective.

     

    Annabelle needs to increase store purchases for her established national record store chain. What’s Annabelle’s Google Ads marketing objective?

    • Build brand awareness
    • Increase web traffic
    • Drive sales
    • Generate leads

     

    What two items are required when building a manually created asset? Choose two.

    • Business information
    • A headline
    • A description
    • A sitelink

     

    A company wants to create responsive search ads to coincide with their upcoming summer promotion. Which responsive search ads best practice should they keep in mind?

    • Direct the final URL to the company’s “About” page so that customers can learn more about the company.
    • Repeat the same or similar phrases across the ad.
    • Use top-performing headlines and descriptions from their relevant expanded text ads.
    • Write the minimum amount of headlines required to test what performs best.

     

    Luis is thinking about adding Dynamic Search ads to his Search advertising strategy. How can Luis benefit from using Dynamic Search ads?

    • These ads offer granular control of the keywords used in online ads.
    • These ads can give a lower cost-per-acquisition than keyword-targeted campaigns.
    • These ads appear on the first page — if not at the very top — of search results.
    • These ads showcase a dynamically created and relevant headline.

     

    What benefits can be gained by pairing responsive search ads with broad match keywords and Smart bidding?

    • You better attribute calls and location actions to your ads, which optimizes performance.
    • You get a snapshot of key performance metrics and statuses that are specific to each type of strategy.
    • You gain new, high-performing queries and can optimize your bids in real time.
    • You take immediate bulk action on issues and opportunities that you discover by personally analyzing your data.

     

    When an advertiser’s campaign goal is visibility, which bidding strategy would you recommend?

    • You’d recommend Enhanced cost-per-click (ECPC).
    • You’d recommend Maximize conversions.
    • You’d recommend Maximize clicks.
    • You’d recommend Target impression share.

     

    What benefit can you get from using Smart bidding with broad match?

    • Your budget is the variable that decides which auctions you compete in, to help make sure you’re only competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Your ad group name is the variable that decides which auctions to compete in and this ensures that you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Your landing pages are the variable that decide which auctions to compete in so that you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Your access to contextual signals at auction time helps make sure you only compete in the right auctions, at the right time, for the right user.

     

    While looking at his campaign’s latest search terms report, Manuel notices search queries that don’t appear to match his core business are triggering his ads to serve. To make sure that his ads are only serving on relevant searches, what step can Manuel take?

    • Manuel can switch to a cost-per-action bid strategy.
    • Manuel can create a Customer Match list.
    • Manuel can add these terms as negative keywords.
    • Manuel can use broad match keywords.

     

    What’s the first step to creating a campaign?

    • Work to determine the best budget for your campaign.
    • Define success by selecting a marketing objective.
    • Identify what campaign type works best for your business goals.
    • Identify and select the right audience for your campaign.

     

    What three recommended campaign best practices should you follow after implementing Smart bidding and broad match? Choose three.

    • Using responsive search ads, including all relevant assets, and making sure that all headlines and website landing pages reflect whatever queries you’re targeting in your campaigns.
    • Ensuring that you’ve set the correct targets for your business goals, using data-driven attribution models, and ensuring budgets are able to capture increased conversions.
    • Using cross-device reporting to make sure you can identify a user across different environments including web and mobile apps.
    • Organizing your ad groups according to a common theme, like “types of products or services”.
    • Making sure you review your ad policies to confirm that your ads comply and to prevent any disapprovals.

     

    When you analyze conversion data on broad match campaigns, which of the following is a recommended method to implement and test broad match?

    • Use One-Click Experiment Apply, after implementing broad match keywords, to automatically create an experiment that follows best practices.
    • Use conversion tracking in Google Ads to track the number of conversions that your broad match keywords are generating.
    • Use Keyword Planner to discover new keywords that are relevant to your business and your target audience.
    • Use the keyword match types feature in Google Ads to determine how your broad match keywords are being matched.

     

    Your goal is to attract more traffic via Google Ads, but only for searches solely for a newly launched product brand, Power Gloves. What strategy should be used to attract more traffic while keeping it limited to queries that include the product brand, Power Gloves?

    • Broad match with brand restriction should be used.
    • Phrase match with brand restriction should be used.
    • Keyword targeting with brand restriction should be used.
    • Exact match with brand restriction should be used.

     

    Nikolay is using the bid strategy report to evaluate performance of his Google Search campaign on Target CPA. He wants to understand how his campaign’s performance has fluctuated over time with regard to his actual CPA over the past six months. Where can he find this information in the report?

    • Auction insights.
    • Performance history.
    • Top signals.
    • Bid strategy status.

     

    Khalid wants his Google Search campaign to drive as much traffic to his site as possible. But he also wants to stay within a given budget. What method can he follow to achieve this goal?

    • He can use Enhanced CPC and input a daily budget.
    • He can use Target ROAS and input his historical ROAS.
    • He can use Maximize clicks and, for more control, put in place a bid cap.
    • He can use Target impression share with an impression limit.

     

    What are the three key components of a campaign’s structure? Choose three.

    • Ad policy.
    • Billing information.
    • Targeting.
    • Ad formats.
    • Bid strategies.

     

    If someone is managing Google Ads accounts for multiple clients, what are two ways they can review and implement recommendations for the accounts they oversee? Choose two.

    • They can visit the Recommendations page for one of their client’s Google Ads accounts.
    • They can email their clients to ask for a summary of Recommendations for their accounts.
    • They can navigate to the Recommendations page for their Google Ads Manager Account.
    • They can evaluate their clients’ campaign performance against similar campaigns using the Recommendations page.

     

    What are three benefits of implementing Performance Max campaigns? Choose three.

    • Performance Max campaigns look beyond manually selected audience segments in your campaign to find audience segments that you may have missed to improve the campaign’s performance.
    • With Performance Max, you can factor a wide range of signals into your bid optimizations. This includes attributes like device and location, and additional signal combinations exclusive to Performance Max.
    • In Performance Max, Search Ads’s targeting capability relies on advertiser-provided assets as a signal for finding queries likely to convert. This is helpful for advertisers with sparse landing pages or websites.
    • Performance Max uses assets to create highly relevant ads for Search queries. Because of these ads’ higher relevance, these adaptive creatives can drive additional conversions.
    • Performance Max campaigns focus exclusively on conversion and value-based bidding strategies, which enables Google AI to help grow marketers’ reach by finding more search queries to convert.

     

    How does AI-powered Search help maximize performance in every auction?

    • With Google AI, marketers are equipped with data to enhance their search campaigns manually.
    • A broad match strategy uses Google AI, enabling marketers to select signals used to match their ads with queries.
    • Search uses Google AI to match ads with queries, as well as tailor bids and create relevant ads for each query.
    • AI-powered Search Ads serve ads across all Google channels, expanding campaigns’ reach.

     

    Which of these is a benefit of responsive search ads?

    • The automatic creation of headlines based on web content
    • The unlimited number of usable headlines at your disposal, which makes testing easy
    • The testing of different combinations to learn which ones will perform best
    • The single headline format being simple, intuitive, and easy to experiment with

     

    A marketer is setting up a Google Search campaign using a conversion-based Smart Bidding strategy. To meet their value-based objectives, they’ve chosen to use Target ROAS. What method can they follow to select their initial ROAS target?

    • They can investigate the campaign’s historical conversion value per cost metric in Google Ads, and then they can use that as a guide.
    • They can offer the system the conversion cost that they wish to pay in their campaign.
    • They can provide a Target ROAS that’s set to 10x the highest keyword cost in their campaign.
    • They can use an average of what they estimate their competition is paying for conversions.

     

    How does value-based bidding work?

    • Value-based bidding is a Smart Bidding strategy that uses machine learning to drive the highest impressions possible, bidding for conversions that drive business objectives.
    • Value-based bidding is a Smart Bidding strategy that uses machine learning to drive the highest clickthrough rate possible, bidding for conversions that drive business objectives.
    • Value-based bidding is a Smart Bidding strategy that uses machine learning to maximize conversion value, bidding for conversions that drive business objectives.
    • Value-based bidding is a Smart Bidding strategy that uses machine learning to drive the highest target impression share possible, bidding for conversions that drive business objectives.

     

    Patrizio is looking for a way to quickly identify available opportunities to improve the performance of his Search campaign. Which resource could he use to achieve his goal?

    • Auction insights
    • Locations report
    • Optimization score
    • Search terms report

     

    A company specializing in building skateparks is launching a campaign, and many of their customers are local government leaders. These prospective customers often reach out initially via email. Which campaign objective should be used for this company?

    • Website traffic
    • Product or brand consideration
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Leads

     

    You’re a marketing executive at an airline company and have been asked to plan your company’s online advertising budget on a monthly basis. You decided to use Google Ads’ Performance Planner to help accomplish this task. What are two advantages Performance Planner offers you? Choose two.

    • Performance Planner integrates with other budgeting software, such as Quickbooks.
    • Performance Planner uses machine learning for forecasting.
    • Performance Planner forecasting is powered by billions of Google searches conducted each week.
    • Performance Planner will help you identify funds from other operational budgets to allocate to marketing.

     

    Google Ads accounts have three levels. To change their budget, at which level would an advertiser make their change?

    • Account level only
    • Either the account level or the campaign level
    • Campaign level only
    • Ad group level only

     

    Which two of the following items are required when developing a manually created asset?

    • Sitelink is required.
    • Business information is required.
    • A headline is required.
    • A description is required.

     

    You’re setting up assets for a Google Search campaign. You create several sitelink assets at the account level and then create more sitelinks for the campaign and a particular ad group. Which sitelink assets will serve with ads?

    • The campaign sitelinks, because campaigns will serve by default due to the fact they include a collection of ad groups.
    • The ad group sitelinks will serve because the higher-level assets will be overridden by the lower-level assets.
    • The account sitelinks, because the lower-level assets will be overridden by the higher-level assets.
    • The sitelink assets served will always change depending on the user’s query.

     

    You have been tasked with promoting a newly launched product. You want to drive as many sales of this product as possible within your current daily campaign budget. Which Smart bidding strategy should be used to meet your objective?

    • Maximize impression share
    • Maximize conversions
    • Target ROAS
    • Target CPA

     

    What are three key elements of an AI-powered Search campaign? Choose three.

    • Expanded text ads
    • Smart bidding
    • Marketing objectives
    • Broad match
    • Responsive search ads

     

    How do responsive search ads determine which combinations of headlines and descriptions to use in a Responsive Search Ad?

    • Responsive search ads automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions to learn which item will perform optimally.
    • Responsive search ads automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions to find which is most likely to be clicked.
    • Responsive search ads automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions to choose the one that’s most likely to convert.
    • Responsive search ads automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions to find one that’s likely to generate the most impressions.

     

    You manage multiple Google Ads accounts for a marketing agency. What are two ways for you to review and implement recommendations for the accounts you oversee? Choose two.

    • Go to the Recommendations page to evaluate your clients’ campaign performance against similar campaigns.
    • Navigate to the Recommendations page for your Google Ads Manager Account.
    • Email your clients requesting a summary of Recommendations for their accounts.
    • Visit the Recommendations page for one of your client’s Google Ads accounts.

     

    You need to check on your bid status, performance trends over time, and conversion delay reporting. Where would you go to view those items?

    • Go to the bidding keyword report
    • Go to the AMP Validator test
    • Go to the Brand Lift survey responses
    • Go to the bid strategy report

     

    After implementing Smart bidding and broad match, what are three recommended campaign best practices to follow? Choose three.

    • Use responsive search ads, including all relevant assets. Make sure headlines and website landing pages reflect the queries being targeted in your campaigns.
    • Use cross-device reporting to ensure you’re able to identify a user across different environments including web and mobile apps.
    • Ensure you’ve set the right targets for your business goals. Use data-driven attribution models and ensure budgets are able to capture increased conversions.
    • Be sure to review your ad policies to confirm that your ads are compliant and to prevent any disapprovals.
    • Organize your ad groups by a common theme. For example: Types of products or services.

     

    Which is the first step for creating a campaign?

    • Identifying which campaign type aligns most closely with your business goals
    • Identifying and selecting the right audience for your campaign
    • Defining success with the selection of a marketing objective
    • Determining the best budget for your campaign

     

    In which way can advertisers who manage multiple Google Ads accounts streamline reporting, access control, and consolidate billing?

    • Creating and managing ad groups with sets of similar ads and keywords
    • Controlling Google Ads accounts from a single place using a manager account
    • Managing a collection of paid search ads through a Google Ads account
    • Following Google’s best practices for setting up, evaluating, and optimizing campaigns

     

    If a retailer wanted to create responsive search ads in conjunction with a sales promotion coming up in the spring, which responsive search ads best practice should they keep in mind?

    • The use of top-performing headlines and descriptions from relevant expanded text ads
    • The technique of directing the final URL to the company’s “About” page so that customers can learn more about the company
    • The approach of writing a minimal amount of headlines so you can test which ones perform best
    • The repetition of the same or similar phrases across the ad

     

    In broad match campaigns, to help analyze conversion data, which method can you use to successfully implement and test broad match?

    • You can use conversion tracking in Google Ads to track the number of conversions that are generated by your broad match keywords.
    • You can use the Keyword Planner to find new keywords that are relevant to your business and your target audience.
    • You can use One-Click Experiment Apply, after implementing broad match keywords, which creates an experiment automatically, following all best practices.
    • You can use the keyword match types feature in Google Ads to see how your broad match keywords are being matched.

     

    Scott is considering using Dynamic Search Ads as part of his Search advertising strategy. What is a key benefit of using Dynamic Search Ads?

    • They show a relevant and dynamically generated headline.
    • They provide granular control of the keywords used in online ads.
    • They have a lower cost-per-acquisition than keyword-targeted campaigns.
    • They appear on the first page of search results, if not at the very top.

     

    A leading supply chain company is working on their annual winter promotion. Their marketing manager intends to use Performance Planner to grow ROI so that they can decide what to focus on for the winter promotion. How might Performance Planner be able to help with this goal?

    • Performance Planner uses sales figures to provide a historical conversion total for each location.
    • Performance Planner shares insight into optimization strategies for each campaign based on competitive insights.
    • Performance Planner uses competitor bids and budgets to decide the best possible budget for a specific location.
    • Performance Planner forecasts opportunities to help make the most of seasonal demand.

     

    In which two ways is Performance Max useful? Choose two.

    • When you need to find untapped growth opportunities.
    • When you need to multiply conversions across Google Ads inventory.
    • When you need to gain more control over when and where your ad is shown, with bid adjustments that can be set at the campaign and ad group level.
    • When you need to ensure your bids are used when your ads show on websites related to a particular topic for which custom bids have been enabled with topic targeting.

     

    To identify seasonal trends and make plans for his travel agency, Jeff uses Performance Planner. What guideline should he observe when using Performance Planner?

    • Jeff ought to only use the data from his campaign’s last month to build plans in the tool and then align his campaigns to those forecasts.
    • She should develop month-by-month plans in Performance Planner, regularly view the updated forecasts, and check them for changes every week.
    • Jeff should research what his competitors are doing by using the Reach Report. Then he’ll be aware of what’s happening in the ad auction.
    • Jeff ought to use the tool when it’s required to estimate the costs of running specific campaigns and their keyword groups.

     

    Which Smart bidding strategy would you use if you had a set campaign budget to spend on maximizing your lead acquisitions without focusing on cost-per-action or ROI targets?

    • You would use Target impression share.
    • You would use Maximize conversion value.
    • You would use Enhanced CPC.
    • You would use Maximize conversions.

     

    Which of the following two options are considered to be best practices for using Performance Planner? Choose two.

    • Be sure, once you create an 18-month plan, that you check in monthly or quarterly to confirm the plan can be implemented based on the most recent seven to 10 days
    • Be sure to review your keyword report regularly and optimize your campaigns by adding negative keywords.
    • Be sure to plan up to 18 months ahead across all campaign types including Search, Shopping, Local, Display, Video, Performance Max, and App.
    • Be sure to write more similar headlines to provide consistency and to communicate a uniform message to your users.

     

    Bellamy wants to advertise his business online by using a Google Search campaign. He knows that he’ll need to determine where he wants to advertise and how much he wants to spend. What’s another key element that Bellamy will need to include to reach relevant users with his Search campaign?

    • He’ll have to decide what videos to use in his Search ad.
    • He’ll need to select keywords to serve ads on relevant user searches.
    • He’ll have to include his business hours.
    • He’ll need to select key competitors.

     

    What benefits are offered from the pairing of responsive search ads with broad match keywords and Smart bidding?

    • You can reach new, high-performing queries and optimize bids in real time when you pair these capabilities.
    • You can get a snapshot view of key performance metrics and statuses specific to each type of strategy.
    • You can do a better job attributing calls and location actions to your ads, which optimizes performance.
    • You can take immediate bulk action on issues and opportunities that you’ve found when analyzing your data.

     

    Which three things are key parts of a campaign’s structure? Choose three.

    • Billing information is one key part.
    • Targeting is one key part.
    • Bid strategies are one key part.
    • Ad formats are one key part.
    • Ad policy is one key part.

     

    Theresa is using the Bid Strategy Report to check on the performance of her Google Search campaign on Target CPA. She’d like to understand how her campaign’s actual CPA performance has changed over time. Where can she discover this information in the report?

    • She can find it in top signals.
    • She can find it in bid strategy status.
    • She can find it in auction insights.
    • She can find it in performance history.

     

    Which two searches can an ad show for broad match keyword ‘car window repair’? Choose two.

    • Replace car window
    • Second-hand cars for sale
    • Automobile glass replacement
    • Cars for sale

     

    Vickie has just introduced a new clothing line in her store and wants to promote online purchases of this new line. What campaign goal should Vickie select to help meet this objective?

    • Leads
    • Website traffic
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Sales

     

    Which bidding strategy should someone consider using for a visibility campaign goal?

    • Use Enhanced cost-per-click (ECPC) for a visibility campaign.
    • Use Maximize conversions for a visibility campaign.
    • Use Maximize clicks for a visibility campaign.
    • Use Target impression share for a visibility campaign.

     

    An advertiser is setting up assets for their Google Search campaign. They create several sitelink assets at the account level and then create more sitelinks for their campaign as well as for a particular ad group. Which sitelink assets will serve with ads?

    • The sitelink assets served will always change since they’re based on the user’s query.
    • The campaign sitelinks, since campaigns include a collection of ad groups and will serve by default.
    • The ad group sitelinks, since the lower-level assets will override the higher-level assets.
    • The account sitelinks, since the higher-level assets will override the lower-level assets.

     

    If you’re a marketer who wants to revisit a dismissed recommendation, which action would you take?

    • You would select the Dismissed filter, then select Un-dismiss.
    • You would look for recommendations that are similar to the dismissed item.
    • You would wait until the dismissed recommendation resurfaces.
    • You would search Google Help Center for tips on dismissed recommendations.

     

    How could a retailer enhance the performance of responsive search ads intended to promote their online business?

    • by supplying five or more unique headlines based on popular keywords related to their business
    • by using only a single description to reinforce their message and thus communicating a more consistent brand message overall
    • by creating more similar headlines for the sake of consistency and thus delivering users a uniform message
    • by not recycling content from successful expanded text ads and instead creating fresh ad content

     

    A vintage clothing retailer sells men’s jackets and ties. They’re looking to expand their reach. What’s one way that Al-powered Search Ads can help them reach this goal?

    • Through responsive search ads that can use the retailer’s headlines and descriptions to build an ad relevant to each specific query
    • Through broad match, by which the company will no longer be required to add keywords for their campaign
    • Through phrase match that relies on Google Al to display ads for queries that include keywords provided by the retailer
    • Through Smart Bidding data that is offered in order to help the retailer set the best bid for potential queries

     

    When it comes to managing multiple Google Ads accounts for a marketing agency, which two ways could you review and implement recommendations for those accounts? Choose two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • You could use the Recommendations page to evaluate your clients’ campaign performance vs. similar campaigns.
    • You could visit the Recommendations page for each client’s Google Ads accounts.
    • You could navigate to the Recommendations page for your Google Ads Manager Account.
    • You could contact your clients to obtain a summary of Recommendations for their accounts.

     

    An amusement park wants their Google Search campaign to promote their new ticketed rollercoaster through responsive search ads. Which example correctly shows some of the key elements for a responsive search ad that could help meet their objectives?

    • A final URL that links to their payments page, with a display URL of www.brandnewbatting.com/tokens/promotion
    • A final URL that links to their general homepage www.ridethelightning.com/tickets/promotion
    • A final URL and two headlines that focus on an upcoming “action photo” feature for rollercoaster riders www.ridethelightning.com/tickets/promotion
    • A final URL that links to their lessons page, with a display URL of www.ridethelightning.com/tickets/promotion

     

    With the introduction of a new clothing line in a store, the store’s marketing manager wants to promote online purchases of this new line. What campaign goal should the marketing manager select to achieve this goal?

    • Website traffic
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Sales
    • Leads

     

    What’s one way to improve the expected clickthrough rate of an ad?

    • Experiment with different calls to action.
    • Add negative keywords for enhanced targeting.
    • Send traffic to the right landing page.
    • Optimize your website for mobile devices.

     

    Donna is thinking about using Dynamic Search ads as part of her Search advertising strategy. What is a helpful benefit of using Dynamic Search ads?

    • Dynamic Search ads feature a lower cost-per-acquisition than keyword-targeted campaigns.
    • Dynamic Search ads offer in-depth control of the keywords used in online ads.
    • Dynamic Search ads present a relevant and dynamically created headline.
    • Dynamic Search ads show on the first page of search resuilts, if not at the top of the page.

     

    If your goal was to drive as many sales of a newly launched product as possible within your current daily campaign budget, which Smart Bidding strategy should you use to reach that goal?

    • Maximize conversions could help reach the goal.
    • Maximize impression share could help reach the goal.
    • Target CPA could help reach the goal.
    • Target ROAS could help reach the goal.

     

    Which responsive search ads best practice should a company keep in mind if they’re looking to create responsive search ads for an upcoming seasonal promotion?

    • Repeating the same or similar phrases across the ad
    • Directing the final URL to the company’s “About” page so that the customers can find out more about the organization
    • Writing the minimum amount of headlines required to test which are the best-performing
    • Using the best-performing headlines and descriptions from their relevant expanded text ads

     

    In reviewing his campaign’s latest search terms report, Kyle sees that search queries that don’t seem to match his core business trigger his ads. What can Kyle do to better make sure that his ads are only serving on relevant searches?

    • Use broad match keywords.
    • Switch to a cost-per-action bid strategy.
    • Create a Customer Match list.
    • Add these terms as negative keywords.

     

    If you have a set campaign budget for spending to maximize lead acquisitions, but you’re not concerned with cost-per-action or ROI targets, which Smart Bidding strategy would align with your goals?

    • Maximize conversions would align with your goals.
    • Target impression share would align with your goals.
    • Maximize conversion value would align with your goals.
    • Enhanced CPC would align with your goals.

     

    You recently launched a new product called Wonder Boots. You want to attract more traffic via Google Ads but only for searches that are solely for the product brand, Wonder Boots. What strategy should be used to attract more traffic while keeping it limited to queries that include the product brand, Wonder Boots?

    • Broad match with brand restriction
    • Keyword targeting with brand restriction
    • Exact match with brand restriction
    • Phrase match with brand restriction

     

    A company that installs swimming pools is about to launch a campaign geared toward prospective government customers that typically reach out by email. Which of these campaign objectives will meet their needs?

    • They should use website traffic as an objective.
    • They should use brand awareness and reach as an objective.
    • They should use Leads as an objective.
    • They should use product or brand consideration as an objective.

     

    An Al-powered Search campaign contains which of these three elements? Choose three.

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • It contains broad match.
    • It contains Smart Bidding.
    • It contains expanded text ads.
    • It contains marketing objectives.
    • It contains responsive search ads.

     

    Sarai wants to use a Google Search campaign to advertise her business online. She knows that she must determine where to advertise and how much to spend. What’s another essential element that Sarai will need to include to reach relevant audiences with her Search campaign?

    • she’ll need to choose keywords to serve ads on relevant audience searches.
    • she’ll have to determine what videos to use in her Search ad.
    • she’ll want to include his business hours.
    • she’ll need to choose key competitors.

     

    In what two ways can Performance Max help you?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • It can help you gain more control over when and where your ad is shown, with bid adjustments that can be set at the campaign and ad group level
    • It can help you multiply conversions across Google Ads inventory through the power of Google Al.
    • It can help ensure your bids are used when your ads are shown on websites
    • It can help you find untapped growth opportunities from new search queries and channels to deliver better results.

     

    Terese is setting up a Google Search campaign with the goal of driving traffic to her store. She wants to set it up so the ads show only when her store is actually open. What should she do when setting up her campaign?

    • She should set her ad schedule to only show ads when the store is open.
    • She should set a code snippet on her website to inform Google Ads of his business hours of operation.
    • She should create a Google My Business listing and sync it with her Google Ads campaign.
    • She should submit a form to Google that outlines her store’s hours of operation.

     

    What’s a benefit of using Smart Bidding with broad match?

    • Broad match with Smart Bidding uses your budget to determine which auctions to compete in, so that for all relevant searches that you could potentially reach with broad match, you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Broad match with Smart Bidding uses your landing pages to determine which auctions to compete in, so that for all relevant searches that you could potentially reach with broad match, you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Broad match with Smart Bidding uses your ad group name to determine which auctions to compete in, so that for all relevant searches that you could potentially reach with broad match, you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Broad match with Smart bidding uses unique contextual signals present at auction time, so that for all relevant searches that you could potentially reach with broad match, you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.

     

    An online computer coding school offers bookings through their website as well as over the phone. They’re using Google Search ads to promote their business and want to set up assets to enhance customer engagement on their ads. Which two assets would help the agency meet their objectives? Choose two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Location assets would be relevant.
    • Dynamic sitelink would be relevant.
    • App assets would be relevant.
    • call assets would be relevant.

     

    If a marketer wants to save time and improve their optimization score, what’s a recommended way for them to do so?

    • They can select “Apply all’ in their negative keyword targeting.
    • They can opt in to apply their assets at the campaign level.
    • They can select “View all” for recommendations in a given category.
    • They can opt in to apply recommendations automatically as they get surfaced.

     

    Erica chooses to use a Maximize clicks bid strategy in her Google Search campaign. But she also wants control over what she’s paying per interaction. What step should Erica take when setting up this bid strategy?

    • She should make sure the Google Ads system asks for authorization before it decides to bid.
    • She should use the Performance Planner to assess seasonal trends and identify what the daily best bids will be.
    • To control what she’s willing to pay per interaction, she needs to provide the system with a maximum cost-per-click limit.
    • She ought to set her daily budget based on estimated cost-per-click.

     

    To check on the performance of his Google Search campaign on Target CPA, radley is using the id Strategy Report. He wants to know how his campaign’s performance has varied over time in regards to his actual CPA over the past six months. Where can radley uncover this information in the id Strategy Report report?

    • In top signals
    • In auction insights
    • In bid strategy status
    • In performance history

     

    How does Al-powered Search help maximize performance in every auction?

    • Search uses Google Al to match ads with queries, as well as tailor bids and create relevant ads for each query.
    • Al-powered Search Ads serve ads across all Google channels, expanding campaigns’ reach.
    • Abroad match strategy uses Google Al, enabling marketers to select signals used to match their ads with queries.
    • With Google Al, marketers are equipped with data to enhance their search campaigns manually.

     

    You’re on a marketing team that wants to implement a value-based Smart Bidding strategy. Which two options could you choose from? Select two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • You can choose Target impression share.
    • You can choose Maximize conversion value.
    • You can choose Manual CPC.
    • You can choose Maximize conversion value with target ROAS.

     

    Which two items are needed when you’re developing a manually created asset? Choose two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • You need a headline.
    • You need a description.
    • You need assitelink.
    • You need business information.

     

    What are the ways that responsive search ads determine the combinations of headlines and descriptions to be used in a Responsive Search Ad?

    • They automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions so you can pick the one most likely to convert.
    • They automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions so you can select the one most likely to get the most impressions.
    • They automatically test different combinations of headlines and descriptions so they can learn which one may offer optimal performance.
    • They automatically test different combinations of headline and descriptions so you can determine which one is most likely to be clicked.

     

    With a future sales promotion in mind, Prisha is setting up Dynamic Search Ads. She’d like her Dynamic Search Ads to bring users to the same webpages that her standard search ads are already leading to. Which Dynamic Search Ads targeting option will meet this goal?

    • URL
    • Categories
    • All webpages
    • Landing pages from standard ad groups

     

    Olga is using Performance Planner to identify seasonal trends and plan effectively for her travel agency. What best practice should Olga follow when using Performance Planner?

    • She should only use the data from her campaign’s last month to build plans in the tool and then align her campaigns to those forecasts.
    • She should use the tool only when it becomes necessary to predict the costs of running specific campaigns and their keyword groups.
    • She should investigate what her competitors are doing by using the Reach Report so she’s aware of what’s happening in the auction.
    • She should create month-by-month plans in the tool, regularly view the updated forecasts, and check them for changes on a weekly basis.

     

    Your marketing colleague wants to revisit a dismissed recommendation. What would you recommend they do?

    • They can apply similar recommendations to the one that was dismissed.
    • They can select the Dismissed filter and choose Un-dismiss.
    • They can wait until the dismissed recommendation resurfaces.
    • They can search Google Help Center to see how to revisit dismissed recommendations.

     

    If your goal was to attract more traffic via Google Ads, but only for searches solely for a newly launched product brand, which strategy would let you do that?

    • Phrase match with brand restriction would let you accomplish this goal.
    • Exact match with brand restriction would let you accomplish this goal.
    • Broad match with brand restriction would let you accomplish this goal.
    • Keyword targeting with brand restriction would let you accomplish this goal.

     

    Which three recommended campaign best practices should you follow after you implement Smart Bidding and broad match? Choose three.

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Making sure you’ve set the right targets for your business goals, using data-driven attribution models, and ensuring budgets are able to capture increased conversions
    • Utilizing cross-device reporting to ensure that you can identify a user across various environments including web and mobile apps
    • Utilizing responsive search ads and including all relevant assets, while also ensuring that all headlines and website landing pages reflect whichever queries you’ve chosen to target in your campaigns
    • Arranging your ad groups under common themes like “types of products or services” as a manner of best practice
    • Ensuring that you’ve reviewed your ad policies to confirm that you’re compliant and won’t be subject to any disapprovals

     

    Robert is checking out his campaign’s latest search terms report. He observes that search queries that don’t seem to match his core business are triggering his ads to serve. What can Robert do to make sure that his ads only serve on relevant searches?

    • Include these terms as negative keywords.
    • Try broad match keywords.
    • Convert to a cost-per-action bid strategy.
    • Develop a Customer Match list.

     

    In what way does Al-powered Search help boost performance at every auction?

    • It relies on a broad match strategy that allows marketers to choose signals used to match their ads to queries.
    • It uses Google Al to match ads to queries and to tailor bids and generate ads relevant to each query.
    • It serves ads across all Google channels, thus expanding the reach of campaigns.
    • It equips marketers with data that allows them to improve their search campaigns manually.

     

    What’s one advantage of using Smart bidding with broad match?

    • Your ad group name determines which auctions to compete in so that you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Your budget determines which auctions to compete in, ensuring that you’re only competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Your access to contextual signals at auction time helps you only compete in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.
    • Your landing pages determine which auctions to compete in so that you only end up competing in the right auctions, at the right bid, for the right user.

     

    Which of these three elements does an Al-powered Search campaign utilize? Choose three.

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • It utilizes responsive search ads.
    • It utilizes broad match.
    • It utilizes expanded text ads.
    • It utilizes marketing objectives.
    • It utilizes Smart Bidding.

     

    A customized furniture company sells sofas and lounge chairs. They’re looking to expand their reach. What’s one example of how Al-powered Search Ads can help them achieve their goals?

    • With Smart Bidding data, which is provided to help the company set the best bid for potential queries.
    • Phrase match can use Google Al to show ads for queries that include the advertiser-provided company keywords.
    • With broad match, the company no longer needs to add keywords for their campaign.
    • Responsive search ads can use company headlines and descriptions to build an ad relevant to each specific query.

     

    If someone wants to analyze conversion data for a broad match campaign, which method would you recommend they use to implement and test broad match?

    • They can use conversion tracking in Google Ads to track how many conversions are being generated by their broad match keywords.
    • They can use the keyword match type feature in Google Ads to see how their broad match keywords are being matched.
    • They can use the Keyword Planner to determine new keywords that are relevant to their business and target audience.
    • They can use One-Click Experiment Apply, after the implementation of broad match keywords, which automatically creates an experiment that follows best practices.

     

    An online travel agency offers bookings through their website as well as over the phone. They’re using Google Search ads to promote their business and want to set up assets to enhance customer engagement on their ads. Which two assets would help the agency meet their objectives? Choose two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Location assets would help the agency.
    • Dynamic sitelink would help the agency.
    • App assets would help the agency.
    • call assets would help the agency.

     

    What are two recommended best practices when using Performance Planner? Choose two.

    • After you create an 18-month plan, check in on a monthly or quarterly basis to make sure your plan can be implemented based on the past seven to 10 days.
    • Write more similar headlines for consistency and drive a uniform message to users.
    • View your keyword report on a regular basis and look to add negative keywords to optimize your campaigns.
    • Plan up to 18 months ahead across all campaign types: Search, Shopping, Local, Display, Video, Performance Max, and App.

     

    When visibility is the campaign goal, which bidding strategy should an advertiser choose?

    • Target impression share
    • Maximize clicks
    • Maximize conversions
    • Enhanced cost-per-click (ECPC)

     

    An advertiser plans to create responsive search ads to promote their online business. What’s one benefit of using responsive search ads?

    • Google Ads will automatically create headlines based on web content.
    • Their single headline format is simple and intuitive to create and easy to experiment with.
    • There’s no limit on the number of usable headlines thus making it easy for testing purposes
    • Google Ads will automatically test different combinations to learn which combinations will perform best.

     

    What are three, key elements of an Al-powered Search campaign? Choose three.

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Broad match
    • Responsive search ads
    • Smart Bidding
    • Expanded text ads
    • Marketing objectives

     

    You’ve noticed that one of your ads isn’t performing as well as you’d like. Which action can you take to help improve the ad’s expected clickthrough rate?

    • You can add negative keywords to enhance targeting.
    • You can experiment with various calls to action.
    • You can send traffic to the correct landing page.
    • You can optimize your website for mobile devices.

     

    What are two types of value-based Smart Bidding strategies? Select two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Maximize conversion value
    • Maximize conversion value with target ROAS
    • Manual CPC
    • Target impression share

     

    What’s a way that Al-powered Search helps to maximize performance for any auction?

    • It gives marketers data they need to enhance their search campaigns manually.
    • It utilizes a broad match strategy that permits marketers to select the signals used to align their ads to queries.
    • It matches ads to queries, tailors bids, and generates relevant ads for every individual query.
    • It serves ads on all Google channels, which expands a campaign’s reach.

     

    Which of these three things are key components of a campaign’s structure? Choose three.

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Targeting is a key component.
    • Bid strategies are a key component.
    • Ad formats are a key component.
    • Billing information is a key component.
    • Ad policy is a key component.

     

    Beatriz is setting up a Google Search campaign using a conversion-based Smart bidding strategy. To meet her value-based objectives, she’s decided to go with Target ROAS. What best practice can she follow to set her initial ROAS target?

    • She should provide a Target ROAS that’s exactly 10x the highest keyword cost in the campaign.
    • She should use an average of what she estimates all of her competitors are paying for conversions.
    • She should check the campaign’s historical conversion value per cost metric in Google Ads and use that as a guide.
    • She should provide the system with the conversion cost that she’s hoping to pay in her campaign.

     

    What’s one way for marketers to save time while improving their optimization score?

    • Opt-in to applying your assets at the campaign level.
    • Select “View all” for recommendations in a given category.
    • Opt-in to apply recommendations automatically as they get surfaced.
    • Select “Apply all” in your negative keyword targeting.

     

    A bicycle shop in Berlin wants to improve ad relevance for their campaigns. What’s a good way for this business to improve their ad relevance?

    • Make it easy for users to find the shop’s Berlin address on the website landing page.
    • Target the right region and language by using German and focusing on the Berlin metro area.
    • Highlight the shop’s most popular bicycle models to help their business stand out.
    • Test a new call-to-action, inviting customers to submit their orders through messages.

     

    Denise is seeking a way to rapidly identify available opportunities that improve the performance of her Search campaign. Which of these resources could help her achieve her goal?

    • Using the Locations Report
    • Using auction insights
    • Using the search terms Report
    • Using optimization score

     

    A retailer wants to create responsive search ads to promote their online business. What should they do to enhance the ads’ performance?

    • Write more similar headlines for consistency, and drive a uniform message to users.
    • Use one description to reinforce their message and attain a consistent brand message
    • Provide at least five unique headlines using popular keywords relating to their business.
    • Avoid recycling content from successful expanded text ads in order to create fresh ad content.

     

    Theresa is using the id Strategy Report to check on the performance of her Google Search campaign on Target CPA. She’d like to understand how her campaign’s actual CPA performance has changed over time. Where can she discover this information in the report?

    • She can find it in bid strategy status.
    • She can find it in top signals.
    • She can find it in auction insights.
    • She can find it in performance history.

     

    Which of these two searches can an ad show for broad match keyword “car window repair?” Choose two.

    Sélectionnez 2 réponses correctes

    • replace car window
    • cars for sale
    • second-hand cars for sale
    • automobile glass replacement

     

    As you plan your company’s online advertising budget every month, you’re looking to start using Google Ads’ Performance Planner to help. 

    What are two advantages of Performance Planner? Choose two.

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Its forecasting is powered by billions of Google searches conducted each week.
    • It can help you identify funds from other operational budgets to allocate to marketing.
    • It draws from machine learning for forecasting.
    • It integrates with other budgeting software, such as QuickBooks.

     

     

    A ski resort wants their Google Search campaign to promote their sale on ski lessons through responsive search ads.

    Which example correctly shows some of the key elements for a responsive search ad that could help meet their objectives?

    • A final URL and two headlines that focus on an upcoming ski competition http://www.learntoski.com/
    • A final URL that links to their general homepage www.learntoski.com/homepage
    • A final URL that links to their lessons page, with a display URL of www.learntoski.com/lessons/promotion
    • A final URL that links to their payments page, with a display URL of www.brandnewbatting.com/tokens/promotion

     

    Elena is setting up Dynamic Search Ads for a future sales promotion.

    She wants the Dynamic Search Ads to bring users to the same webpages that her standard search ads are already leading to.

    Which Dynamic Search Ads targeting option will meet this objective?

    • Landing pages from standard ad groups
    • All webpages
    • URL
    • Categories

     

     

    To check on the performance of his Google Search campaign on Target CPA, Bradley is using the Bid Strategy Report. He wants to know how his campaign’s performance has varied over time in regards to his actual CPA over the past six months.

    Where can Bradley uncover this information in the Bid Strategy Report report?

    • In top signals
    • In performance history
    • In bid strategy status
    • In auction insights

     

     

    A gourmet bakery in Lyon wants to improve ad relevance for their campaigns.

    What’s a good way for this business to improve ad relevance?

    • Experiment with a new call-to-action, asking customers to submit orders via messages.
    • Target the right region and language by using French and focusing on the Lyon metro area.
    • Make it easy for users to find the bakery’s Lyon address on the website landing page.
    • Highlight the bakery’s popular pistachio croissants to help their business stand out.

     

    Which of these are three expected benefits of implementing Performance Max campaigns? Choose three.

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Finding queries that are likely to convert, because Search Ads’s targeting capability uses advertiser-provided assets as a signal for finding them. This is helpful for advertisers with sparse landing pages or websites
    • Factoring a wide range of signals into bid optimizations, including attributes like device and location and other signal combinations exclusive to Performance Max.
    • Finding more queries to convert, because Performance Max focuses exclusively on conversion and value-based bidding strategies, enabling Google AI to help grow marketers’ reach by finding more search queries to convert.
    • Finding audience segments you might have otherwise missed, because Performance Max campaigns look beyond manually selected audience segments
    • Driving additional conversions because Performance Max uses assets to create highly relevant ads in response to Search queries from people who are likely to be interested in an advertiser’s offerings

     

     

    Google Ads accounts are structured in three levels.

    Where can an advertiser go to change their budget settings?

    • At the campaign level only
    • At the ad group level only
    • At the account level only
    • At either the account level or the campaign level

     

     

    What are the benefits of pairing responsive search ads with broad match keywords and Smart Bidding?

    • To help you reach new, high-performing queries and automatically optimize all of your bids in real time.
    • To help you better attribute calls and location actions to your ads, optimizing performance
    • To help you take immediate bulk action on issues and opportunities that you observe in your data.
    • To help you get a snapshot of key performance metrics and statuses, specific to each type of strategy.

     

    Winona wants her Google Search campaign to drive as much traffic to her site as possible within a given budget.

    What should she do to help achieve this goal?

    • She should use Maximize clicks and implement a bid cap for more control.
    • She should use Target impression share with an impression limit.
    • She should use target ROAS and input her historical ROAS.
    • She should use Enhanced CPC and input a daily budget.

     

    Where can you go to view your bid status, performance trends over time, and conversion delay reporting?

    • Bidding keyword report
    • AMP Validator test
    • Brand Lift survey
    • Bid strategy report

     

     

    Which of these is the first step for creating a campaign?

    • Setting the ideal budget for your campaign
    • Choosing the right audience for your campaign
    • Determine which campaign type will work best for reaching business goals
    • Selecting a marketing objective to define success

     

    How can advertisers who manage multiple Google Ads accounts streamline reporting, access control, and consolidate billing?

    • Create and manage ad groups with sets of similar ads and keywords.
    • Follow Google’s best practices for setting up, evaluating, and optimizing campaigns.
    • Use a Google Ads account to manage a collection of paid search ads campaigns.
    • Create a manager account to view and manage Google Ads accounts in one place.

     

    Juanita has set up a Google Search campaign to generate traffic to her store. She wants to make sure her ads only show when the store is actually open.

    What should she do when creating her campaign?

    • Submit a form to Google that outlines her business hours of operation.
    • Set up a Google My Business listing and sync it with her Google Ads campaign.
    • Set a code snippet on her website to inform Google Ads of her business hours of operation.
    • Set her ad schedule to only show ads when the physical location is open.

     

    An auto supply chain is getting ready for their yearly autumn promotion. To grow ROI, their marketing manager wants to use Performance Planner to determine what their priorities should be for the autumn promotion. 

    How can Performance Planner help provide this insight?

    • Using sales figures to provide a historical conversion total for each location
    • Using competitor bids and budgets to figure out the optimal budget for a specific location
    • Providing insight into optimization strategies for each campaign based on competitive insights
    • By forecasting opportunities to help capitalize on seasonal demand

     

     

    Download Now!

     

     

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Google Ads Display Professional Certification Exam Answers

    16 August, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Google Ads Display Professional Assessment Answers

    Google Ads Display Professional Certification Exam Answers

    The Latest Google Ads Display Professional certification assessment answers are provided in this file. The file contains all potential real certification exam questions, which have been generated through multiple exam attempts. Furthermore, detailed explanations have been included for each exam question. This resource can be utilized for exam preparation. Or just passing the exam in several minutes.

    Familiarize yourself with authentic exam questions to achieve success on your initial attempt.

    Please be aware that Google Ads PROFESSIONAL certifications are “semi-proctored,” meaning the file cannot be directly used on the same device. However, although not encouraged, you can access the file on your phone or another device during the exam.

    • The Google Ads Display assessment consists of 50 questions
    • You have 75 minutes to complete.
    • You will need a score of 80% or higher to pass

     

    Exam URL:  https://skillshop.exceedlms.com/student/path/308920/activity/546553

     

    Google Ads Display Professional Certification Exam Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    What is a best practice when incorporating specific images and logos in responsive display ads?

    • Watermarking images to protect company assets.
    • Using small text in logos in order to free up space for the background image.
    • Positioning logos in the top left or top right of an image.
    • Making sure image assets aren’t made up from a collage of images.

     

    Carl owns a car dealership and wants to use Google Display ads to promote his top-selling models. How should he structure his Google Ads account to achieve his objective?

    • He should allow the system to automatically structure the account around the different car models that the dealership promotes.
    • He should create a single ad group to cater for all car models that the dealership promotes.
    • He should create separate accounts for each car model that the dealership promotes.
    • He should create separate ad groups for each car model that the dealership promotes.

     

    Debbie wants to create a Google Display campaign for an online retailer using a Remarketing Audience. Which type of users can she expect to reach in the campaign?

    • People that have similar traits to the company’s current customer base
    • People known to be passionate about the company’s product market
    • People that visited the site
    • People that have expressed a previous intent to purchase similar products

     

    In a Google Display ad campaign, Cynthia sees a default CPA of $20 in the account, but the actual CPA she’s using to measure success is $15. What would account for the $5 difference?

    • She isn’t including conversions from current members.
    • She’s including view-through conversions.
    • She doesn’t have conversion tracking set up.
    • She isn’t including Gmail and YouTube users.

     

    Esteban recently launched a Google Display ad campaign and wants to get a full sense of its performance. A colleague of his on the marketing team suggested trying out Google Analytics’ Model Comparison Tool. Why should Steve give that tool a shot?

    • It shows how Display ads influence purchasing decisions across all marketing channels.
    • It shows a projected forecast of impression and click data if certain recommendations were applied.
    • It shows a projected forecast of conversion data if certain recommendations were applied.
    • It shows how Display ads influence purchasing decisions exclusively in Google Ads.

     

    Which best practice should a business owner use to serve relevant ads to customers who have already visited particular areas of their website?

    • Build a list of relevant placements for each sports category, and then use these to create individual ad groups for each sport.
    • Create separate ads for each sports category and then set them to “Rotate indefinitely” within the same ad group.
    • Create different remarketing lists based on the specific web pages that the customers visited.
    • The owner can include each of the sports categories within the headline and description fields of a single responsive display ad.

     

    Jacob is curious about single-image ads in a Discovery campaign. What best describes single-image ad layouts?

    • They show a brief five-second preview of a company’s products and services, just like multi-image carousel ads do.
    • They show one collage image comprised of many product image assets.
    • They will expand the image that his customers long-press on.
    • They allow Google to combine images, headlines, and descriptions into countless ad variations.

     

    Brenda wants to implement a Google Display campaign with a Target CPA of $10. Which two best practices should Brenda follow? Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Assign a 10% rate of return for the campaign.
    • Assign a daily budget constriction of $50.
    • Allow for a two-week ramp-up period before making any big changes.
    • Allocate a daily budget of at least $100 for the campaign.

     

    A friend of Kayla’s is asking her for advice on best practices to adopt after setting up a Discovery ads campaign. How should Kayla advise her friend?

    • She should wait two or three weeks before making any changes to her bidding strategy.
    • She should follow up immediately with a campaign to re-engage previous site visitors using custom groups.
    • She should adjust her bidding strategy every four days until campaign performance is steady.
    • She should merge Discovery campaign reports with other Google properties.

     

    Matias is part of a marketing team that is launching a new Discovery campaign. His boss has asked him to compile assets for the campaign. What best practice should he follow in choosing assets?

    • Use generic messaging in description fields so as to capture the interest of a larger audience.
    • Use Google Images to download as many relevant image assets as possible.
    • Add call-to-action text over their image assets to better inform potential customers.
    • Use inspiring high-quality images that highlight the brand’s value proposition.

     

    Shanice wants to create an awareness campaign using Google Display ads to educate potential customers about her company’s expanded product sets. What should Shanice do when setting up awareness audiences for the upcoming campaign?

    • Tag all pages within the company website or app.
    • Create a separate campaign or ad group for each desired audience.
    • Include existing users on remarketing lists.
    • Use top performing keywords for custom audiences.

     

    Aiko sees an ad on a social network for an online store and clicks on it. The next day she encounters a paid search ad for the same business. Later that evening, she clicks on a Display ad for the business yet again. The following day, Aiko makes a purchase. Under the Last Non-direct Click Attribution Model, which marketing channel receives credit for the conversion?

    • Display channel gets 33% credit
    • Display channel gets 100% credit
    • Social channel gets 33% credit
    • Search channel gets 100% credit

     

    Joaquin, an online store owner, is trying to attract new customers who think like his current customers. Which type of Google audience should he attempt to reach with a new ad campaign?

    • Similar audiences
    • In-market audiences
    • Remarketing audiences
    • Life events audiences

     

    Rebecca wants to show ads across YouTube, Discover and Gmail feeds to get as many sales as possible within a set budget. How can she set up the campaign to achieve her objective?

    • Select Sales as her campaign objective with Target ROAS as his Smart Bidding strategy.
    • Select Discovery as her campaign type with Maximize conversion type as a Smart Bidding strategy.
    • Select Shopping as her campaign type with Target CPA as a Smart Bidding strategy.
    • Select Discovery as her campaign goal with Maximize conversion value as a Smart Bidding strategy.

     

    Liz has noticed that even though Display ads are producing high click-through rates, they appear to be producing fewer conversions than Search ads. How would you best explain this assumption?

    • People aren’t seeing the Display ads.
    • Conversion tracking isn’t enabled currently.
    • She is focusing on view-through conversions rather than click-through conversions.
    • People that click on the Display ads are purchasing through another channel.

     

    Simon wants to use the Assets Report in order to further optimize his Google Display campaign. In which scenario is Simon appropriately using the analysis from the Assets Report?

    • Simon doesn’t add new assets more than once per week.
    • Simon removes and replaces high-performing assets and refers to the Assets Report’s recommendations.
    • Simon uses new stock images recommended by the Assets Report.
    • Simon replaces ads entirely, because more than two assets are under-performing on the report.

     

    How can an advertiser who is starting a new Discovery campaign measure new sign-ups driven by the campaign?

    • Enable audience expansion
    • Create a combined audience
    • Set up conversion tracking
    • Upload customer information into Google Ads

     

    Shankar intends to use responsive display ads for a Google Display campaign, but wants to make sure he applies best practices with headlines, descriptions and company names. In which scenario is a Google best practice correctly applied?

    • Hank checks that all headlines and descriptions are distinct and can be used interchangeably.
    • Hank adds trademark and copyright symbols to company names.
    • Hank uses long headlines that summarize all of the points made in the short headlines.
    • Hank writes short headlines with the same messaging but phrased in different ways.

     

    When reviewing ad strength, why is it important to follow a recommendation to add more assets to a responsive display ad?

    • Having more assets means more ad combination possibilities to serve users.
    • They can’t use certain features of the ad without the recommended amount.
    • The ad won’t run without the recommended amount included.
    • Assets will be automatically pulled from a stock library if the recommended amount isn’t met.

     

    Rachel has finished selecting the campaign-level settings of her new Google Display campaign and has decided to use uploaded ads instead of responsive display ads when creating ads for her campaign. Why might Rachel choose to upload an ad instead of the easier option of a responsive display ad?

    • she’ll be able to maintain creative control of how ads look in the size she chooses.
    • She’ll be able to incorporate animated GIF assets that are more than 30 seconds long.
    • She’ll gain access to exclusive placements such as reputable news outlets.
    • she’ll have the option to serve ads in the Shopping section of Google.com.

     

    What is the most accurate description of Discovery ads?

    • Discovery ads can showcase a company’s brand or products with a collage of images or a five-second video.
    • Discovery ads are created entirely from machine learning, based on themes from the keywords a company selects.
    • Discovery ads can give a company a stronger marketing presence on three Google platforms: Shopping, News, and Maps.
    • Discovery ads can showcase a company’s brand or products with a single high-quality image or swipeable image carousel.

     

    A company in the video game industry has designed a new steering wheel that’s ideal for fans of racing games. They want to create awareness for this new device via Google Ads and have learned that that Affinity Audiences could help them with their marketing goal. How can Affinity Audiences help this company to reach potential customers?

    • It’ll allow them to reach people based on an overview of their habits, passions, and lifestyles.
    • It’ll allow them to reach people who are already in the market to purchase a steering wheel for their video game console.
    • It’ll allow them to reach people who have already engaged with their website.
    • It’ll allow them to reach broad segments of the population that share common demographic traits.

     

    Jill is working on an upcoming Display campaign and wants to use a Target ROAS strategy. Which two steps are required to implement the strategy? Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Target ROAS bids are automatically optimized at auction-time, so she must set up her Target CPA.
    • Target ROAS needs to know what each conversion is worth to her, so she must set up her conversion value.
    • To use machine learning for conversion value optimization, she needs to set up conversion tracking.
    • She must select a Manual CPC bid strategy and set her bid manually at the ad level.

     

    Which Google Analytics report should an advertiser use to determine how Display ads are influencing other ad channels in creating conversions?

    • Conversion Report
    • Click-through Rate Report
    • Top Conversion Paths Report
    • Audience Insights Report

     

    How often should an advertiser review Assets Reports and what is the best course of action after doing so in order to optimize performance?

    • Biannually, replacing low-performing images with images similar in quality and composition to the best-performing images.
    • Weekly, following system-generated assets for image replacements as appropriate.
    • Daily, adjusting text and image assets as suggestions are continually created.
    • Biweekly, replacing low-performing images with images similar in quality and composition to the best-performing images.

     

    Anish, an advertiser who works at an online marketing firm, has been tasked to develop an audience strategy to reach new customers with a high intent to purchase their products. Which consideration audience should Anish choose for a Google Display ad campiagn to meet his objective?

    • In-market
    • Detailed demographics
    • Customer match
    • Affinity

     

    Stacey created a Google Display ads campaign and invested $1000 over a period of one month, during which time she saw 40 click-through conversions and 10 view-through conversions. What’s the average CPA of Stacey’s Display campaign, if she uses view-through conversions to get a more accurate picture of it’s full value?

    • 1
    • 100
    • 25
    • 40

     

    Elaine wants to make $4 of revenue for every dollar she spends in a Display campaign. How should she set up the campaign?

    • She should assign a Target CPA of $4.
    • She should set a Target ROAS of 400%.
    • She should assign a daily budget of at least $400.
    • she should set a conversion rate of 25%.

     

    Which type(s) of conversions measure when customers see but don’t interact with an ad before later purchasing a product?

    • Click-through and view-through conversions
    • Click-through conversions
    • View-through conversions
    • Neither

     

    The owner of a clothing retail company has asked their marketing team to create a number of Display campaigns for extending their reach into new cities. It’s important that these campaigns get off to an optimal start in terms of reach. What should the marketing team do to make sure that they meet their goal with these new Display campaigns?

    • Set highly-specific location and language settings.
    • Exclude tablet devices until the campaign has run for a week.
    • Set a daily budget of at least 10x their cost-per-acquisition.
    • Apply weekly campaign end dates so that data can be compared more easily.

     

    What should an advertiser keep in mind when reviewing the performance metrics of Display ads?

    • Display ads are only as effective as the provided Customer Match lists.
    • Display ads are effective when targeting YouTube users.
    • Conversions only represent a partial picture of Display ad effectiveness.
    • Display ads are less effective when it comes to new audiences.

     

    The marketing team of a well-known retail chain is focusing on four goals for their business marketing plan — acquiring new customers, creating new leads, growing sales, and broadening the reach of their existing remarketing campaigns. Which campaign type will help the marketing team to achieve all four goals?

    • Gmail
    • Discovery ads
    • Customer Match
    • Shopping ads

     

    Using various attribution models in the Model Comparison Tool, a campaign manager notices something that makes her increase her investment in Google Display ads. What might she have seen?

    • A channel received none of her investment.
    • A certain channel received a bulk of her investment and disproportionally drove a low conversion
    • A certain channel received a bulk of her investment and proportionally drove a high conversion volume.
    • A certain channel received a small share of her investment and drove a proportionally low conversion volume.

     

    Liam is looking to add some stunning images to his Discovery campaign. Where should he source these images from?

    • Websites similar to his own
    • Google Images
    • His most successful social marketing campaigns
    • YouTube

     

    James has had success in the past building a client base for his law firm with contact forms in his Search campaigns. He now wants to try a Display campaign to promote the same goal and further his success. What should his goal be with the new campaign?

    • Leads
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Product and brand consideration
    • Website traffic

     

    A business owner has successfully run a Google Ads account for a number of years. The owner recently heard Discovery ads mentioned but isn’t sure what they are nor how they work. Which of the following statements is true of Discovery ads?

    • They’re a way of reaching users on less traditional platforms outside of Google Ads, such as Waze and Google Earth.
    • They give users the opportunity to quickly learn more about a business or product with the help of an interactive guide.
    • They’re a type of ad extension that encourage users to engage with the ads more before clicking through to the website.
    • They’re a way to reach the right user at the right time while also understanding consumers’ intent across Google properties.

     

    Reece works for a company that sells sailing trips and wants to set up a 14-day view-through conversion window for their Display campaign instead of the default window. Why will setting up the view-through conversion window benefit their campaign?

    • It’ll assist them in analyzing the most interacted areas of the Display campaign within a 14-day period.
    • It’ll allow them to identify impressions for ads that weren’t interacted with but later resulted in a conversion.
    • It’ll prevent interactions being attributed with more conversions than what they actually generated.
    • It’ll help them to reveal which ad assets require optimization in order to improve conversion rates.

     

    How much of a daily budget should an advertiser set for a Discovery campaign if they are aiming for a target CPA of $5?

    • At least $50
    • At least $500
    • At least $5
    • At least $10

     

    Jack’s setting up a Display campaign. He wants to grow as many sales as possible while making sure conversions, on average, don’t exceed a certain cost. Which Smart Bidding option is the best?

    • Jack should use Maximize Conversions because it doesn’t require historical conversion data.
    • Jack should use Target Impression Share because it grows both awareness and conversions at an assigned cost point.
    • Jack should use Enhanced CPC because it offers the greatest amount of control over the bidding process.
    • Jack should use Target CPA because it grows conversion volume at his target cost-per-acquisition.

     

    Charlotte has previously used Search and Video campaigns, but a friend has recommended that Charlotte would improve her marketing efforts further with the help of Discovery ads. What benefit would Charlotte expect to see from using Discovery ads?

    • They’ll allow Charlotte to encourage people to share their thoughts and feedback on the products and services that she offers.
    • They’ll allow Charlotte to reach highly relevant audiences on exclusive placements outside of Google’s platforms.
    • They’ll allow Charlotte to merge images and 15 second video assets to provide people with an engaging experience.
    • They’ll allow Charlotte to tell an engaging story about her products and services to help grow more conversions.

     

    Isaac is launching a marketing initiative to reach both English and Spanish-speaking countries. What’s the best structure for him to use when setting up Google Display ads?

    • Create a separate ad group for each language within the same Display campaign.
    • Create a separate Display campaign for each location.
    • Create a separate ad group for each location within the same Display campaign.
    • Create a separate campaign for non-English and non-Spanish languages.

     

    What Smart Bidding strategy would be best used to help liquidate inventory?

    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize Conversion Value
    • Maximize Conversions
    • Target CPA

     

    Akira works for an online retailer and has been asked to come up with an advertising campaign to expand the company’s customer base and reach customers with a high intent to purchase. He wants to create a Display campaign. How should he best set up consideration audiences to achieve his goal?

    • Set up lower CPA bids for in-market audiences.
    • Include existing users from remarketing and customer match lists.
    • Combine custom affinity and similar groups into a single campaign.
    • Set up higher CPA bids for custom audiences.

     

    Advertisers using similar audiences lists don’t need to exclude people from original remarketing lists. Why is this the case?

    • Similar audiences don’t have any association with remarketing lists.
    • Similar audiences use existing remarketing lists to get as much reach as possible.
    • Similar audiences will automatically remarket to existing leads if it identifies potential value in them.
    • Similar audiences lists automatically exclude people so that only new leads are reached.

     

    When setting up a Display campaign, should an online retailer change their view-through conversion window for a product with a long sale cycle?

    • Yes, because the sales cycle for that product may be longer than the default window.
    • No, because having a longer view-through conversion window will skew regular conversion data.
    • No, because the sales cycle for that product will be within the default window.
    • Yes, because having a longer view-through conversion window will make the campaign look more impressive.

     

    Max is trying to set up a Display campaign for his toy business, but is worried ads may appear on content that’s not suitable for its family-friendly image. Which campaign setting should he choose?

    • Content exclusions
    • Frequency capping
    • Bidding and budget
    • Locations and languages

     

    A beauty company wants to use their social media channels to showcase their luxury lifestyle offerings. Why would Discovery ads be a good addition to their strategy?

    • Discovery ads would serve visually inspiring ads to potential customers while they’re in the middle of watching a video relevant to what’s being offered.
    • Discovery ads would encourage potential customers to engage with an interactive shopping cart.
    • Discovery ads would encourage consumers to follow and engage with particular social media posts that are relevant to marketing goals.
    • Discovery ads would reach the right customers with the right messages as they browse through their favorite personalized feeds on Google.

     

    Which types of conversions would give an advertiser the fullest picture of the performance of a Display campaign?

    • Both click-through and view-through conversions
    • Only click-through conversions
    • Only view-through conversions
    • Neither

     

    What goal should an advertiser launching a new marketing campaign focus on in order to reach a broad audience?

    • Sales
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Leads
    • Product and brand consideration

     

    Tom wants to create a Google Ads campaign and show ads across YouTube, Discover, and Gmail feeds to get as many sales as possible within his budget. Which actions will he take within his Google Ads account to accomplish his objective?

    • Select Shopping as his campaign type with Target CPA as a Smart bidding strategy
    • Select Discovery as his campaign type with Maximize conversions as a Smart bidding strategy
    • Select Discovery as his campaign goal with Maximize conversion value as a Smart bidding strategy
    • Select Sales as his campaign objective with Target ROAS as his Smart bidding strategy

     

    Tomas is creating a Google Ads campaign in order to reach people who are like-minded with his current customers. Which type of Google Audience should Tomas attempt to reach?

    • Similar Audiences
    • In-market Audiences
    • Life Events Audiences
    • Remarketing Audiences

     

    Using the Model Comparison Tool, what might a campaign manager notice that would make them increase their investment in Google Display ads?

    • A bulk of their investment driving a disproportionally low conversion volume on a different channel
    • A bulk of their investment driving a proportionally high conversion volume on a different channel
    • A small share of their investment driving a proportionally low conversion volume on a different channel
    • They hadn’t invested in other channels

     

    Paulo has spent $1000 in a month on a Google Display ads campaign. In that month, he has seen 40 click-through conversions and 10 view-through conversions. Using view-through conversions to get an accurate picture of its full value, what’s the average CPA of Paul’s Display campaign?

    • $20
    • $25
    • $100
    • $40

     

    Zhao is launching a marketing initiative to reach both English and Portuguese-speaking countries. How should he most effectively set up Google Display ads?

    • He should create a separate ad group for each language within the same Display campaign.
    • He should create a separate ad group for each location within the same Display campaign.
    • He should create a separate campaign for non-English and non-Portuguese languages.
    • He should create a separate Display campaign for each location.

     

    How should an advertiser set up a Display campaign in order to expand a company’s customer base and reach customers with a high intent to purchase?

    • Combine custom affinity and similar groups into a single campaign.
    • Set up lower CPA bids for in-market audiences.
    • Include existing users from remarketing and Customer Match lists.
    • Set up higher CPA bids for custom audiences.

     

    Kylie is planning to use responsive display ads for a campaign and wants to apply best practices when incorporating specific images and logos. Which example meets her objective?

    • Kylie makes sure that image assets aren’t made up from a collage of images.
    • Kylie tightly positions logos in the top left or top right of an image.
    • Kylie watermarks images to protect company assets.
    • Kylie uses small text in logos in order to free up space for the background image.

     

    Ousmane does marketing for a mattress company and is launching a new Discovery campaign. How should he set up the campaign in order to track how many new people are signing up for the service as a result?

    • Create a combined audience
    • Upload customer information into Google Ads
    • Set up conversion tracking
    • Enable audience expansion

     

    Tsai works for an online retailer and is interested in using a remarketing audience for a new Google Display campaign. Which type of users would he reach in the campaign?

    • People that have expressed a previous intent to purchase similar products
    • People known to be passionate about the company’s product market
    • People that have similar traits to the company’s current customer base
    • People that visited the site

     

    If an advertiser wants to implement a Google Display campaign with a Target CPA of $10, which two best practices should they follow?

    • Allocate a daily budget of at least $100 for the campaign.
    • Assign a 10% rate of return for the campaign.
    • Assign a daily budget constriction of $50.
    • Allow for a two-week ramp-up period before making any big changes.

     

    The CEO of an app start-up is aiming to expand the app’s reach into new cities, and wants their marketing team to create a number of new Display campaigns. How should the team set up their campaigns in order to help them get off to an optimal start in terms of reach?

    • Set a daily budget of at least 10 times their cost per acquisition.
    • Exclude tablet devices until the campaign has run for a week.
    • Apply weekly campaign end dates so that data can be compared more easily.
    • Set highly specific location and language settings.

     

    Renata is wondering if Display ads are influencing other ad channels in her multichannel Google Ads campaign. Which Google Analytics report should she consult in order to determine the complete role Display clicks are playing in the campaign?

    • Click-through Rate Report
    • Conversion Report
    • Top Conversion Paths Report
    • Audience Insights Report

     

    Elvis has expressed to you that he is worried that the performance metrics of his Google Display ad campaigns are lower than he expected. What can you tell him to possibly allay his fears?

    • Display ads are only as effective as the provided Customer Match lists.
    • Display ads are less effective when it comes to new audiences.
    • Display ads are effective when targeting YouTube users.
    • Conversions only represent a partial picture of Display ad effectiveness.

     

    Susan’s manager has asked her to implement a new Google Display ad campaign, to help liquidate out-of-season inventory and make room for next season’s product lines. Which Smart bidding strategy would be best suited for the campaign’s objective?

    • Maximize Conversion Value
    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize Conversions
    • Target CPA

     

    What should you look at to measure the full value of a Display campaign?

    • Click-through conversions only
    • Click-through conversions and view-through conversions
    • Viewability metrics
    • View-through conversions only

     

    What best describes the function of single-image ad layouts in a Discovery campaign?

    • They allow Google to combine images, headlines, and descriptions into countless ad variations.
    • They show one collage image comprised of many product image assets.
    • They show a brief five-second preview of a company’s products and services, just like multi-image carousel ads do.
    • They will expand the image that your customer long-presses on.

     

    Julio wants to implement a Target ROAS strategy on an upcoming Display campaign. What two steps must he first take?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • He must set up her conversion value, since Target ROAS needs to know what each conversion is worth to her.
    • He needs to set up conversion tracking, in order to use machine learning for conversion value optimization.
    • He must set up her Target CPA, since Target ROAS bids are automatically optimized at auction time.
    • He must select a Manual CPC bid strategy and set her bid manually at the ad level.

     

    Javier wants to use a Display campaign to grow sales while making sure conversions, on average, don’t exceed a certain cost. He is intrigued by the Smart bidding options available. Which option should he prioritize, and why?

    • Target Impression Share, because it grows both awareness and conversions at an assigned cost point.
    • Maximize Conversions, because it doesn’t require historical conversion data.
    • Target CPA, because it grows conversion volume at his target cost per acquisition.
    • Enhanced CPC, because it offers the greatest amount of control over the bidding process.

     

    Cate wants to find stunning ad images for a Discovery campaign she’s launching. What would be a reliable source for such images?

    • Websites similar to her own
    • Her most successful social marketing campaigns
    • YouTube
    • Google Images

     

    Rex is curious about using the Assets Report in order to further optimize his Google Display campaign. Which is the most appropriate way Rex could use analysis from the Assets Report?

    • Rex could use new stock images recommended by the Assets Report.
    • Rex shouldn’t add new assets more than once a week.
    • Rex could refer to the Asset Report’s recommendations after removing and replacing high-performing assets.
    • Rex could replace ads entirely after discovering more than two underperforming assets on the report.

     

    Discovery ads allow an advertiser to engage with their consumers and enable consumers to interact with the brand. What best describes Discovery ads?

    • They can showcase a company’s brand or products with a single high-quality image or swipeable image carousel.
    • They can give a company a stronger marketing presence on three Google platforms: Shopping, News, and Maps.
    • They can showcase a company’s brand or products with a collage of images or a five-second video.
    • They are created entirely from machine learning, based on themes from the keywords a company selects.

     

    Why is the Model Comparison Tool helpful in measuring the full value of a Google Display ads campaign?

    • Because it shows a projected forecast of conversion data if certain recommendations were applied.
    • Because it shows how Display ads influence purchasing decisions across all marketing channels.
    • Because it shows how Display ads influence purchasing decisions exclusively in Google Ads.
    • Because it shows a projected forecast of impression and click data if certain recommendations were applied.

     

    A film distributor wants to launch a Display campaign to create more awareness for their new film. Why should they try out affinity audiences for their campaign?

    • It’ll allow them to reach people based on an overview of their habits, passions, and lifestyles.
    • It’ll allow them to reach people who are already interested in seeing new independent films.
    • It’ll allow them to reach people who have already engaged with their website.
    • It’ll allow them to reach broad segments of the population that share common demographic traits.

     

    Which campaign type is the best choice for acquiring new customers, creating new leads, growing sales and broadening the reach of existing marketing campaigns?

    • Gmail
    • Discovery ads
    • Customer match
    • Shopping ads

     

    Zhang works for an online marketing firm. A client wants to develop an audience strategy to reach new customers with a high intent to purchase their products. Which of the following audiences can Zhang use to meet his objective?

    • In-Market
    • Affinity
    • Customer Match
    • Detailed Demographics

     

    Eric recently set up a Google Display Ad campaign. Although, by default, he sees a CPA of $20 in the account, the actual CPA he’s using to measure success is $15. What’s contributing to the $5 difference?

    • He doesn’t have conversion tracking set up.
    • He’s including view-through conversions.
    • He isn’t including Gmail and YouTube users.
    • He isn’t including conversions from current customers.

     

    A cruise ship company wants to set up a 7-day view-through conversion window for their Display campaign instead of the default window. How will setting up the view-through conversion window benefit their campaign?

    • It’ll allow them to identify impressions for ads that weren’t interacted with but later resulted in a conversion.
    • It’ll help them to reveal which ad assets require optimization in order to improve conversion rates.
    • It’ll prevent interactions being attributed with more conversions than what they actually generated.
    • It’ll assist them in analyzing the most interacted areas of the Display campaign within a set period.

     

    Jenni implemented a Google Ads campaign using a Maximize Conversions Smart bidding strategy 13 days ago. She wants to know if her campaign is still in the learning period. What’s the best way for Jenni to determine this?

    • Use the Performance Report.
    • Use the Bid Strategy Report.
    • Use the Budget Performance Report.
    • Use the Top Conversions Paths Report.

     

    Which of these is an example of a Google best practice correctly applied in a responsive display ad?

    • Writing short headlines with the same messaging but phrased in different ways.
    • Using long headlines that summarize all of the points made in the short headlines.
    • Checking that all headlines and descriptions are distinct and can be used interchangeably.
    • Adding trademark and copyright symbols to company names.

     

    How can affinity audiences help a company create awareness for a new product among potential customers?

    • It’ll allow them to reach people who have already engaged with their website.
    • It’ll allow them to reach broad segments of the population that share common demographic traits.
    • It’ll allow them to reach people based on an overview of their habits, passions, and lifestyles.
    • It’ll allow them to reach people who are already in the market to purchase a similar product.

     

    After investing $2000 into a Google Display ads campaign, a company sees 80 click-through conversions and 20 view-through conversions. Using view-through conversions to get a sense of its full value, what’s the average CPA of the company’s Display campaign?

    • $20
    • $100
    • $40
    • $25

     

    If an advertiser is trying to set up Google Display ads to reach both English and Spanish-speaking countries, how should they structure them in Google Ads?

    • They should create a separate ad group for each language within the same Display campaign.
    • They should create a separate Display campaign for each location.
    • They should create a separate campaign for non-English and non-Spanish languages.
    • They should create a separate ad group for each location within the same Display campaign.

     

    Which statement is true when discussing single image ads in a Discovery campaign?

    • Single image ad layouts show one collage image comprised of many product image assets.
    • Single image ads, similar to multi-image carousel ad layouts, show a brief five second preview of your products and services.
    • With single image ad layouts, Google combines your images, headlines, and descriptions into countless ad variations.
    • Single image ad layouts will expand the image that your customer long-presses on.

     

    Martin owns an automotive dealership that sells a variety of different car models. Martin wants to promote his top-selling car models but needs advice on how he should structure his Google Ads account with Display campaigns in mind. Which recommendation would be appropriate for Martin’s marketing efforts?

    • Create a single ad group to cater for all car models that the dealership promotes.
    • Allow the system to automatically structure the account around the different car models that the dealership promotes.
    • Create separate accounts for each car model that the dealership promotes.
    • Create separate ad groups for each car model that the dealership promotes.

     

    Kendall wants to make sure he applies best practices when incorporating specific images and logos into a responsive display ad. Which example meets his objective?

    • Kendall watermarks images to protect company assets.
    • Kendall tightly positions logos in the top left or top right of an image.
    • Kendall makes sure that image assets aren’t made up from a collage of images.
    • Kendall uses small text in logos in order to free up space for the background image.

     

    Joe, a business owner, is pleased with the results he’s seeing from his Video Action Campaigns and has heard from a friend that Discovery ads can improve his marketing efforts. How would that friend accurately describe the benefit of Discovery ads?”

    • They’ll allow Joe to tell an engaging story about his products and services to help grow more conversions.
    • They’ll allow Joe to merge images and 15 second video assets to provide people with an engaging experience.
    • They’ll allow Joe to encourage people to share their thoughts and feedback on the products and services that he offers.
    • They’ll allow Joe to reach highly relevant audiences on exclusive placements outside of Google’s platforms.

     

    Kiara began using Google Display ad campaigns last month and is anxious to review the performance metrics of her campaigns to gauge their effectiveness. What should Kiara keep in mind when assessing the performance of her Display Ads?

    • Display ads are only as effective as the provided Customer Match lists.
    • Conversions only represent a partial picture of Display ad effectiveness.
    • Display ads are effective when targeting YouTube users.
    • Display ads are less effective when it comes to new audiences.

     

    Nadine is reviewing data from her company’s Discovery ads and plans to use the Asset Report to assess and optimize asset performance. Which scenario correctly applies Google best practices?

    • Nadine reviews the Assets Reports weekly, following system generated assets for image replacements as appropriate.
    • Nadine reviews the Assets Report daily, adjusting text and image assets as suggestions are continually created.
    • Nadine reviews the Assets Report bi-annually, replacing low-performing images with images similar in quality and composition to the best-performing images.
    • Nadine reviews the Assets Report bi-weekly, replacing low-performing images with images similar in quality and composition to the best-performing images.

     

    Ryan is considering whether to use uploaded ads instead of responsive display ads for a Google Display campaign. What factor might convince him to choose to upload an ad rather than use responsive display ads?

    • Whether he wants to incorporate animated GIFs that are more than 30 seconds long.
    • Whether he wants access to exclusive placements at reputable news outlets.
    • Whether he wants creative control of how ads look in the size he chooses.
    • Whether he wants the option to serve ads in the Shopping section of Google.com.

     

    George is looking for a marketing solution that allows him to engage with users through ad experiences, while also allowing the users to take action with his brand. Keeping George’s marketing objectives in mind, which statement correctly describes Discovery ads?

    • Discovery ads are an ad format that can give George a marketing presence on three Google platforms: Shopping, News, and Maps.
    • Discovery ads can showcase George’s brand or products with a single high-quality image or swipeable image carousel.
    • Discovery ads are created entirely from machine learning, based on themes from the keywords that George selects.
    • Discovery ads can showcase George’s brand or products with a collage of images or a five-second video.

     

    Harold is planning to use high-quality, high-resolution photos for a Google Display campaign and intends to use responsive display ads. In which scenario is a Google best practice correctly applied?

    • Harold uses long headlines that summarize all of the points made in the short headlines.
    • Harold appropriately adds trademark and copyright symbols to company names.
    • Harold writes short headlines with the same messaging but phrased in different
    • Harold checks that all headlines and descriptions are distinct and can be used interchangeably.

     

    In preparation for a new campaign, Mia’s boss has asked her to compile her Discovery ad assets. What’s a best practice that Mia should follow when choosing assets for their Discovery ads?

    • Use inspiring high-quality images that highlight the brand’s value proposition.
    • Use Google Images to download as many relevant image assets as possible.
    • Add call-to-action text over their image assets to better inform potential customers.
    • Use generic messaging in description fields so as to capture the interest of a larger audience.

     

    Rina is looking to expand her marketing initiatives with a Discovery campaign. What’s a good source of images she might use?

    • Google Images
    • Websites similar to her own
    • Her most successful social marketing campaigns
    • YouTube

     

    Which campaign setting should a family-friendly business use for a Display campaign to prevent their ads from appearing on content unsuitable for their brand?

    • Frequency capping
    • Content exclusions
    • Bidding and budget
    • Locations and languages

     

    In setting up a similar audiences list for a Google Ads campaign, Antonio is wondering whether he needs to exclude people from his original remarketing lists. A colleague tells him he doesn’t need to do this. Why does the colleague tell him this?

    • Because similar audiences don’t have any association with remarketing lists.
    • Because similar audiences lists automatically exclude people so that only new leads are reached.
    • Because similar audiences will automatically remarket to existing leads if it identifies potential value in them.
    • Because similar audiences use existing remarketing lists to get as much reach as possible.

     

    How should an advertiser set up a Display campaign if they want to make $4 of revenue for every dollar they spend?

    • They should assign a daily budget of at least $400.
    • They should set a conversion rate of 25%.
    • They should assign a Target CPA of $4.
    • They should set a Target ROAS of 400%.

     

    Archie works for a car retailer and is setting up a Display campaign for its most expensive line. He is now wondering whether he needs to alter their view-through conversion window. What factor will he need to consider in determining this?

    • Whether a longer window will skew regular conversion data
    • Whether the sales cycle for that model will be within the default window
    • Whether the sales cycle for that model will be longer than the default window
    • Whether a longer window will make the campaign look more impressive

     

    What campaign type and Smart Bidding strategy should an advertiser set up in a Google Ads campaign in order to show ads across YouTube, Discover and Gmail feeds to get as many sales as possible within a set budget?

    • Shopping and Target CPA
    • Sales and Target ROAS
    • Discovery ads and Maximize conversions
    • Discovery and Maximize conversion value

     

    After clicking on an ad for an online store on a social media network, then seeing a paid search ad and then clicking on a Display ad, Hiroshi decides to buy something from the store. Which marketing channel would get credit for the conversion under the last non-direct click attribution model?

    • Social channel gets 33% credit
    • Search channel gets 100% credit
    • Display channel gets 33% credit
    • Display channel gets 100% credit

     

    Juan is new to Google Ads and is looking to create online sales for a new business by using a Discovery campaign. What advice should Juan keep in mind once he sets up his campaign?

    • Follow up immediately with a campaign to reengage previous site visitors using custom groups.
    • Merge Discovery campaign reports with other Google properties.
    • Wait two or three weeks before making any changes to his bidding strategy.
    • Adjust his bidding strategy every three or four days until campaign performance is steady.

     

    Ray has been running Display campaigns for over a month, and sales have increased since he started. Even so, while the Display ads are producing high click-through-rates, they appear to be producing fewer conversions than Search ads. What’s the most likely explanation for this assumption?

    • Ray is focusing on view-through conversions rather than click-through conversions.
    • People that click on the Display ads are purchasing through another channel.
    • Conversion tracking isn’t enabled currently.
    • People aren’t seeing the Display ads.

     

    During a conversation with a fellow business owner, you mention Discovery ads to Rohan, a friend of yours. How would you describe Discovery ads to Rohan?

    • They’re a type of ad extension that encourage users to engage with the ads more before clicking through to the website.
    • They’re a way to reach the right user at the right time while also understanding consumers’ intent across Google properties.
    • They’re a way of reaching users on less traditional platforms outside of Google Ads, such as Waze and Google Earth.
    • They give users the opportunity to quickly learn more about a business or product with the help of an interactive guide.

     

    Shannel works for a marketing team at a toy company. She has been asked to come up with a campaign to bring more awareness to a new Christmas toy they’ve created. How should Shannel set up awareness audiences for Google Display ads?

    • Use top performing keywords for custom audiences.
    • Tag all pages within the company website or app.
    • Include existing users on remarketing lists.
    • Create a separate campaign or ad group for each desired audience.

     

    What are the two best practices Dylan should follow if he wants to implement a Google Display campaign with a Target CPA of $10?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Allow for a two-week ramp-up period before making any big changes.
    • Assign a daily budget constriction of $50.
    • Assign a 10% rate of return for the campaign.
    • Allocate a daily budget of at least $100 for the campaign.

     

    Ken has been able to successfully use Search campaigns to attract more clients to his law firm by using a contact form in his ads. He now wants to launch a new Display campaign to further promote the same goal. What should his new campaign goal be?

    • Product and brand consideration
    • Website traffic
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Leads

     

    Which report should an advertiser use to determine if a Smart Bidding strategy is still in its learning period?

    • The Top Conversions Paths Report
    • The Bid Strategy Report
    • The Budget Performance Report
    • The Performance Report

     

    The marketing team of a sales company has come up with four goals for the upcoming quarter: acquiring new customers, creating new leads, growing sales and broadening the reach of their existing remarketing campaigns. Which campaign type should this team use to best achieve their objectives?

    • Customer match
    • Discovery ads
    • Gmail
    • Shopping ads

     

    Nidia owns a law firm, and for the last few years she’s been able to build her client base with the help of Search campaigns promoting a contact form. Nidia now wants to further this success with the help of a new Display campaign. Which campaign goal is appropriate for her?

    • Website traffic
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Product and brand consideration
    • Leads

     

    What will happen to a responsive display ad if, when reviewing ad strength, an advertiser doesn’t follow Google Ads’ system recommendation to add more assets?

    • Certain features of the ad will be disabled without the recommended amount.
    • The ad won’t run without the recommended amount included.
    • The ad will automatically pull assets from a stock library if the recommended amount isn’t met.
    • There will be fewer ad combination possibilities to serve users.

     

    A company is looking to complement their social media marketing strategy. How would running Discovery ads work to help them achieve their objective?

    • They would reach the right customers with the right messages as they browse through their favorite personalized feeds on Google.
    • They would encourage consumers to follow and engage with particular social media posts that are relevant to marketing goals.
    • They would serve visually inspiring ads to potential customers while they’re in the middle of watching a video relevant to what’s being offered.
    • They would encourage potential customers to engage with an interactive shopping cart.

     

    Elizaveta is launching a Display campaign for a business with a longer than average sales cycle. She’s thinking of setting up a custom view-through conversion lookback window instead of the default window. Why should Elizaveta consider setting up her own window?

    • It’ll assist her in analyzing the most interacted areas of the Display campaign within that time period.
    • It allow her to identify more impressions for ads that weren’t interacted with but later resulted in a conversion.
    • It’ll prevent interactions being attributed with more conversions than what they actually generated.
    • It’ll reveal to her which ad assets require optimization in order to improve conversion rates.

     

    Which Smart Bidding option would be best for an advertiser trying to maximize sales while making sure conversions, on average, don’t exceed a certain cost, and why?

    • Target CPA, because it grows conversion volume at his target cost per acquisition.
    • Target Impression Share, because it grows both awareness and conversions at an assigned cost point.
    • Enhanced CPC, because it offers the greatest amount of control over the bidding process.
    • Maximize Conversions, because it doesn’t require historical conversion data.

     

    Which scenario is the most appropriate use of the analysis from the Assets Report?

    • Replacing ads entirely upon learning from the Assets Report that more than two assets are underperforming.
    • Referring to the Assets Report’s recommendations after removing and replacing high-performing assets.
    • Only adding new assets once per week.
    • Using new stock images recommended by the Assets Report.

     

    How do view-through conversions help to evaluate Display campaign performance?

    • They present converting customers with a short survey, asking about their experience leading up to the purchase they completed.
    • They determine various signals from placement and audience reports, then narrowing down the best performing areas of a Display campaign.
    • They tell you when customers see — but don’t interact with your ad — and then later complete a conversion on your site.
    • They identify and breakdown which traffic, exclusively from Display, resulted in creating conversions.

     

    How would you describe Discovery ads to someone who has never heard of them before?

    • They give users the opportunity to quickly learn more about a business or product with the help of an interactive guide.
    • They’re a type of ad extension that encourage users to engage with the ads more before clicking through to the website.
    • They reach users on less traditional platforms outside of Google Ads, such as Waze and Google Earth.
    • They reach the right user at the right time while also understanding consumers’ intent across Google properties.

     

    Henrietta recently launched a high-end clothing line and hasn’t invested marketing dollars to promote the website yet. Her initial marketing objective is to reach a broad audience and help as many people as possible come to know about her new line. Which campaign goal should Henrietta choose to achieve her objective?

    • Leads
    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Product and brand consideration
    • sales

     

    What is a best practice for setting up awareness audiences for a Google Display ads campaign?

    • Including existing users on remarketing lists
    • Creating a separate campaign or ad group for each desired audience
    • Tagging all pages within the company website or app
    • Using top performing keywords for custom audiences

     

    Carlos is creating a Discovery campaign with a target CPA of $5 but is unsure what his daily budget should be. What plan should Carlos take in order to follow best practice?

    • He should set a daily budget of at least $5.
    • He should set a daily budget of at least $500.
    • He should set a daily budget of at least $10.
    • He should set a daily budget of at least $50.

     

    What’s a best practice an advertiser can adopt after setting up a Discovery ads campaign?

    • Wait two or three weeks before making any changes to their bidding strategy.
    • Adjust their bidding strategy every three days until campaign performance is steady.
    • Follow up immediately with a campaign to re-engage previous site visitors using custom groups.
    • Merge Discovery campaign reports with other Google properties.

     

    Which type of Google audience should an advertiser attempt to reach if they’re trying to attract new customers who think like current customers?

    • Similar audiences
    • Life events audiences
    • Remarketing audiences
    • In-market audiences

     

    John has launched a new book and wants as many people as possible to know about it. How should he focus his campaign in order to get the word out?

    • He should focus on product and brand consideration.
    • He should focus on leads.
    • He should focus on brand awareness and reach.
    • He should focus on sales.

     

    Which audience should an advertiser use to reach new customers with a high intent to purchase their products?

    • Affinity
    • Customer match
    • Detailed demographics
    • In-market

     

    A family-friendly business has set up a Display campaign, but they’re worried that their ads may appear on content that’s not suitable for their brand image. Which campaign setting might they want to use?

    • Frequency capping
    • Content exclusions
    • Bidding and budget
    • Locations and languages

     

    Mary works at a car dealership and has been asked to promote its top-selling models. She has a Google Ads account and is interested in using Display campaigns to achieve her goal. How can she best structure her account?

    • She can create a single ad group to cater for all car models that the dealership promotes.
    • She can allow the system to automatically structure the account around the different car models that the dealership promotes.
    • She can create separate accounts for each car model that the dealership promotes.
    • She can create separate ad groups for each car model that the dealership promotes.

     

    How should an expanding company’s marketing team set up new Display campaigns in order to get them off to an optimal start in terms of audience reach?

    • Set highly specific location and language settings.
    • Set a daily budget of at least 10 times their cost per acquisition.
    • Exclude tablet devices until the campaign has run for a week.
    • Apply weekly campaign end dates so that data can be compared more easily.

     

    What’s the best way to determine if a Smart Bidding strategy is still in its learning period?

    • Use the Top Conversions Paths Report.
    • Use the Budget Performance Report.
    • Use the Performance Report.
    • Use the Bid Strategy Report.

     

    A business owner is creating a responsive display ad and, while doing so, reviews their ad strength. The owner sees that the system recommendation is to add more assets to improve the strength of the ad. Why is it important to add more assets to their responsive display ads?

    • Having more assets means more ad combination possibilities to serve users.
    • They can’t use certain features of the ad without the recommended amount.
    • The ads won’t run without the recommended amount included.
    • Assets will be automatically pulled from a stock library if the recommended amount isn’t met.

     

    What type of users would an advertiser reach with a remarketing audience?

    • People that have expressed a previous intent to purchase similar products
    • People known to be passionate about the company’s product market
    • People that visited the site
    • People that have similar traits to the company’s current customer base

     

    Anushka wants to create a Display campaign that will expand her company’s customer base and reach customers with a high intent to purchase. What should Anushka do to accomplish this objective?

    • Include existing users from remarketing and Customer Match lists.
    • Set up higher CPA bids for Custom Audiences.
    • Combine Custom Affinity and Similar Groups into a single campaign.
    • Set up lower CPA bids for In-market Audiences.

     

    A campaign report shows that Display ads are receiving high click-through rates, however appear to be producing fewer conversions than Search ads. What’s the best explanation for this?

    • An advertiser is focusing on view-through conversions rather than click-through conversions.
    • Conversion tracking isn’t enabled currently.
    • People aren’t seeing the Display ads.
    • People that click on the Display ads are purchasing through another channel.

     

    Kala is setting up a Discovery campaign and wants to measure newsletter signups driven by the campaign. What does Kala need to do in order to meet this objective?

    • Create a Combined Audience
    • Enable Audience Expansion
    • Set up conversion tracking
    • Upload customer information into Google Ads

     

    Which first two steps are required to implement a Target ROAS strategy?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • She must set up her Target CPA, since Target ROAS bids are automatically optimized at auction time.
    • She must set up her conversion value, since Target ROAS needs to know what each conversion is worth to her.
    • She needs to set up conversion tracking, in order to use machine learning for conversion value optimization.
    • She must select a Manual CPC bid strategy and set her bid manually at the ad level.

     

    Which statement most accurately describes the benefit of using Discovery ads?

    • They’ll allow an advertiser to tell an engaging story about their products and services to help grow more conversions.
    • They’ll allow an advertiser to merge images and 15 second video assets to provide people with an engaging experience.
    • They’ll allow an advertiser to encourage people to share their thoughts and feedback on the products and services that they offer.
    • They’ll allow an advertiser to reach highly relevant audiences on exclusive placements outside of Google’s platforms.

     

    Nathan is interested in using the Assets Report to optimize asset performance in his company’s Discovery ads. How often should he review the report and what should be do with assets afterward?

    • He should review the Assets Report biweekly, and then replace low-performing images with images similar in quality and composition to the best-performing images.
    • He should review the Assets Report daily, and then adjust text and image assets as suggestions are continually created.
    • He should review the Assets Report biannually, and then replace low-performing images with images similar in quality and composition to the best-performing images.
    • He should review the Assets Report weekly, and then follow system-generated assets for image replacements as appropriate.

     

    Brenda created a Google Ads campaign last month to increase sales and leads for her online store using multiple ad channels. She feels that her Display ads are probably influencing the other ad channels and wants to determine the complete role that Display clicks are playing in this. Which report can renda use to meet her goal?

    • Conversion Report
    • Audience Insights Report
    • Click-through Rate Report
    • Top Conversion Paths Report

     

    Veronica is the marketing manager at a luxury sports car company and has set up a Display campaign for the company’s most expensive and luxurious product line. She’s now contemplating whether they need to alter their view-through conversion window. Should Veronica change their view-through conversion window, and why?

    • No, because the sales cycle for a luxury car will be within the default window.
    • Yes, because the sales cycle for a luxury car will be longer than the default window.
    • No, because having a longer view-through conversion window will skew regular conversion data.
    • Yes, because having a longer view-through conversion window will make the campaign look more impressive.

     

    Hunter is trying to assess the full value of the Google Display ad campaign he recently launched. Which types of conversions should he look at in order to achieve his objective?

    • View-through
    • Neither
    • Click-through and view-through
    • Click-through

     

    Leah is working on a Discovery campaign and has been told to aim for a target CPA of $5. How much should she set up her daily budget to be in order to achieve that target?

    • At least $5
    • At least $10
    • At least $50
    • At least $500

     

    In which way do view-through conversions help evaluate the success of a Display campaign?

    • Presenting customers a short survey asking about their experience leading up to the purchase they completed
    • Narrowing down the best-performing areas of a Display campaign from placement and audience reports
    • Telling you when customers see but don’t interact with an ad, then later completing a conversion on the site
    • Identifying which traffic, exclusively from Display, resulted in conversions

     

    The owner of a sports shop would like to promote different sports categories to people who have already visited their website. They understand that a Remarketing campaign can help them achieve this. Which best practice can the owner use to serve relevant ads to customers who have already visited particular areas of their website?

    • Include each of the sports categories within the headline and description fields of a single responsive display ad.
    • Create different remarketing lists based on the specific web pages that the customers visited.
    • Create separate ads for each sports category and then set them to “Rotate indefinitely” within the same ad group.
    • Build a list of relevant placements for each sports category, and then use these to create individual ad groups for each sport.

     

    A fashion business focuses its marketing on social media channels to best showcase its premium offerings and would like to use Discovery ads in their marketing plan. What can the team hope to achieve from running Discovery ads?

    • To serve visually-inspiring ads to potential customers while they’re in the middle of watching a video relevant to what’s being offered
    • To reach the right customers with the right messages as they browse through their favorite personalized feeds on Google
    • To encourage potential customers to engage with an interactive shopping cart
    • To encourage consumers to follow and engage with particular social media posts that are relevant to marketing goals

     

    Melvin sees a default CPA of $20 in his Google Display ad campaign, however the actual CPA he’s using to measure success is $15. What might account for this $5 difference?

    • He isn’t including conversions from current customers.
    • He doesn’t have conversion tracking set up.
    • He isn’t including Gmail and YouTube users.
    • He’s including view-through conversions.

     

    As a best practice, Stephanie’s colleagues have told her that she doesn’t need to exclude people from her original remarketing lists when using Similar Audiences lists.

    What’s the reasoning behind this?

    • Similar Audiences lists automatically exclude people so that only new leads are reached.
    • Similar Audiences use existing remarketing lists to get as much reach as possible.
    • Similar Audiences will automatically remarket to existing leads if it identifies potential value in them.
    • Similar Audiences don’t have any association with remarketing lists.

     

     

    The owner of an online movie poster store is interested in trying a remarketing campaign to promote different movie genres to customers who have already visited their website. Which best practice can the owner use to serve relevant ads to those customers?

    • The owner can create separate ads for each genre and then set them to “Rotate indefinitely” within the same ad group.
    • The owner can build a list of relevant placements for each genre, and then use these to create individual ad groups for each.
    • Include each of the genres within the headline and description fields of a single responsive display ad.
    • The owner can create different remarketing lists based on the specific web pages that the customers visited.

     

    What is the advantage of uploading an ad instead of using a responsive display ad?

    • An advertiser can maintain creative control of how ads look in chosen sizes.
    • An advertiser will have the option to serve ads in the Shopping section of Google.com.
    • An advertiser can incorporate animated GIFs that are more than 30 seconds long.
    • An advertiser will gain access to exclusive placements at reputable news outlets.

     

    Under the last non-direct click attribution model, if a customer makes a purchase after clicking on an ad on a social network, seeing a paid search ad and then clicking on a Display ad, which marketing channel would receive credit for the conversion?

    • Search channel gets 100% credit
    • Display channel gets 100% credit
    • Social channel gets 33% credit
    • Display channel gets 33% credit

     

    Tyler has just launched a Google Display campaign and is considering whether to increase its budget. Using various attribution models in the Model Comparison Tool, what might make him increase his investment in Google Display ads?

    • A disproportionally low conversion volume from a certain channel that has received a bulk of his investment
    • A proportionally high conversion volume after a certain channel has received a bulk of his investment
    • All channels drove conversions in proportion to the investment they receieved
    • A proportionally low conversion volume after a certain channel has received a small share of his investment

     

    What does the Model Comparison Tool show that would be helpful in measuring the full value of a Google Display ads campaign?

    • A projected forecast of conversion data if certain recommendations were applied.
    • The way display ads influence purchasing decisions exclusively in Google Ads
    • A projected forecast of impression and click data if certain recommendations were applied.
    • The way Display ads influence purchasing decisions across all marketing channels

     

    What’s a best practice for choosing assets for a Discovery campaign?

    • Use generic messaging in description fields so as to capture the interest of a larger audience.
    • Use Google Images to download as many relevant image assets as possible.
    • Add call-to-action text over their image assets to better inform potential customers.
    • Use inspiring high-quality images that highlight the brand’s value proposition.

     

     

    Download Now!

     

     

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Google AI-Powered Shopping Ads Certification Exam Answers – 2025 Updated

    20 July, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Google Shopping Ads Certification Exam Answers – 2025 Updated

    Google Ads Shopping Advertising Certification Exam Answers

    The Shopping Advertising exam covers basic and advanced concepts, including creating a Merchant Center account and product data feed, and creating and managing Shopping campaigns. To pass the exam you need to answer at least 80% questions in less than 90min.

    Note that Shopping Ads assessment has much more possible questions. There are over 150 possible questions, and you get only 50 of them during the exam. Download our Google Ads Shopping Certification Exam preparation guide and get all possible real exam questions with 100% accurate and verified answers.

     

    Get Certified in Google Shopping Advertising Now!!!

     

    Questions:

     

    What marketing objective does Performance Max for Retail use?

    • Awareness
    • Online Sales
    • Lead Generation
    • Mobile App

     

    You work at a global company that ships products around the world. You would like to create a Shopping campaign to promote products in the European Economic Area and Switzerland. How are Shopping ads served in the European Economic Area and Switzerland?

    • By any Comparison Shopping Service (CSS) you work with
    • By one Comparison Shopping Service (CSS)
    • By Google Merchant Center only
    • By Google My Business.

     

    Which two of the following are options for checking out when shoppers purchase an item? Choose two.

    • Checkout on your website
    • Checkout in your local store
    • Checkout on Display
    • Checkout on Maps

     

    You want to use Performance Max for conversion value but are concerned about inefficient spend. Which optional secondary bid strategy should you select?

    • Manual Max CPC
    • Maximize Clicks
    • Enhanced CPC
    • Target Return On Ad Spend (tROAS)

     

    You’d like to promote your products across Google’s platform but aren’t sure whether a Performance Max campaign would help you more than a Standard Shopping campaign. Which statement is true about Performance Max campaigns?

    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search by creating a separate campaign for Shopping and Search.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google by creating a campaign for each channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google’s platform without creating a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search without having to create a separate campaign for each channel.

     

    What happens if you don’t resolve repeated policy violations, such as the price in the feed not matching the price on the website?

    • Feed suspension
    • Google Merchant Center account suspension
    • Google My Business account suspension
    • Google Ads account suspension

     

    Which of these configurations do you need prior to launching a Performance Max campaign?

    • Assets
    • Product feed in Merchant Center
    • Keywords
    • Enable enhanced conversions

     

    You own a small business that sells scented candles. You’re prepared to run your first Performance Max campaign that uses a set budget. How does the system allocate budget on a Performance Max campaign?

    • Budget is allocated manually by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign channel and separate campaign for budget.
    • Budget is allocated automatically across channels based on performance. There’s no need to create a different campaign for each channel.
    • Budget is automatically allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel, and Smart Shopping will optimize budget.
    • Budget is manually allocated across channels based on your channel preference. You maintain control over the campaign setup while you optimize by channel manually.

     

    You’re looking to buy six chairs for your new dining room table. A retailer advertises the price for one dining chair in an ad. However, when users click on the ad and buy the product, they are charged for a set of six chairs. Which Shopping ads policy is the advertiser violating?

    • Restricted content
    • Misrepresentation of self or product
    • Prohibited practice
    • Return policy

     

    What are two features of a Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two.

    • It lets you set up campaign, bidding, and product groups manually.
    • It lets you create and edit an ad format.
    • It lets you optimize goals based on real-time signals across all Google platforms.
    • It allows for automated bidding to optimize campaign performance and bids.

     

    Which of these statements is true of Performance Max campaigns?

    • Performance Max campaigns allow manual control over performance optimization as a way to optimize toward a retailer’s business goals. This drives simplicity, performance, and reach.
    • Performance Max campaigns provide you total control over the campaign setup, ad, and bidding.
    • Performance Max campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals through the use of AI across Google’s suite of ad networks, driving performance, simplicity, and reach.
    • Performance Max campaigns offer the choice of adding manual input and advanced AI.

     

    How do Standard Shopping and Performance Max campaigns differ in their approaches to reaching customers?

    • Standard Shopping ads provide a more targeted reach, while Performance Max accesses a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory through the use of AI technology.
    • Standard Shopping ads and Performance Max both use AI technology to reach a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory, but Standard Shopping Ads’ reach is less targeted.
    • Standard Shopping ads reach a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory by using AI technology, while Performance Max offers a more targeted reach.
    • Standard Shopping ads and Performance Max have an equally targeted reach, but Performance Max reaches a narrower audience across all of Google’s inventory.

     

    Local Inventory Ads allow retailers to promote their in-store inventory and drive shoppers to their brick-and-mortar stores.

    • True
    • False

     

    What can Local Catalog Ads do? Select All Correct Responses

    • Reach mobile shoppers
    • Drive store visits
    • Promote store deals
    • All of the above

     

    Which of the following is something retailers shouldn’t do in a shifting retail landscape?

    • Accelerate by making data the foundation of everything they do
    • Connect with customers anywhere and everywhere they are in a brand-first way
    • Provide minimal information to simply things
    • Remove friction to drive action

     

    Showcase Shopping ads allow a retailer to engage people early in the purchase journey, when they’re discovering what to buy and where to buy it. Where do Showcase Shopping ads generally appear?

    • Any shopping queries
    • Broader queries
    • Local intent queries
    • Long-tail or specific queries

     

    Smart Shopping campaigns simplify campaign management by automating which of the following? Select All Correct Responses

    • Ad creation
    • Targeting
    • Bidding
    • All of the above

     

    True or false? Shopping ads use product data to determine how and where to show ads.

    • True
    • False

     

    True or false? Shopping campaigns can help promote online and local inventory.

    • True
    • False

     

    Which of these choices would make a good secondary bid strategy for a client who wanted to run on Smart Shopping campaigns and use Maximize Conversion Value as a bid strategy?

    • Manual Max CPC
    • Enhanced CPC
    • Maximize Clicks
    • Target Return On Ad Spend (tROAS)

     

    Which definition corresponds to a free product listing?

    • Free product listings are paid Shopping ads that are converted due to low impressions and clicks.
    • Free product listings use product information directly from the website to curate no cost ads without a product feed.
    • Free product listings appear on the Shopping Tab and provide an opportunity to highlight products and drive customers to your website at no cost.
    • Free product listings participate in an ad auction and offer insights and controls to optimize performance and prioritize key products.

     

    What are the three main aspects of Google’s policy mission statement? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Protect the business from fraudulent charges
    • Promote positive experience for all users
    • Protect users’ online safety
    • Implement fair and consistent policies
    • Drive revenue for businesses

     

    You work at a large multinational company that ships products globally. You would like to create a Shopping campaign to promote products in the European Economic Area and Switzerland. How are Shopping ads served in the European Economic Area and Switzerland?

    • They can be served by any Comparison Shopping Service (CSS) you work with.
    • They can be served by Google Merchant Center only.
    • They can be served by Google My Business.
    • They can be served by one Comparison Shopping Service (CSS).

     

    Why is it recommended to have a remarketing list with a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • A remarketing list will help Smart Shopping campaigns reach users who already made a purchase at a local store.
    • A remarketing list will help Smart Shopping campaigns drive in-store only traffic based on interest in your local products.
    • A remarketing list will help Smart Shopping campaigns reach users who are more likely to purchase again because they’ve already shown interest in your products.
    • A remarketing list will help Smart Shopping campaigns capture keywords of users who are likely to purchase again and add the list to the campaign.

     

    What are three benefits of a Smart Shopping campaign? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Lets you manually set up campaigns
    • Lets you reach customers across Google platforms
    • Uses manual signals to optimize goals
    • Reduces complexity of campaign management via easy integration
    • Uses real-time signals to help you optimize goals

     

    Where can Standard Shopping ads appear? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Google Images
    • The Shopping tab
    • Google Search
    • Google Maps
    • Gmail

     

    You’re building a product feed for a client who is new to Shopping ads. You notice inaccuracies in the client’s inventory data. If a product feed is uploaded with data quality issues, what are two issues that might arise? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Google’s system will detect data quality issues in Merchant Center and disapprove items until the violation is resolved.
    • Google’s system will detect data quality issues in Google Ads and disapprove campaigns with those items until the violation is resolved.
    • Users may lose trust in Google and the retailer if the product information in the ad does not match the information on the website.
    • Data quality issues in Merchant Center will be detected by Google’s system and will permanently suspend the account

     

    Under which category does irresponsible data collection fall, according to Google Ads Policy?

    • Prohibited content
    • Editorial standards
    • Restricted content
    • Prohibited practice

     

    Which of these choices would make a good optional secondary bid strategy for a client who wanted to run on Performance Max using Maximize Conversion Value as their bid strategy?

    • Target Return On Ad Spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize Clicks
    • Enhanced CPC
    • Manual Max CPC

     

    In which two ways can you upgrade all your Smart Shopping campaigns to Performance Max at once? Choose two.

    • In Google Ads, select the Performance Max upgrade notification. Select Apply. Next, select Apply All to upgrade all Smart Shopping campaigns.
    • Within the Campaigns page, select Upgrade your Smart Shopping Campaigns to Performance Max. Select All Campaigns. Then, select Apply All.
    • Select the Performance Max upgrade notification in Merchant Center. Select Apply then Apply All to upgrade all Smart Shopping campaigns.
    • Within the Recommendations page, select Upgrade your smart Shopping Campaigns to Performance Max. Then, select Apply All.

     

    What goal in a Performance max campaign will help you get new customers?

    • Customer focus
    • Customer acquisition
    • Customer retention
    • Customer selection

     

    What configuration do you need before you can launch a Performance Max campaign?

    • Enable enhanced conversions
    • Product feed in Merchant Center
    • Keywords
    • Assets

     

    You own a small business that sells shoes. You’re ready to run your first Performance Max campaign that uses a set budget. How does the system allocate budget on a Performance Max campaign?

    • Budget is allocated manually by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign channel and separate campaign for budget.
    • Budget is allocated automatically across channels, based on performance. You don’t need to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Budget is allocated manually across channels, based on your channel preference. You control the campaign setup but optimize by channel manually.
    • Budget is automatically allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel, and Smart Shopping will optimize budget.

     

    What are two features of a Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two.

    • You can optimize your goals based on real-time signals across all Google platforms.
    • You can optimize campaign performance and bids through automated bidding.
    • You can create and edit an ad format.
    • You can set up campaign, bidding, and product groups manually.

     

    Which of these statements about Performance Max campaigns is accurate?

    • Performance Max campaigns let you find and reach audiences across Google’s platform without needing to create different campaigns for each channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google by creating different campaigns for every channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search without creating different campaigns for every channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search through the creation of different campaigns for Shopping and Search.

     

    How do Performance Max campaigns work?

    • Performance Max campaigns are customizable, with the option to add manual input and advanced AI.
    • Performance Max campaigns drive simplicity, performance and reach by optimizing toward the retailer’s business goals while providing manual controls to optimize performance.
    • Performance Max campaigns use AI to optimize toward the retailer’s business goals across Google’s suite of ad networks. This drives simplicity, performance, and reach.
    • Performance Max campaigns allow you to have full control over the campaign setup, ad, and bidding.

     

    What are three benefits of a Performance Max campaign? Choose three.

    • Gives you more control by manually setting up campaigns
    • Simplifies campaign management.
    • Optimizes on goals using artificial intelligence
    • Helps you reach consumers across Google platforms

     

    What happens if you don’t resolve repeated policy violations, such as the price in the feed not matching the price on the website?

    • Your Google Merchant Center account will be suspended.
    • Your feed will be suspended.
    • Your Google My Business account will be suspended.
    • Your Google Ads account will be suspended.

     

    You’re looking to buy four chairs for your new deck. A retailer advertises the price for one chair in an ad, but the image in the ad is a patio set. When users click on the ad, they land on the product page with one chair. Which Shopping ads policy is the advertiser violating?

    • Misrepresentation of self or product
    • Restricted content
    • Return policy
    • Prohibited practice

     

    What are Performance Max Campaigns?

    • Performance Max campaigns give you complete control over the campaign setup, ad, and bidding.
    • Performance Max campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals across Google’s suite of ad networks through the use of AI. This drives performance, simplicity, and reach.
    • Performance Max campaigns provide the options of adding manual input and advanced AI.
    • Performance Max campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals by providing manual control over performance optimization. This drives simplicity, performance and reach

     

    How are Shopping ads created?

    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on keywords in Google Ads and the bid set in Merchant Center.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on product information in Merchant Center and the bid set in Google Ads.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on keywords in Google Ads.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on the campaign and bid settings in Merchant Center.

     

    Which of these things does a Performance max campaign automatically optimize?

    • Budget allocation across networks
    • Product feed creation
    • Campaign creation
    • Country of sale

     

    Which configuration must you configure before launching a Performance Max campaign?

    • Assets
    • Enable enhanced conversions
    • Product feed in Merchant Center
    • Keywords

     

    What’s an example of an online sales goal?

    • Wanting your consumers to schedule an appointment before purchasing the product.
    • Wanting to promote your online inventory and drive consumers to purchase a product on your website.
    • Wanting to raise awareness of your product and encourage consumers to interact with your brand and drive website traffic.
    • Wanting to promote your product and drive consumers to your physical location.

     

    How are Shopping ads created?

    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on keywords in Google Ads and the bid set in Merchant Center.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on product information in Merchant Center and the bid set in Google Ads.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on the campaign and bid settings in Merchant Center.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on keywords in Google Ads.

     

    Where can your shoppers check out when purchasing an item? Choose two.

    • Google Images
    • Your local store
    • Your website
    • Maps

     

    Which two of these ad formats can be found in a Performance Max campaign but not a Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two.

    • Responsive Display Ads
    • Local Inventory Ads
    • Gmail Ads
    • Product Shopping Ads

     

    You’re in the process of creating a Google Merchant Center account and realize you don’t have a refund policy. Your company does not allow refunds. What should you do next?

    • Make sure you clearly state your refund policy on the landing page. It’s acceptable that you don’t allow returns or refunds, but you must state this clearly. Consider adding the return and refund policy to the footer of the website so it’s readily available.
    • In order to run on Shopping ads, you’ll need to offer refunds and clearly state on the policy to the footer of the website so it’s readily available. Both of these things are requirements.
    • Don’t do anything. Refund policy is required to appear on the footer of the website landing page for businesses that offer a refund; otherwise, it’s not a violation to exclude it.
    • Ensure there is a disclaimer on the site. Whether a business offers refunds or not, it’s not obligated to have the policy on the website landing page as long as there’s a disclaimer.

     

    What are two features of a Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two.

    • Standard Shopping campaigns also allow for automated bidding to optimize campaign performance and bids.
    • Standard Shopping campaigns give you more control by letting you create and edit an ad format.
    • Standard Shopping campaigns optimize your goals based on real-time signals across all Google platforms.
    • Standard Shopping campaigns give you more control by letting you manually set up your campaign, bidding, and product groups.

     

    Which two ad formats are available on a Performance Max campaign but not on a Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two.

    • Gmail Ads
    • Responsive Display Ads
    • Product Shopping Ads
    • Local Inventory Ads

     

    How are Shopping ads created?

    • When a user enters a query, Google’s system determines which ad appears according to keywords in Google ads and the bid set in the Merchant Center.
    • When a user enters a query, Google’s system determines which ad appears according to keywords in Google Ads.
    • When a user enters a query, Google’s system determines which ad appears according to the product information in Merchant Center and the bid set in Google Ads.
    • When a user enters a query, Google’s system determines which ad appears based on the campaign and bid settings in Merchant Center.

     

    What’s the main difference between Performance Max and Standard Shopping ads in terms of how they reach consumers?

    • Performance Max ads have a more targeted reach, while Standard Shopping ads use AI technology to reach a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory.
    • Performance Max and Standard Shopping ads have an equally targeted reach, but Standard Shopping ads connect to a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory.
    • Performance Max uses AI technology to reach a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory, while Standard Shopping ads have a more targeted reach
    • Both Performance Max and Standard Shopping ads use AI technology to reach wider audience across all of Google’s inventory, but Performance Max ads have a more targeted reach.

     

    You are advising someone on the difference between Performance Max campaigns and Standard Shopping campaigns. What could you tell them that would accurately convey Performance Max campaigns’ benefits?

    • Performance Max campaigns let you create a campaign for each channel, which is a great way to find and reach audiences across Google.
    • Performance Max campaigns provide a means of finding and connecting audiences across Google’s platform without having to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns let you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Performance Max campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search by through the creation of a separate campaign for Shopping and Search.

     

    What’s an example of an online sales goal?

    • Wanting to raise awareness of your product and encourage consumers to interact with your brand and drive website traffic.
    • Wanting your consumers to schedule an appointment before purchasing the product.
    • Wanting to promote your online inventory and drive consumers to purchase a product on your website.
    • Wanting to promote your product and drive consumers to your physical location.

     

    If you were advising a client who wanted to run on Performance Max and use Maximize Conversion Value as a bid strategy, which optional secondary bid strategy should you advise them to choose?

    • Target Return On Ad Spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize Clicks
    • Manual Max CPC
    • Enhanced CPC

     

    If you want to know the value of getting new customers, which setting in a Performance max campaign will help you do that?

    • The customer retention setting
    • The customer focus setting
    • The customer selection setting
    • The customer acquisition setting

     

    Which three benefits are associated with a Performance Max campaign? Choose three.

    • Uses AI to help you optimize goals
    • Lets you reach customers across Google platforms
    • Lets you simplify campaign management.
    • Lets you manually set up campaigns

     

    You’re using Performance Max campaigns to run across Google platforms including Google Search, YouTube, and Google Images.

    • Which of these benefits would you gain with Performance Max?
    • Auction
    • Manual bids
    • Product-oriented
    • Reach

     

    the price for one dining chair in an ad. However, when users click on the ad and buy the product, they are charged for a set of six chairs.

    • Which Shopping ads policy is the advertiser violating?
    • Prohibited practice
    • Restricted content
    • Misrepresentation of self or product
    • Return policy

     

    What happens if you don’t resolve repeated policy violations, such as the price in the feed not matching the price on the website?

    • Suspension of feed
    • Suspension of Google My Business account
    • Suspension of Google Ads
    • Suspension of Google Merchant Center account

     

    What’s automatically optimized with a Performance max campaign?

    • Country of sale
    • Campaign creation
    • Product feed creation
    • Budget allocation across networks

     

    Which of these marketing objectives does Performance Max for Retail rely upon?

    • Lead Generation
    • Awareness
    • Online Sales
    • Mobile App

     

    You own a small business that sells baseball caps. You’re set to run your first Performance Max campaign that uses a set budget. How does the system allocate budget on a Performance Max campaign?

    • Budget is allocated manually across channels according to your channel preference. You control the campaign setup but optimize by channel manually.
    • Budget is automatically allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel, and Smart Shopping will optimize budget.
    • Budget is allocated across channels according to performance. There’s no need to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Budget is allocated manually by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign channel and separate campaign for budget.

     

    What are two ways your shoppers can check out when purchasing an item? Choose two.

    • Checkout on Maps
    • Checkout on Display
    • Checkout in your local store
    • Checkout on your website

     

    You’re using Performance Max campaigns to run across Google platforms, such as Google Search, Google Images, and YouTube. In this scenario, what’s a benefit that you gain with Performance Max?

    • Product-oriented
    • Auction
    • Reach
    • Manual bids

     

    What’s an example of an online sales goal?

    • You want to promote your product and drive consumers to your physical location.
    • You want to raise awareness of your product and encourage consumers to interact with your brand and drive website traffic.
    • You want to promote your online inventory and drive consumers to purchase a product on your website.
    • You want your consumers to schedule an appointment before purchasing the product.

     

    What are two ways you can upgrade all of your Smart Shopping campaign to Performance Max at once? Chose two.

    • In Google Ads, select the Performance Max upgrade notification. Select Apply. Next, select Apply All to upgrade all Smart Shopping campaigns.
    • Within the Campaigns page, select Upgrade your Smart Shopping Campaigns to Performance Max. Select All Campaigns. Then, select Apply All.
    • Within the Recommendations page, select Upgrade your smart Shopping Campaigns to Performance Max. Then, select Apply All.
    • Select the Performance Max upgrade notification in Merchant Center. Select Apply then Apply All to upgrade all Smart Shopping campaigns.

     

    How are Shopping ads created?

    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on keywords in Google Ads and the bid set in Merchant Center.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on product information in Merchant Center and the bid set in Google Ads.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on the campaign and bid settings in Merchant Center.
    • Google’s system determines which ad appears in response to a user’s search query based on keywords in Google Ads.

     

    In terms of how they reach customers, how are Standard Shopping and Performance Max campaigns different?

    • Standard Shopping ads have a more targeted reach, whereas Performance Max uses AI technology to connect to a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory.
    • Standard Shopping ads use AI technology to reach a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory, while Performance Max ads have a more targeted reach.
    • Standard Shopping ads and Performance Max have an equally targeted reach, but Performance Max reaches a narrower audience across all of Google’s inventory.
    • Standard Shopping ads and Performance Max both use AI technology to reach a wider audience across all of Google’s inventory, but Standard Shopping Ads’ reach is less targeted.

     

    You’re using Smart Shopping campaigns to run across Google platforms including Google Search, YouTube, and Google Images. Which of these benefits would you gain with Smart Shopping campaigns?

    • Manual bids
    • Real-time signal
    • Goal-oriented
    • Reach

     

    What’s the purpose of products groups in a Shopping campaign?

    • Product groups are used to specify which products from your feed you want to advertise in each campaign.
    • Product groups are remarketing lists that you want to advertise in each of your campaigns.
    • Product groups are keywords that are defined by categories you can select in each of your campaigns.
    • Product groups are predefined themes that you can select in each of your campaigns.

     

    If a person wants to opt in to the Product Ratings Program, where should they go?

    • Google Merchant Center
    • Product feed
    • Google My Business
    • Google Ads

     

    How can Shopping ads help retailers connect with potential shoppers? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Shoppers can browse and interact with attractive and engaging Shopping ads that give them a better sense of the product, which in return drives profit for the business.
    • Shopping ads let more than one Shopping ad — or a Shopping ad and a text ad — for the same retailer appear in a given search. This increases a retailer’s presence on the search results page.
    • Shopping ads let retailers add keywords in their campaign to show products when potential shoppers search for the relevant keyword. Shoppers are more likely to click on an ad if retailers use keywords to match queries.
    • Shopping ads let retailers showcase their brand by displaying their product name, price, and image. This gives shoppers a sense of the product before they open the ad.

     

    Which of these ad formats can be found in a Smart Shopping campaign but not a Standard Shopping campaign?

    • Gmail Ads
    • Product Shopping Ads
    • Local Inventory Ads
    • Responsive Display Ads

     

    Which basic website requirement must everyone follow in order to advertise on Shopping ads?

    • Secure checkout
    • Store policy
    • Full contact information
    • Country-specific destination URL

     

    How are Shopping ads created?

    • The campaign and bid settings in Merchant Center helps Google’s system determine which ad will show for a user’s search query.
    • The product information in Merchant Center and the bid set in Google Ads helps Google’s system determine which ad will show for a user’s search query.
    • Keywords in Google Ads and the bid set in Merchant Center helps Google’s system determine which ad will show for a user’s search query.
    • Keywords in Google Ads help Google’s system determine which ad will show for a user’s search query.

     

    What can you do to help prevent Standard Shopping ads from appearing when you don’t want them to?

    • Add negative keywords in the campaign
    • Add negative keywords in the product feed
    • Add negative keywords in Merchant Center
    • Add negative keywords in the ad

     

    If you want to know the value of acquiring new customers, which setting in a Smart Shopping campaign will help you do that?

    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)
    • Optimize for store visits
    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)
    • Click-through rate

     

    You’ve operated a successful online retail business for a decade without changing your product and marketing strategy. You’ve observed a recent trend, though—shoppers are buying less each time they make a purchase. Which actions should you take? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Continue with your current marketing strategy, as shopping behavior changes regularly and will balance out.
    • Uncover the needs to meet the requirements of curious and impatient consumers.
    • Provide personalized experiences that meet shopper expectations online or in-store.
    • Boost profitability, traffic, customer base, and sales with Shopping ads.

     

    You work at an agency and one of your clients wants to track performance by product category (ex: apparel) and gender. They already passed the optional and required attributes for apparel in the product feed. How could they achieve granular reporting?

    • Create a campaign for each gender, then set up product groups by apparel type. Example: Campaign #1: Women Product group #1: Tops Product group #2: Shoes
    • Create a campaign by product category and gender, and use product groups. Example: Campaign #1: Women’s Top Product group #1: Sweater Product group #2: Short Sleeves
    • Create a catch-all campaign. Example: Campaign #1: Tops Product group: All products
    • Create a campaign by product category, then set up product groups by gender. Example: Campaign #1: Tops Product group #1: Women’s Top Product group #2: Men’s Top

     

    Which two statements describe what makes Shopping campaigns different from Search campaigns? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Shopping ads are manually generated.
    • Shopping campaigns are organized by ad groups instead of products groups.
    • Shopping campaigns are organized by product groups.
    • Shopping campaigns rely on product information instead of keywords.

     

    You own a small business that sells scented candles. You’re ready to run your first Smart Shopping campaign that uses a set budget. How does the system allocate budget on a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • Budget is automatically allocated across channels, based on performance. You don’t need to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Budget is manually allocated across channels, based on your channel preference. You have control over the campaign setup while manually optimizing by channel.
    • Budget is manually allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel and budget.
    • Budget is automatically allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel, and Smart Shopping will optimize budget.

     

    You’re in the process of creating a Google Merchant Center account and realize you don’t have a refund policy. Your company does not allow refunds. What should you do next?

    • Consider adding the return and refund policy to the website footer. It’s OK that you don’t allow returns or refunds, but you are required to state your refund policy clearly on your landing page so that it is readily available.
    • Make sure there is a disclaimer. Whether a business offers refunds or not, it’s not required to have the policy on the website landing page as long as there’s a disclaimer.
    • Don’t do anything. You are not required to state refund policy on your landing page. The policy is required for businesses that offer a refund; otherwise, it’s not a violation to exclude it from the footer of the website so it’s readily available.
    • Begin offering refunds and include the return and refund policy in the landing page footer so that it is readily available. In order to run on Shopping ads, both of these things are required.

     

    You’re a marketing specialist for a large European pet company and want to advertise new products to drive site traffic. How can Merchant Center support your shopping strategy?

    • Merchant Center offers robust reporting and analytics to track campaign and product-level performance.
    • Merchant Center allows you to easily manage and update store information, manage product reviews, and create highly customizable Shopping ads.
    • Merchant Center lets you create campaigns, update ads, perform ad targeting, and select new products to advertise.
    • Merchant Center lets you manage how your in-store and online product inventory appears on Google.

     

    What are three ways your shoppers can check out when purchasing an item? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Checkout on your website
    • Checkout on Gmail
    • Checkout on Google
    • Checkout in your local store
    • Checkout on Maps

     

    What triggers a charge for a Shopping ad?

    • Someone making a purchase on the site
    • Someone viewing an ad without engaging wtih the content
    • Someone clicking on an ad and landing on the site
    • Someone searching for an item

     

    Your client is working with an agency to set up a product feed in Google Merchant Center, but the agency is not sure which attributes to include. Which attribute is optional?

    • image_link
    • availability
    • product_type
    • price

     

    What are two commonly used programs in Google Merchant Center? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Promotions
    • Product Ratings
    • Local campaigns
    • Store Ratings

     

    How does Google Merchant Center interact with Google Ads?

    • Google Ads passes inventory data to Google Merchant Center so advertisers can use the data to build a Shopping campaign.
    • Google Ads passes campaign performance to Google Merchant Center so advertisers can use the data to influence future campaign builds.
    • Google Merchant Center passes campaign performance to Google Ads so advertisers can use the data to influence future campaign builds.
    • Google Merchant Center passes inventory data to Google Ads so advertisers can use the data to build a Shopping campaign.

     

    You are advising someone on the difference between Smart shopping campaigns and Standard Shopping campaigns. Which of these statements could you use to accurately convey Smart shopping campaigns’ benefits?

    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google by creating a campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google’s platform without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search by creating a separate campaign for Shopping and Search.

     

    Which of these are ways you can help build a better consumer experience to drive action? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Let shoppers buy online and pick up in-store.
    • Adopt a single channel experience (online only or offline only).
    • Simplify the shopping experience by providing minimal information.
    • Provide relevant and up-to-date information, such as store address, hours, locations, and in-stock products.
    • Offer an easy checkout process.

     

    Which category type does irresponsible data collection fall under in the Google Ads Policy?

    • Prohibited content
    • Editorial standards
    • Prohibited practice
    • Restricted content

     

    Which of these is a benefit of Shopping Ads?

    • Shopping Ads are highly customizable to match the look and feel of a partner website that uses images and text to drive brand awareness.
    • Shopping Ads use product attributes to show ads on relevant searches to increase conversion.
    • Shopping Ads use a carousel format that allows for video, images, and text that change based on the search query.
    • Shopping Ads are a text-based-only format that’s easy to set up using keywords and location as the minimum requirement for launching.

     

    If someone asked you which bidding strategies they can use in a Standard Shopping campaign, what would you tell them? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize conversion value
    • Viewable cost per impression (CPM)
    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)

     

    What happens after a policy violation?

    • Ad disapproval and campaign suspension
    • Feed disapproval and item suspension
    • Item disapproval and account suspension
    • Campaign disapproval and ad suspension

     

    Which of these things does a Smart Shopping campaign automatically optimize?

    • Campaign creation
    • Product feed creation
    • Budget allocation across networks
    • Country of sale

     

    What are two features of a Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • It lets you create and edit an ad format.
    • It lets you set up campaign, bidding, and product groups manually.
    • It lets you optimize goals based on real-time signals across all Google platforms.
    • It allows for automated bidding to optimize campaign performance and bids.

     

    How can conversion tracking help users?

    • They can make decisions based on conversion data and users interested in your product.
    • They can identify the number of potential users who are interested in your product or likely to convert.
    • They can measure conversion data. Conversion tracking is a report that you add to your campaign.
    • They can optimize more effectively because conversion tracking shows you how many sales your campaign has driven.

     

    A brand company would like to use Shopping ads to promote a new line of water bottles. The agency is creating a product feed with all the required attributes for appeal but they’re not sure how to structure the title in the feed. Which structure would you recommend?

    • Brand (brand name) + Attributes (i.e., color, size) + Availability (e.g., in stock, out of stock)
    • Brand (brand name) + Product Type (i.e., category) + Availability (e.g., in stock, out of stock)
    • Brand (brand name) + Product Type (i.e., category) + Attributes (e.g., color, size)
    • Brand (brand name) + Availability (i.e., in stock, out of stock) + Attributes (e.g., color, size)

     

    What’s an example of an online sales goal?

    • You want to raise awareness of your product and encourage consumers to interact with your brand and drive website traffic.
    • You want to promote your online inventory and drive consumers to purchase a product on your website.
    • You want your consumers to schedule an appointment before purchasing the product.
    • You want to promote your product and drive consumers to your physical location.

     

    Which ad format promotes in-store products and also drives traffic to stores? Select 1 Correct Responses

    • Local inventory ads
    • Product Shopping ads
    • Carousel ads
    • Gmail ads

     

    What happens if you don’t resolve repeated policy violations, such as the price in the feed not matching the price on the website?

    • Suspension of Google Merchant Center account
    • Suspension of Google Ads
    • Suspension of feed
    • Suspension of Google My Business account

     

    How many Smart Shopping campaigns should you create to maximize performance?

    • Launch at least 100 Smart Shopping campaigns per account and optimize based on performance.
    • Create as many as 150 Smart Shopping campaigns to test performance and optimization.
    • Consolidate your Smart Shopping campaigns and only create separate campaigns when necessary.
    • There’s no limit to Smart Shopping campaigns because machine learning will optimize one Smart Shopping campaign over another.

     

    You’re setting up a Shopping campaign but aren’t sure which campaign goal to select. You’d like to engage with shoppers who are close to making a purchase decision. Which goal should you select?

    • Sales
    • Lead
    • Website traffic
    • Awareness

     

    How do Smart Shopping campaigns work?

    • Smart Shopping campaigns provide the options of adding manual input and advanced machine learning.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals by providing manual control over performance optimization. This drives simplicity, performance and reach
    • Smart Shopping campaigns give you complete control over the campaign setup, ad, and bidding.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals through the use of machine learning across Google’s suite of ad networks. This drives performance, simplicity, and reach.

     

    Aside from the Google Merchant Center diagnostic interface, what other way will you be notified of an account suspension?

    • Email notification in Google Merchant Center
    • Email notification in Google Ads
    • Email notification in Google Merchant Center and Google Ads
    • Email notification in Google My Business

     

    How can Shopping help you reach your goals? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Drive app downloads
    • Drive traffic and sales
    • Use data to fuel growth
    • Build better consumer experiences
    • Secure leads and contacts

     

    What’s an example of an omnichannel goal?

    • A cosmetic company wants to increase their online sales by driving consumers to the website to make a purchase.
    • The digital marketing team is promoting a 25% off discount for shoppers who buy online and pick up in-store.
    • The store marketing team at a large pet company wants to double only in-store sales by Q4.
    • A beverage company wants to raise awareness across Google platforms on a new line of sparkling water.

     

    Which of the following situations would be true if you tried to upload a feed in Google Merchant Center that did not have availability for each product?

    • Google’s system will flag it as a warning for you to resolve in the future. Availability is an optional attribute.
    • Google’s system will disapprove the feed, since availability is not an attribute in the product feed.
    • Google’s system will flag it with a warning for you to resolve in the future. Availability is a required attribute.
    • Google’s system will disapprove the feed until all required attributes are included. Availability is a required attribute.

     

    Which definition of attributes in the product feed is correct?

    • Attributes are text only that describe a product.
    • Attributes are keywords that describe a product.
    • Attributes are numerals only that describe a product.
    • Attributes are the data points that describe a product.

     

    You’re looking to buy four chairs for your new deck. A retailer advertises the price for one chair in an ad, but the image in the ad is a deck with four chairs. When users click on the ad, they land on the product page with one chair. Which Shopping ads policy is the advertiser violating?

    • Return policy
    • Unsupported Shopping content
    • Usefulness
    • Misrepresentation of self or product

     

    What are the three main components of Google’s policy mission statement? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Promote positive experience for all users
    • Implement fair and consistent policies
    • Guarantee revenue for businesses
    • Protect the business from fraudulent charges
    • Protect users’ online safety

     

    Which of these formats is available in a Smart Shopping campaign but unavailable in a Standard Shopping campaign?

    • Local Inventory Ads
    • Product Shopping Ads
    • Gmail Ads
    • Responsive Display Ads

     

    You work at a global company that ships products around the world. You would like to create a Shopping campaign to promote products in the European Economic Area and Switzerland. How are Shopping ads served in the European Economic Area and Switzerland?

    • Shopping ads can be served by Google My Business.
    • Shopping ads can be served by any Comparison Shopping Service (CSS) you work with.
    • Shopping ads can be served by one Comparison Shopping Service (CSS).
    • Shopping ads can be served by Google Merchant Center only.

     

    What are three ways that you can help build a better consumer experience to drive action? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Adopt a single channel experience (online only or offline only).
    • Provide relevant and up-to-date information, such as store address, hours, locations, and in-stock products.
    • Simplify the shopping experience by providing minimal information.
    • Offer an easy checkout process.
    • Let shoppers buy online and pick up in-store.

     

    Which of these statements about Shopping Ads is true?

    • Shopping Ads use a carousel format that allows for video, images, and text that change based on the search query.
    • Shopping Ads use product attributes to show ads on relevant searches to increase conversion.
    • Shopping Ads are a text-based-only format that’s easy to set up using keywords and location as the minimum requirement for launching.
    • Shopping Ads are highly customizable to match the look and feel of a partner website that uses images and text to drive brand awareness.

     

    Which of these website features are required in order to advertise on Shopping ads?

    • Store policy
    • Full contact information
    • Secure checkout
    • Country-specific destination URL

     

    Which of these are ways Shopping helps you reach your goals? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Build better consumer experiences
    • Drive app downloads
    • Use data to fuel growth
    • Secure leads and contacts
    • Drive traffic and sales

     

    Which of these choices describes a free product listing?

    • Free product listings use product information directly from the website to curate no cost ads without a product feed.
    • Free product listings appear on the Shopping Tab and provide an opportunity to highlight products and drive customers to your website at no cost.
    • Free product listings are paid Shopping ads that are converted due to low impressions and clicks.
    • Free product listings participate in an ad auction and offer insights and controls to optimize performance and prioritize key products.

     

    Which of the following is true of attributes in the product feed?

    • Attributes are numerals only that describe a product.
    • Attributes are keywords that describe a product.
    • Attributes are the data points that describe a product.
    • Attributes are text only that describe a product.

     

    Which of the following Shopping campaign goals would you choose if your aim was to engage with shoppers who are close to making a purchase decision?

    • Sales
    • Lead
    • Awareness
    • Website traffic

     

    You’re a marketing specialist for a large European sporting goods retailer and want to advertise new products to drive site traffic. How can Merchant Center support your shopping strategy?

    • Merchant Center lets you manage how your in-store and online product inventory appears on Google.
    • Merchant Center lets you create campaigns, update ads, perform ad targeting, and select new products to advertise.
    • Merchant Center offers robust reporting and analytics to track campaign and product-level performance.
    • Merchant Center allows you to easily manage and update store information, manage product reviews, and create highly customizable Shopping ads.

     

    Which two statements capture what differentiates Shopping campaigns from Search campaigns? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Shopping campaigns are organized by product groups.
    • Shopping ads are manually generated.
    • Shopping campaigns are organized by ad groups instead of products groups.
    • Shopping campaigns rely on product information instead of keywords.

     

    You’re using Smart Shopping campaigns to run across Google platforms, such as Google Search, Google Images, and YouTube. In this scenario, what’s a benefit that you gain with Smart Shopping campaigns?

    • Reach
    • Real-time signal
    • Manual bids
    • Goal-oriented

     

    When setting up a product feed in the Google Merchant Center, which of the following attributes is optional?

    • image_link
    • product_type
    • price
    • availability

     

    Aside from the Google Merchant Center diagnostic interface, how would you expect to be notified of an account suspension?

    • Email notification in Google My Business
    • Email notification in Google Merchant Center and Google Ads
    • Email notification in Google Ads
    • Email notification in Google Merchant Center

     

    Where should you add negative keywords if you want to help prevent Standard Shopping ads from appearing when you do not want them to?

    • The campaign
    • The Merchant Center
    • The product feed
    • The ad

     

    You work at an agency and manage several retail accounts in Google Ads. One of your clients is new to Shopping Ads and would like to track performance by product category (ex: apparel) and gender. The client is passing the required and optional attributes for apparel in the product feed. Which recommendation would you make to their campaign structure to achieve granular reporting?

    • Create a campaign by product category and gender, and use product groups. Example: Campaign #1: Women’s Top Product group #1: Sweater Product group #2: Short Sleeves
    • Create a campaign by product category, then set up product groups by gender. Example: Campaign #1: Tops Product group #1: Women’s Top Product group #2: Men’s Top
    • Create a catch-all campaign. Example: Campaign #1: Tops Product group: All products
    • Create a campaign for each gender, then set up product groups by apparel type. Example: Campaign #1: Women Product group #1: Tops Product group #2: Shoes

     

    Which of these statements about Smart shopping campaigns is accurate?

    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google by creating a campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google’s platform without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search by creating a separate campaign for Shopping and Search.

     

    Where would you go to opt in to the Product Ratings program?

    • Product feed
    • Google Ads
    • Google Merchant Center
    • Google My Business

     

    When do you pay for a Shopping ad?

    • When someone makes a purchase on the site
    • When someone searches for your item
    • When someone views your ad without engaging with the content
    • When someone clicks on your ad and lands on the site

     

    Which of these components are optimized automatically with a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • Product feed creation
    • Country of sale
    • Budget allocation across networks
    • Campaign creation

     

    Which of these programs are commonly used in Google Merchant Center? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Product Ratings
    • Promotions
    • Local campaigns
    • Store Ratings

     

    You’ve owned a successful online retail business for a decade. Though the product and marketing strategy hasn’t changed, shoppers’ behavior has changed—they tend to be buying less and less with each transaction. Which two actions should you take? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Uncover the needs to meet the requirements of curious and impatient consumers.
    • Provide personalized experiences that meet shopper expectations online or in-store.
    • Continue with your current marketing strategy, as shopping behavior changes regularly and will balance out.
    • Drive profitability, traffic, customer base, and sales with Shopping ads.

     

    You’re looking to buy six chairs for your new dining room table. A retailer advertises the price for one dining chair in an ad, but the image in the ad is a dining table with six chairs. When users click on the ad, they land on the product page with one chair. Which Shopping ads policy is the advertiser violating?

    • Return policy
    • Usefulness
    • Unsupported Shopping content
    • Misrepresentation of self or product

     

    A brand company would like to use Shopping ads to promote a new line of basketball shoes. The agency is developing a product feed with all the required attributes for appeal. They are not sure how to structure the title, however. Which structure would you recommend?

    • Brand (brand name) + Product Type (i.e., category) + Availability (e.g., in stock, out of stock)
    • Brand (brand name) + Attributes (i.e., color, size) + Availability (e.g., in stock, out of stock)
    • Brand (brand name) + Availability (i.e., in stock, out of stock) + Attributes (e.g., color, size)
    • Brand (brand name) + Product Type (i.e., category) + Attributes (e.g., color, size)

     

    You own a small business that sells shoes. You’re ready to run your first Smart Shopping campaign that uses a set budget. How does the system allocate budget on a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • Budget is manually allocated across channels, based on your channel preference. You have control over the campaign setup while manually optimizing by channel.
    • Budget is automatically allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel, and Smart Shopping will optimize budget.
    • Budget is automatically allocated across channels, based on performance. You don’t need to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Budget is manually allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel and budget.

     

    How would you accurately describe the function of product groups in a Shopping campaign?

    • Product groups are predefined themes that you can select in each of your campaigns.
    • Product groups are used to specify which products from your feed you want to advertise in each campaign.
    • Product groups are keywords that are defined by categories you can select in each of your campaigns.
    • Product groups are remarketing lists that you want to advertise in each of your campaigns.

     

    Where can your shoppers check out when purchasing an item? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Your website
    • Gmail
    • Maps
    • Your local store
    • Google Images

     

    If you were advising a client who wanted to run on Smart Shopping campaigns and use Maximize Conversion Value as a bid strategy, which secondary bid strategy should you advise them to choose?

    • Enhanced CPC
    • Manual Max CPC
    • Target Return On Ad Spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize Clicks

     

    How do Google Ads and Google Merchant Center interact with each other?

    • Google Ads passes campaign performance to Google Merchant Center so advertisers can use the data to influence future campaign builds.
    • Google Merchant Center passes campaign performance to Google Ads so advertisers can use the data to influence future campaign builds.
    • Google Ads passes inventory data to Google Merchant Center so advertisers can use the data to build a Shopping campaign.
    • Google Merchant Center passes inventory data to Google Ads so advertisers can use the data to build a Shopping campaign.

     

    Which Smart Shopping campaign setting will help you determine the value of acquiring new customers?

    • Click-through rate
    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)
    • Optimize for store visits
    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)

     

    Which setting in a Smart Shopping campaign will help you know the value of acquiring new customers?

    • Optimize for store visits
    • Click-through rate
    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)
    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)

     

    How does Google enforce policy violations?

    • Ad disapproval and campaign suspension
    • Item disapproval and account suspension
    • Feed disapproval and item suspension
    • Campaign disapproval and ad suspension

     

    If Standard Shopping ads appear when you do not want them to appear, how can you resolve this problem?

    • Add negative keywords in the campaign
    • Add negative keywords in Merchant Center
    • Add negative keywords in the product feed
    • Add negative keywords in the ad

     

    You own a small business that sells baseball caps. You’re ready to run your first Smart Shopping campaign that uses a set budget. How does the system allocate budget on a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • Budget is automatically allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel, and Smart Shopping will optimize budget.
    • Budget is automatically allocated across channels, based on performance. You don’t need to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Budget is manually allocated across channels, based on your channel preference. You have control over the campaign setup while manually optimizing by channel.
    • Budget is manually allocated by campaign, so you’ll need to create a separate campaign by channel and budget.

     

    You’d like to promote your products across Google’s platform but aren’t sure if you should go with a Smart Shopping campaign or a Standard Shopping campaign. Which statement is true about Smart Shopping campaigns?

    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search by creating a separate campaign for Shopping and Search.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google’s platform without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Shopping and Search without needing to create a separate campaign for each channel.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns can help you find and reach audiences across Google by creating a campaign for each channel.

     

    Which of these statements about product groups in a Shopping campaign is true?

    • Product groups are keywords that are defined by categories you can select in each of your campaigns.
    • Product groups are predefined themes that you can select in each of your campaigns.
    • Product groups are used to specify which products from your feed you want to advertise in each campaign.
    • Product groups are remarketing lists that you want to advertise in each of your campaigns.

     

    You are working with a client who is new to Shopping ads and you noticed that the inventory data the client plans to use for their product feed isn’t accurate. If a product feed is uploaded with data quality issues, what are two issues that might arise? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Data quality issues in Merchant Center will be detected by Google’s system and will permanently suspend the account
    • Users may lose trust in Google and the retailer if the product information in the ad does not match the information on the website.
    • Google’s system will detect data quality issues in Google Ads and disapprove campaigns with those items until the violation is resolved.
    • Google’s system will detect data quality issues in Merchant Center and disapprove items until the violation is resolved.

     

    In which three places can Standard Shopping ads appear? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Google Images
    • Google Search
    • Google Maps
    • The Shopping tab
    • Gmail

     

    Where would you advise someone to go in order to opt in to the Product Ratings Program?

    • Product feed
    • Google Ads
    • Google My Business
    • Google Merchant Center

     

    What’s the benefit of conversion tracking?

    • You can identify the number of potential users who are interested in your product or likely to convert.
    • You can measure conversion data. Conversion tracking is a report that you add to your campaign.
    • You can optimize more effectively because conversion tracking shows you how many sales your campaign has driven.
    • You can make decisions based on conversion data and users interested in your product.

     

    Which of these formats promotes in-store offerings while also driving traffic to stores?

    • Product Shopping ads
    • Gmail ads
    • Local inventory ads
    • Carousel ads

     

    You’ve owned a successful online retail business for 10 years. Recently, shopping behavior has shifted, and shoppers are buying less each time. The product and marketing strategy hasn’t changed. Which two actions should you take? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Uncover the needs to meet the requirements of curious and impatient consumers.
    • Guarantee profitability, traffic, customer base, and sales with Shopping ads.
    • Provide personalized experiences that meet shopper expectations online or in-store.
    • Continue with your current marketing strategy, as shopping behavior changes regularly and will balance out.

     

    What are two ways Shopping ads can help retailers connect with potential shoppers? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Shoppers can browse and interact with attractive and engaging Shopping ads that give them a better sense of the product, which in return guarantees profit for the business.
    • Shopping ads let retailers showcase their brand by displaying their product name, price, and image. This gives shoppers a sense of the product before they open the ad.
    • Shopping ads let more than one Shopping ad — or a Shopping ad and a text ad — for the same retailer appear in a given search. This increases a retailer’s presence on the search results page.
    • Shopping ads let retailers add keywords in their campaign to show products when potential shoppers search for the relevant keyword. Shoppers are more likely to click on an ad if retailers use keywords to match queries.

     

    Which of these is an online sales goal?

    • You want to promote your product and drive consumers to your physical location.
    • You want to raise awareness of your product and encourage consumers to interact with your brand and drive website traffic.
    • You want to promote your online inventory and drive consumers to purchase a product on your website.
    • You want your consumers to schedule an appointment before purchasing the product.

     

    What are free product listings?

    • Free product listings are paid Shopping ads that are converted due to low impressions and clicks.
    • Free product listings appear on the Shopping Tab and provide an opportunity to highlight products and drive customers to your website at no cost.
    • Free product listings use product information directly from the website to curate no cost ads without a product feed.
    • Free product listings participate in an ad auction and offer insights and controls to optimize performance and prioritize key products.

     

    When you use Smart Shopping campaigns to run across Google platforms including YouTube, Google Search, and Google Images, which of these benefits do you gain?

    • Viewable cost per impression (CPM)
    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize conversion value
    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)

     

    What’s the relationship between Google Merchant Center and Google Ads?

    • Google Merchant Center passes campaign performance to Google Ads so advertisers can use the data to influence future campaign builds.
    • Google Ads passes inventory data to Google Merchant Center so advertisers can use the data to build a Shopping campaign.
    • Google Ads passes campaign performance to Google Merchant Center so advertisers can use the data to influence future campaign builds.
    • Google Merchant Center passes inventory data to Google Ads so advertisers can use the data to build a Shopping campaign.

     

    You work at an agency and one of your clients wants to track performance by product category (ex: apparel) and gender. They already passed the required and optional attributes for apparel in the product feed. Which of these techniques could help them achieve granular reporting?

    • Create a campaign for each gender, then set up product groups by apparel type. Example: Campaign #1: Women Product group #1: Tops Product group #2: Shoes
    • Create a campaign by product category and gender, and use product groups. Example: Campaign #1: Women’s Top Product group #1: Sweater Product group #2: Short Sleeves
    • Create a catch-all campaign. Example: Campaign #1: Tops Product group: All products
    • Create a campaign by product category, then set up product groups by gender. Example: Campaign #1: Tops Product group #1: Women’s Top Product group #2: Men’s Top

     

    You’re building a product feed for a client who is new to Shopping ads, and you notice the client’s inventory data isn’t accurate. What two things may happen if the feed is uploaded with data quality issues? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Google’s system will detect data quality issues in Google Ads and disapprove campaigns with those items until the violation is resolved.
    • Users may lose trust in Google and the retailer if the product information in the ad does not match the information on the website.
    • Data quality issues in Merchant Center will be detected by Google’s system and will permanently suspend the account
    • Google’s system will detect data quality issues in Merchant Center and disapprove items until the violation is resolved.

     

    How will you be notified of an account suspension (aside from the Google Merchant Center diagnostic interface)?

    • Email notification in Google Merchant Center and Google Ads
    • Email notification in Google My Business
    • Email notification in Google Ads
    • Email notification in Google Merchant Center

     

    You want to launch your first Shopping campaign, but you don’t know the difference between Search and Shopping. What’s a benefit of Shopping Ads?

    • Shopping Ads are a text-based-only format that’s easy to set up using keywords and location as the minimum requirement for launching.
    • Shopping Ads use product attributes to show ads on relevant searches to increase conversion.
    • Shopping Ads use a carousel format that allows for video, images, and text that change based on the search query.
    • Shopping Ads are highly customizable to match the look and feel of a partner website that uses images and text to drive brand awareness.

     

    Which of these statements is true of Smart Shopping campaigns?

    • Smart Shopping campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals through the use of machine learning across Google’s suite of ad networks, driving performance, simplicity, and reach.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns optimize toward a retailer’s business goals by providing manual control over performance optimization, driving simplicity, performance and reach
    • Smart Shopping campaigns give you complete control over the campaign setup, ad, and bidding.
    • Smart Shopping campaigns provide the options of adding manual input and advanced machine learning.

     

    Your client wants to run on Smart Shopping campaigns and use Maximize Conversion Value as a bid strategy. The client also wants to set a secondary bid strategy. Which secondary bid strategy should they select?

    • Enhanced CPC
    • Target Return On Ad Spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize Clicks
    • Manual Max CPC

     

    You’re setting up a product feed in Merchant Center for the first time, and you realize you don’t have availability for each product. What will happen if you try to upload the feed in Google Merchant Center?

    • Availability is an optional attribute, so Google’s system will flag it as a warning for you to resolve in the future.
    • Availability is a required attribute, so Google’s system will disapprove the feed until all required attributes are included.
    • Availability is not an attribute in the product feed, so Google’s system will disapprove the feed.
    • Availability is a required attribute, so Google’s system will flag it as a warning for you to resolve in the future.

     

    You’re looking to buy four stools for your new home bar. A retailer advertises the price for one stool in an ad, but the image in the ad is a bar with four stools. When users click on the ad, they land on the product page with one stool. Which Shopping ads policy is the advertiser violating?

    • Usefulness
    • Misrepresentation of self or product
    • Return policy
    • Unsupported Shopping content

     

    How can you help build a better consumer experience to drive action? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Let shoppers buy online and pick up in-store.
    • Simplify the shopping experience by providing minimal information.
    • Offer an easy checkout process.
    • Provide relevant and up-to-date information, such as store address, hours, locations, and in-stock products.
    • Adopt a single channel experience (online only or offline only).

     

    Which statements are aligned with Google’s policy mission? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Promote positive experience for all users
    • Implement fair and consistent policies
    • Protect the business from fraudulent charges
    • Boost revenue for businesses
    • Protect users’ online safety

     

    Which of these format promotes in-store products and drives traffic to brick-and-mortar locations?

    • Carousel ads
    • Local inventory ads
    • Gmail ads
    • Product Shopping ads

     

    Which two statements accurately convey what differentiates Shopping campaigns from Search campaigns? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Shopping campaigns are organized by ad groups instead of products groups.
    • Shopping ads are manually generated.
    • Shopping campaigns rely on product information instead of keywords.
    • Shopping campaigns are organized by product groups.

     

    According to Google Ads Policy, which category type does irresponsible data collection fall under?

    • Prohibited content
    • Editorial standards
    • Prohibited practice
    • Restricted content

     

    You’re a marketing specialist for a large European housewares retailer and want to advertise new products to drive site traffic. How can Merchant Center support your shopping strategy?

    • Merchant Center allows you to easily manage and update store information, manage product reviews, and create highly customizable Shopping ads.
    • Merchant Center lets you create campaigns, update ads, perform ad targeting, and select new products to advertise.
    • Merchant Center offers robust reporting and analytics to track campaign and product-level performance.
    • Merchant Center lets you manage how your in-store and online product inventory appears on Google.

     

    What’s automatically optimized with a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • Country of sale
    • Product feed creation
    • Budget allocation across networks
    • Campaign creation

     

    When should you expect to pay for a Shopping ad?

    • After someone buys something on the site
    • After someone searches for your item
    • After someone clicks on your ad and lands on the site
    • After someone views your ad without engaging

     

    What happens if you violate Google policy?

    • Your item is disapproved and your account is suspended.
    • Your feed is disapproved and your item is suspended.
    • Your campaign is disapproved and your ad is suspended.
    • Your ad is disapproved and your campaign is suspended.

     

    Of these programs, which are the most commonly used in Google Merchant Center? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Store Ratings
    • Product Ratings
    • Local campaigns
    • Promotions

     

    Which of these is a requirement for advertising on Shopping ads?

    • Secure checkout
    • Full contact information
    • Store policy
    • Country-specific destination URL

     

    Where might you see Standard Shopping ads? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Google Images
    • The Shopping tab
    • Google Search
    • Gmail
    • Google Maps

     

    How can a remarketing list help a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns capture keywords of users who are likely to purchase again and add the list to the campaign.
    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns reach users who are more likely to purchase again because they’ve already shown interest in your products.
    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns reach users who already made a purchase at a local store.
    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns drive in-store only traffic based on interest in your local products.

     

    What are two bidding strategies that you can use in your Standard Shopping campaign? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)
    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)
    • Maximize conversion value
    • Viewable cost per impression (CPM)

     

    Which of these tactics would help you maximize performance for a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • Create as many as 150 Smart Shopping campaigns to test performance and optimization.
    • Consolidate your Smart Shopping campaigns and only create separate campaigns when necessary.
    • Launch at least 100 Smart Shopping campaigns per account and optimize based on performance.
    • Don’t set a limit to Smart Shopping campaigns because machine learning will optimize one Smart Shopping campaign over another.

     

    What are three ways Shopping adds help you reach your goals? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Secure leads and contacts
    • Drive app downloads
    • Build better consumer experiences
    • Use data to fuel growth
    • Drive traffic and sales

     

    You’re setting up a Shopping campaign in hopes of engaging with shoppers who are close to making a purchase decision. Which campaign goal best represents what you’re trying to accomplish?

    • Website traffic
    • Lead
    • Sales
    • Awareness

     

    Which of the following attributes is optional when setting up a product feed in the Google Merchant Center?

    • price
    • product_type
    • image_link
    • availability

     

    Which of the following are options for checking out when shoppers purchase an item? Choose three. Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Checkout in your local store
    • Checkout on Gmail
    • Checkout on Maps
    • Checkout on Google
    • Checkout on your website

     

    To maximize performance, how should you set up your Smart Shopping campaigns?

    • Launch at least 100 Smart Shopping campaigns per account and optimize based on performance.
    • Consolidate your Smart Shopping campaigns and only create separate campaigns when necessary.
    • Create as many as 150 Smart Shopping campaigns to test performance and optimization.
    • Don’t set a limit to Smart Shopping campaigns because machine learning will optimize one Smart Shopping campaign over another.

     

    Two of these bidding strategies can be used in a Standard Shopping campaign. Which are they? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Enhanced cost-per-click (eCPC)
    • Viewable cost per impression (CPM)
    • Maximize conversion value
    • Target return on ad spend (tROAS)

     

    What benefit does a remarketing list have for a Smart Shopping campaign?

    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns capture keywords of users who are likely to purchase again and add the list to the campaign.
    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns reach users who already made a purchase at a local store.
    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns drive in-store only traffic based on interest in your local products.
    • A remarketing list can help Smart Shopping campaigns reach users who are more likely to purchase again because they’ve already shown interest in your products.

     

    A brand company would like to use Shopping ads to promote a new line of jeans. The agency is putting together a product feed with all the required attributes for appeal but they’re not sure how to structure the title in the feed. Which structure would you recommend?

    • Brand (brand name) + Product Type (i.e., category) + Attributes (e.g., color, size)
    • Brand (brand name) + Attributes (i.e., color, size) + Availability (e.g., in stock, out of stock)
    • Brand (brand name) + Availability (i.e., in stock, out of stock) + Attributes (e.g., color, size)
    • Brand (brand name) + Product Type (i.e., category) + Availability (e.g., in stock, out of stock)

     

    What’s the purpose of attributes in the product feed?

    • Attributes are text only that describe a product.
    • Attributes are numerals only that describe a product.
    • Attributes are the data points that describe a product.
    • Attributes are keywords that describe a product.

     

    Which of these ways can Shopping ads help retailers connect with potential shoppers? Choose two. Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Shopping ads let retailers add keywords in their campaign to show products when potential shoppers search for the relevant keyword. Shoppers are more likely to click on an ad if retailers use keywords to match queries.
    • Shoppers can browse and interact with attractive and engaging Shopping ads that give them a better sense of the product, which in return helps generate profit for the business.
    • Shopping ads let retailers showcase their brand by displaying their product name, price, and image. This gives shoppers a sense of the product before they open the ad.
    • Shopping ads let more than one Shopping ad — or a Shopping ad and a text ad — for the same retailer appear in a given search. This increases a retailer’s presence on the search results page.

     

    What will happen if you try to upload a feed in Google Merchant Center that does not have availability for each product?

    • Availability is a required attribute, so Google’s system will flag it as a warning for you to resolve in the future.
    • Availability is an optional attribute, so Google’s system will flag it as a warning for you to resolve in the future.
    • Availability is not an attribute in the product feed, so Google’s system will disapprove the feed.
    • Availability is a required attribute, so Google’s system will disapprove the feed until all required attributes are included.

     

    Which ad format is available on a Smart Shopping campaign but not a Standard Shopping campaign?

    • Gmail Ads
    • Responsive Display Ads
    • Product Shopping Ads
    • Local Inventory Ads

     

    Knowledge Check Assessment (7 questions)

     

    Local Inventory Ads allow retailers to promote their in-store inventory and drive shoppers to their brick-and-mortar stores.

    • True
    • False

     

    What can Local Catalog Ads do? Select All Correct Responses

    • Reach mobile shoppers
    • Drive store visits
    • Promote store deals
    • All of the above

     

    Which of the following is something retailers shouldn’t do in a shifting retail landscape?

    • Accelerate by making data the foundation of everything they do
    • Connect with customers anywhere and everywhere they are in a brand-first way
    • Provide minimal information to simply things
    • Remove friction to drive action

     

    Showcase Shopping ads allow a retailer to engage people early in the purchase journey, when they’re discovering what to buy and where to buy it. Where do Showcase Shopping ads generally appear?

    • Any shopping queries
    • Broader queries
    • Local intent queries
    • Long-tail or specific queries

     

    Smart Shopping campaigns simplify campaign management by automating which of the following?

    Select All Correct

    • Responses
    • Ad creation
    • Targeting Bidding
    • All of the above

     

    True or false? Shopping ads use product data to determine how and where to show ads.

    • True
    • False

     

    True or false? Shopping campaigns can help promote online and local inventory.

    • True
    • False

     

     

    Get Certified in Google Shopping Advertising Now!!!

     

    Filed Under: Certifications

    HubSpot Trainer Certification Exam Answers

    9 June, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    HubSpot Trainer Certification Exam Answers

    Hubspot Trainer Certification Exam Answers

    Practicum not included, you have to do yourshelf.

     

    Exam

    • There are 60 questions.
    • It should take 1 hour to complete.
    • You must answer 45 questions correctly to pass.
    • You must wait 12 hours between attempts.
    • You have 3 hours to finish the exam.

     

    Get HubSpot Trainer Certification Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    All of the following are best practice examples of using storytelling, EXCEPT:

    • Using a story to re-engage participants who have become disengaged from your training
    • Incorporating as many personal stories as you can throughout the training
    • Using stories that are relevant to your audience and topic
    • Weaving your story throughout the training to help participants recall earlier points

     

    True or false? Having a list of training skills provides trainers with a guideline for self-assessment and a way to identify opportunities for improvement.

    • True
    • False

     

    The following behavior is an example of using which training skill? “Trainers ask the learners to agree to a set of expectations for how the class will be conducted. In turn, you can ask what the learners would like from you.”

    • Agreements
    • Conflict
    • Aligning learners
    • Content mastery

     

    All of the following are examples of using vocal cadence effectively, EXCEPT:

    • Pausing at appropriate times to build anticipation
    • Varying your vocal tone to avoid being monotone
    • Using an overly melodic tone to keep your audience engaged
    • Adjusting your tone based on the content that you’re delivering

     

    True or false? Successful trainers are able to always avoid conflict in their training.

    • True – Conflict is never constructive in a classroom setting.
    • True – Avoid any topics that can cause conflict, since this leads to anger and frustration from participants.
    • False – When used appropriately, constructive debates are a way to engage participants.
    • False – While conflict should never be used for beginner topics, it should always be used when teaching advanced topics.

     

    True or false? Successful trainers only self-assess their skills when they start out. Once you’ve given a few successful trainings, you won’t need to revisit this.

    • True
    • False

     

    Which training skill is demonstrated by trainers who are able to answer questions outside the scope of training and run a successful training without relying on slides?

    • Delivery methods
    • Content mastery
    • Question asking
    • Analogies, examples, and metaphors

     

    Fill in the blank: ___________ learners tend to learn best through methods like lectures, discussions, and brainstorming.

    • Visual
    • Auditory
    • Kinesthetic
    • All of the above

     

    Which of the following is typical of kinesthetic learners?

    • A.) Needing lots of breaks, since they find it difficult to sit for long periods of time
    • B.) Speaking with their hands and through gestures
    • C.) Sitting in the front of the room to avoid visual distractions
    • D.) A and B
    • E.) A and C
    • F.) A, B, and C

     

    True or false? Survey your participants prior to your training to understand their learning styles, and then focus solely on accommodating the most common learning style.

    • True
    • False

     

    All of the following describe adult learners, EXCEPT:

    • Adults need to know why it’s important that they learn this content.
    • Adults want to share their experiences and learn from other participants in the class.
    • Adults don’t care when they will apply the learning to their work or personal life.
    • Adults want to choose what they learn, when they learn it, and how they learn it.

     

    True or false? The best way to motivate adult learners is to enhance their reasons for participating and decrease the learning barriers.

    • True
    • False

     

    How can you create a collaborative and respectful environment for adult learners?

    • Include climate and rapport building in the beginning of your training.
    • Create easier activities in the beginning of the training so that learners gain confidence as they move towards more difficult activities.
    • Don’t dismiss learners’ questions and answers, even if they aren’t exactly what you were looking for.
    • All of the above.

     

    You decide to create an activity about what a good social media post looks like. You want the attendees to write out social media posts and receive feedback from other participants. Which element of an adult training lesson is this an example of?

    • Experience
    • Benefit
    • Participation
    • Application

     

    All of the following are strategies to help participants understand the benefit of social media, EXCEPT:

    • Using an example of a marketing strategy that includes social media in comparison to a marketing strategy that omits social media.
    • Sharing a story of how your agency improved a client’s business bottom line through social media.
    • Sharing a statistic on the results of social media.
    • Having participants create a social media publishing schedule.

     

    Fill in the blank: __________ helps you build a connection with your audience and draw them in.

    • Eye contact
    • Stage presence
    • Movement
    • Body language

     

    True or false? Communication is more than the words you speak.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blank: You should _____________ to make sure you’re being clear and that your learners are on the same page.

    • check your sources
    • ask questions
    • repeat yourself

     

    True or false? Rapport only needs to be built between you and the individuals in the class.

    • True – Rapport is built between you and the learners, one on one.
    • True – You can only focus on building rapport with one person at a time.
    • False – You need to build rapport and encourage the learners to seek out collaboration with the rest of the group.
    • False – Rapport includes everyone, but has to be built over a long period of time.

     

    True or false? The best way to become a better public speaker is to find one you admire and copy them.

    • True – Imitation is a form of flattery.
    • True – If they’re good at it, you will be too.
    • False – You can’t be anyone but yourself.
    • False – You should think about what you find engaging about them, not try to impersonate them.

     

    Fill in the blanks: When in front of a class, your movements should be __________ and _____________.

    • fast, exciting
    • purposeful, engaging
    • slow, calm
    • powerful, inspiring

     

    Fill in the blank: In the ________ phase of the ADDIE model, you’ll deal with learning objectives, assessment instruments, exercises, content, subject matter analysis, lesson planning, and media selection.

    • analyze
    • design
    • develop
    • implement

     

    In which phase of the ADDIE model do you define the instructional problems and identify your learning persona?

    • analyze
    • design
    • develop
    • evaluate

     

    Fill in the blank: A ___________ first identifies the goal of the training and then chooses the actions that are most likely to help you arrive efficiently at that goal.

    • learning gap
    • learning persona
    • backwards plan
    • learning goal

     

    True or false? A learning goal must have specific, observable, and measurable outcomes.

    • True — Learning goals must always be specific, observable, and measurable.
    • True — Learning goals should be very specific and easily answered questions.
    • False — Learning goals are big, overarching questions you hope to answer in your course and may not result in observable and measurable behavior.
    • False — It depends on the goal. While some can be more open-ended, others must be more specific.

     

    Which of the following are examples of types of learning activities?

    • Case studies
    • Games
    • Lectures
    • Role plays
    • All of the above

     

    True or false? While you should try to edit your content before you deliver it, spelling and grammar errors won’t impact your learner’s experience.

    • True
    • False

     

    Which of the following is an example of a learning goal?

    • “How do you create remarkable content?”
    • “Students will be able to define the three stages of the buyer’s journey.”
    • “Students will be able to compose an agile content marketing plan.”
    • “Students will fill out a buyer’s journey roadmap.”

     

    True or false? One way to test your content during the develop phase is to perform pilot tests with a sample of your intended audience.

    • True
    • False

     

    Which of the following personality traits is contagious in a learning environment?

    • Confidence
    • Enthusiasm
    • Passion
    • All of the above

     

    True or false? Preparation is different for every facilitator and class.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blanks: __________ and _________ will indicate your comfort level with the topic.

    • Confidence, presence
    • Preparation, excitement
    • Practice, planning
    • Your slides, presentation

     

    Fill in the blank: A(n) __________ gathers information about each of your learners prior to the class.

    • pre-class questionnaire
    • ice breaker
    • class introduction email
    • phone interview

     

    The learning environment can be broken into three focal points:

    • students, conversations, and presentations.
    • seats, slides, and materials.
    • audience, atmosphere, and room.

     

    Fill in the blank: A _______________ style uses a mix of questions, paraphrasing, and pivoting to help the students reach a learning objective through discussion.

    • presentation
    • facilitation
    • lecturing
    • reading

     

    Fill in the blanks: ____________ is an ideal method when the topic is easily understood with little to no explanation; _____________ is an ideal method when you have experienced learners who can engage in discussion.

    • Facilitation, presentation
    • Presentation, facilitation
    • Facilitation, storytelling
    • Presentation, lecturing

     

    True or false? If you start a class with one method, you cannot change it until your next class.

    • True – You need to stay consistent throughout the class.
    • True – You will confuse the class if you change styles.
    • False – Being flexible and varying your style will keep the learners engaged.
    • False – You can change it, but you have to end with the one you started with.

     

    Fill in the blank: Your goal as a trainer is to __________.

    • teach what you want to teach
    • have every student score 100% on the exam
    • have a meaningful impact on your students

     

    Fill in the blank: ____________ increase(s) the students’ confidence levels by guiding them toward the answers that will bring them closer to the learning objectives.

    • Question asking
    • Examples, metaphors, and analogies
    • Paraphrasing

     

    True or false? The learning environment can affect how well your students reach the learning objectives.

    • True
    • False

     

    True or false? Classroom management is the same for every class, no matter the size of the class or skill levels of the participants.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blank: During the ______ stage of the learning loop, learners describe how a new skill connects to the objective of the training session and to their job role.

    • recall
    • relate
    • resolve
    • remind

     

    True or false? During the recall stage of the learning loop, learners connect the key points to what they’ll need to accomplish after the training.

    • True
    • False

     

    In which stage of the learning loop would you ask questions that require participants to think about their experience?

    • recall
    • relate
    • resolve
    • remind

     

    Which of the following is the HubSpot Certified Trainer benchmark NPS score you should use?

    • 30 or higher
    • 45 or higher
    • 50 or higher
    • It depends on the training you’re giving

     

    True or false? NPS is calculated by subtracting the detractors percentage from the passives percentage.

    • True
    • False

     

    Imagine you surveyed 100 training attendees. If 10% were detractors, 30% were passives, and 60% were promoters, what would your NPS be?

    • 30
    • 40
    • 50
    • 60

     

    You’ve been conducting the same training for different groups of people during the past year. Your NPS dropped from 60 to 45 over the past few months. What should you do next?

    • Since your NPS has gone below 50, you should stop delivering this training right away and create a new one.
    • Since your NPS is still close to 50, don’t make any changes yet. Wait six more months and then see if the NPS is still dropping.
    • Since your NPS has been dropping over time, review participants’ qualitative feedback to identify opportunities to improve.
    • There isn’t enough data to make a good recommendation.

     

    Fill in the blank: ______________ are people who respond to the NPS with a score between 0 and 6.

    • Promoters
    • Passives
    • Detractors

     

    True or false? If you’re unsure how to price your training, offer it for free first. Then, you can survey your attendees and figure out a good price point.

    • True
    • False

     

    True or false? You should only offer training services to clients that are ready to sign a 12-month retainer.

    • True
    • False

     

    How does offering training services help your agency grow?

    • Training provides a new source of leads.
    • Training helps you demonstrate your experience in inbound and HubSpot and build trust with prospects.
    • Training helps close more retainer deals.
    • All of the above.

     

    True or false? You should articulate the value of your training so that price doesn’t become the determining factor of whether someone attends or not.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blank: Sending an email with a ____________ allows you to collect more information about your attendees prior to the training.

    • workshop assessment survey
    • post-training survey
    • checklist of things they should bring to the training
    • list of frequently asked questions

     

    True or false? If you’re charging for your training, include a refund policy and display this on the event page itself.

    • True
    • False

     

    True or false? Create a separate registration for each public-facing training you host so that you can set the right expectations for each training.

    • True
    • False

     

    Which of the following expectations should you set on your training registration page?

    • Length of the training
    • Price of the training
    • Location of the training
    • Intended audience
    • All of the above

     

    You’ve just completed an inbound marketing fundamentals training that was open to the public. How should you follow up?

    • A.) Send an email to thank attendees for coming and give them additional content that’s relevant to the session.
    • B.) Offer your non-attendees content that was used during the event. Tell them you’re sorry you missed them.
    • C.) Since this training was for the public and not an existing client, it’s best not to follow up with any emails. That will appear too pushy.
    • D.) A and B
    • E.) None of the above

     

    True or false? You should only send a post-training survey to workshops you conduct with your existing clients.

    • True — sending a survey after public-facing trainings will result in unnecessary feedback.
    • True — your clients are the one’s paying you more, so it’s only important to get their feedback.
    • False — it depends on the type of training whether sending a survey is worth it.
    • False — if you want to improve your training, you should always send a post-training survey, regardless of the audience.

     

    True or false? This training registration page includes all the information needed to set the right expectations for attendees.

    • True
    • False

     

    How would you improve this training registration page?

    • I wouldn’t change anything — it includes everything you need.
    • I would remove the information on “Who Should Attend?” You don’t want to limit the amount of people who could be interested in the training.
    • I would add the price of the training and where it’s located.

     

    Fill in the blank: Trainers who are skilled in ________ bring their personality to the training, using humor, personal anecdotes, and humility to relate to the participants and build trust.

    • humanity
    • aligning learners
    • vocal cadence
    • question asking

     

    All of the following are ways to accommodate visual learners, EXCEPT:

    • Using videos and graphics to support your training
    • Leaving space in workbooks to allow participants to take notes
    • Writing down important information on a whiteboard
    • Reading material aloud to participants

     

    True or false? Adult learners prefer training that focuses on real-life problems and tasks, as opposed to academic material.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blank: Clear communication and understanding leads to ___________.

    • happy students
    • students reaching the learning objectives
    • more students signing up for your future classes

     

    Fill in the blank: “Do you have any questions?” is an example of a ___________ question.

    • clarifying
    • open-ended
    • close-ended
    • classroom

     

    Fill in the blank: Most adults want to understand the _______ before making a decision.

    • why
    • what
    • how
    • when

     

    Fill in the blank: _______________ is a friendly, harmonious relationship; a relationship characterized by agreement, mutual understanding, or empathy that makes communication possible or easy.

    • Friendship
    • Professionalism
    • Communication
    • Rapport

     

    How should you use the HubSpot Certified Trainer resources during the develop phase?

    • Use the provided resources as the foundation for your training, but add your own examples, stories, and experience to the content.
    • Use the provided resources exactly as they are — don’t change anything.
    • Only use the provided resources if you don’t have any of your own original content.

     

    True or false? Preparing your content means only creating it.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blanks: As a trainer, your goal is to: _________, __________, and ____________.

    • teach, talk, train
    • inform, apply, inspire
    • engage, educate, empower

     

    True or false? The best way to prepare for your class is to memorize your presentation.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blank: In _______________ style, you’ll uses a mix of storytelling and straight delivery of information to inspire or inform the attendees of knowledge or a process.

    • presentation
    • facilitation
    • lecturing
    • reading

     

    Fill in the blank: ____________ help(s) your students relate abstract concepts to the learning objective.

    • Question asking
    • Examples, metaphors, and analogies
    • Paraphrasing

     

    Fill in the blank: In-person classroom trainings tend to be packaged as __________.

    • part of a retainer
    • a stand-alone offering
    • both stand-alone offerings and as part of a retainer

     

    True or false? In-person classroom trainings can help your agency generate new leads, since they can be open to the public.

    • True
    • False

     

    Which of the following factors impact the price of your training?

    • Your experience and expertise
    • Your expenses
    • Your attendees
    • All of the above

     

    True or false? In-person classroom trainings tend to have a larger audience and have less one-on-one interaction between the student and instructor than in-person workshop trainings.

    • True
    • False

     

    True or false? You should reach out to attendees who leave positive feedback to see if they would be willing to share a testimonial on your training.

    • True
    • False

     

    Sending your attendees an email that includes a list of things they can and cannot bring to the training, an agenda, and any workbooks they’ll need is an example of which type of pre-training email?

    • An email that creates excitement and sets expectations for your workshop.
    • An email that creates the educational space you’ll need.
    • An email that recaps the most important information.
    • An email that learns more about your attendees.

     

    Fill in the blank: ________ is a customer satisfaction benchmark that measures how likely your customers are to recommend you to a friend.

    • Learning loop
    • Net promoter score
    • Training quality score
    • Detractors

     

    True or false? To be proficient in delivery methods, successful trainers should identify one delivery style they are most confident in and rely solely on that method.

    • True
    • False

     

    Fill in the blank: Successful trainers use relatable ____________ to make it easy for participants to relate to abstract concepts.

    • question asking
    • analogies, examples, and metaphors
    • paraphrasing
    • body language

     

    Fill in the blank: ___________ helps you overcome your nerves and boosts your confidence.

    • Self-confidence
    • Being prepared
    • Years of experience
    • Improvising as you go

     

    Fill in the blank: You can use ____________ to understand and quickly internalize the students’ responses, which gives you the opportunity to bring points together.

    • question asking
    • examples, metaphors, and analogies
    • paraphrasing

     

    Fill in the blank: Based on the _________ of your class, your practice will be different.

    • length
    • format
    • size
    • day

     

    All of the following are guidelines to pricing your training, EXCEPT:

    • Offering an “introductory price” for new trainings
    • Offering an “early-bird” rate to encourage early registrants
    • Charge $50 to $200 per seat for a one- to three-hour live training
    • See what your competition is charging and charge less than that

     

    How would you improve the following learning objective? “After this course, students will know how to use social media.”

    • “After this course, students will know how to use social media better than before.”
    • “After this course, students will understand how to use social media.”
    • “After this course, students will be able to explain the steps for creating a social media strategy.”
    • I wouldn’t change this learning objective.

     

    Lesson 1: Training Fundamentals

    • Why are training skills important?
    • What are the 14 key training skills to master?
    • What do these training skills look like in practice?

    Lesson 2: Helping Adults Learn

    • What are the three different learning styles?
    • How can you accommodate each learning style?
    • What are the six adult learning principles?
    • How can you apply each learning principle into your training?
    • What motivates adult learners?
    • What are common barriers to learning for adult learners?
    • How can you help motivate adult learners?
    • What are the four elements of a training lesson for adult learners?

    Lesson 3: Becoming a Clear Communicator

    • Why is clear communication important for a learning experience?
    • What’s the difference between clear vs. unclear communication and its impact on learning?
    • What are clarity indicators?
    • How can you keep the class engaged?
    • What are the qualities of an effective communicator?
    • Why is body language important?
    • How should you use eye contact?
    • How should you use movement and stage presence?
    • What is rapport?
    • How do you build rapport with your learner?
    • What are the best practices for building rapport?

    Lesson 4: Building Effective Training
    • What is instructional design?
    • What is ADDIE and how does it help you build training?
    • What are the five phases of ADDIE?
    • What happens during each of these five phases of ADDIE?
    • How do you analyze learners?
    • What are the elements of a backwards plan?
    • Why is a backwards plan important?
    • What is the difference between a learning goal and a learning objective?
    • How do you write learning goals?
    • How do you write learning objectives?
    • How do you design learning activities?
    • How do you design learning assessments?
    • How do you develop a training session?
    • How do you assemble the right materials?
    • What are some strategies to test your content?
    • How should you edit your content?
    • What does a successful backwards plan look like?

    Lesson 5: Preparing for a Successful Training
    • Why is preparation important?
    • What is contagious in a learning environment?
    • What’s the difference between preparing your content vs. creating your content?
    • What’s your goal as a trainer during this preparation?
    • What content do you need to cover?
    • How will you present and what materials do you need?
    • What’s the difference between practice vs. memorizing?
    • How do questions and rapport go together?
    • What indicates your comfort with the topic?
    • What are the learning environment focal points?
    • What are the benefits of a pre-class questionnaire?
    • How does the classroom setup and seating arrangement impact the class?
    • What are the best practices to invite collaboration?

     

    Get certified in HubSpot Trainer Certification Now!

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Advanced Omnichannel Certificate Answers

    23 May, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Advanced Omnichannel Certificate Answers

    Advanced Omnichannel Certificate Answers

     

    Advanced Omnichannel Certificate Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    Question 1 of 30

     

    Which goal metric should your omnibiding efforts optimize towards?

    • Offline Sales
    • Online Sales
    • Omnichannel ROAS
    • Target CPA

     

    Question 2 of 30

     

    Which of these is not a benefit of omnichannel optimizations?

    • Evaluate and optimize omnichannel performance by including store visit conversions in Smart Bidding strategies
    • Driving only store footfall to help retailers make more sales for local marketing teams.
    • Understand which campaigns, keywords, and devices drive the most store visits to your business.
    • Understand the full impact of your return on investment (ROI) and make more informed decisions about your ad creatives, spend, bid strategies, and other elements of your campaigns.

     

    Question 3 of 30

     

    Please arrange these in order of occurrence – explaining how Store Visits Measurement works.

    • A customer is signed in to their Google account and opts into location history in their account settings. The customer finds an ad for your store and interacts with it.
    • The customer visits the store’s physical location.
    • We connect the customer’s visit to the store to engagements with your ad in a privacy-safe way. Store visits use anonymous, aggregated statistics which are then extrapolated to represent the broader population of your customers.
    • Google Ads creates modeled numbers by using current and past data on the number of customers who click or view your ads and later visit your store. You can then understand these results in your Google Ads reports for store visits.

    .

    Question 4 of 30

     

    What signals are used for calculating store visits data?

    • Advanced Machine Learning
    • Mapping Technology
    • Privacy
    • Survey Verification
    • All of These

     

    Question 5 of 30

     

    Store Sales data can show in your account automatically or with uploading directly.

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 6 of 30

     

    Which reports can you see with store sales reporting?

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Geo Report
    • Conversion Lag Report
    • User Receipts
    • Data Driven Attribution

     

    Question 7 of 30

     

    Store visits measurement is available for video

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 8 of 30

     

    Omnibiding has no learning period and should show immediate results

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 9 of 30

     

    Store visit value can be calculated considering in-store purchase rate and average order value

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 10 of 30

     

    Omnichannel bidding relies on smart bidding

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 11 of 30

     

    Omnichannel bidding is not compatible with Store Sales.

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 12 of 30

     

    What is not an eligibility criteria for Store Sales?

    • The Conversion with Cart data tag needs to be implemented.
    • Must have a Business Profile (formerly Google My Business) linked and using Location Extensions
    • Min 300k store visits to receive automatic stores sales over the last 90 days
    • Min 500k search/shopping clicks to upload data for dynamic store sales values over the last 90 days

     

    Question 13 of 30

     

    Store pickup is also available with Google Hosted Local Store Front

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 14 of 30

     

    What are the 2 options available to understand the total store sales value driven by your campaigns?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Select “non ecommerce” goals in the conversion column
    • Have customers manually upload their receipts
    • Set a default static value for every store sale recorded
    • Upload your dynamic store sales data

     

    Question 15 of 30

     

    To enable ‘Pickup later’, my retailer has to first onboard and activate Local Inventory Ads.

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 16 of 30

     

    What is the recommended campaign set up for Local Inventory Ads?

    • Keeping Online and In-Store inventory advertised in separate campaigns (Local only campaigns)
    • Keeping Online and In-Store inventory in the same campaign (hybrid campaign)
    • Keeping Online and In-store inventory advertised in separate accounts
    • Keeping Online and In-Store inventory advertised in either same or separate campaigns

     

    Question 17 of 30

     

    Local Inventory is compatible with which campaign type(s)?

    • Regular shopping ads
    • Smart Shopping Campaign
    • Performance Max
    • All of the above

     

    Question 18 of 30

     

    Which of the following is not an example of when a Local Inventory Ad is more likely to serve?

    • When the user is close to a store with available inventory
    • Based on the frequency of the query
    • On mobile devices
    • When the user’s query demonstrates local intent

     

    Question 19 of 30

     

    Merchant Center is one of the three accounts needed to activate Local Inventory Feeds?

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 20 of 30

     

    Local campaigns are the first-ever Google ads campaign type specifically designed to optimize store visits?

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 21 of 30

     

    Local campaigns is upgrading to what conversion goal in Performance Max?

    • Lead generation
    • Store visits
    • Store goals
    • Online

     

    Question 22 of 30

     

    Performance Max for store goals supports all of the following strategies except for?

    • Driving visits through product showcasing
    • Store pick up
    • Maximizing traffic for all locations
    • Supporting specific locations

     

    Question 23 of 30

     

    Local campaigns/ Performance Max for store goals allows an advertiser to show their ads across which of the following Google properties?

    Select 4 Correct Responses

    • YouTube
    • Display
    • Gmail
    • Search

     

    Question 24 of 30

     

    What is the ideal length of time for long-term success of a Local campaign and/or Performance Max campaign?

    • 30 days
    • 15 days
    • 1 week
    • 3 months

     

    Question 25 of 30

     

    Performance Max for store goals has feature parity with Local campaigns?

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 26 of 30

     

    What are Audience Signals?

    • A fully automated solution from end-to-end to optimize your bids, creatives, and ad placements to increase visits to your client’s stores.
    • A new feature in Performance Max for store goals that uses machine learning to reach an advertiser’s most valuable audiences.
    • Promotes the proximity of a store and stock availability on Shopping ads to drive traffic to stores.
    • A solution for measuring and driving offline sales.

     

    Question 27 of 30

     

    Which of these can help you measure online to offline?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Clicks to Store
    • Store Visits
    • Store Sales Improvement
    • Omnibidding

     

    Question 28 of 30

     

    You need to set up Google Business Profile Locations to utilize offline measurement and ad solutions

    • True
    • False

     

    Question 29 of 30

     

    What is the key strategy Performance Max for store goals supports?

    • Maximizing traffic for all locations
    • Driving visits through product showcasing
    • Supporting specific locations
    • All of These

     

    Question 30 of 30

     

    What informs the Store Sales Improvement model?

    Select 3 Correct Responses

    • Customer Receipt Uploads
    • Store Visits
    • eReceipt Data
    • Survey Data

     

    Advanced Omnichannel Certificate Answers

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Google Cloud Sales Credentials Answers

    23 May, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Google Cloud Sales Credentials Answers

    Google Cloud Sales Credentials Answers

    This assessment consists of 19 questions. To pass the assessment, you must get at least 16 out of 19 questions (more than 80% ) correct.

     

    Google Cloud Sales Credentials Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    What is the mission of Google Cloud?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Global scale, distributed security infrastructure
    • Organize your information and supercharge it for you
    • Higher availability and lower latency

     

    What does “Identifying the objective of customer’s business needs” mean?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Identifying groups of products and services designed to solve customer’s business issues
    • Identifying the highest-level outcome that a customer desires to achieve to address a business issue
    • Identifying specific business issues that can be addressed with Google Cloud services and related products

     

    True or false? Google Cloud Professional Services provides a business-focused solution for Chrome browsers, Chrome OS, and Chrome devices.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • False
    • True

     

    Which of the following options is NOT a key differentiator of Google Cloud versus its competitors?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Best-in-Class Security
    • Best of Google
    • Aggressive pricing
    • Embedded, Artificial Intelligence AI/Machine Learning (ML)
    • Hybrid and Multi-Cloud

     

    True or false? Investing in the differentiation journey will enable you to increase business impact, showcase success, and boost visibility.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • True
    • False

      

    You are in a sales team meeting with a company whose information technology (IT) department is not very familiar with what is cloud technology. What is the best way to describe cloud technology to the customer?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Cloud technology is all of the technology and processes needed to store, manage, and access data running programs that are transferred to the cloud.
    • Cloud technology is where the company stores its data and files.
    • Cloud technology occurs when a company shifts to virtual machines.
    • Cloud technology is the process of migrating a company from on-premises to a data center.

     

    Now that the company understands cloud technology a bit more, they want to know what value Google Cloud provides to companies. What is the best messaging to provide to the customer around Google Cloud?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Google Cloud helps companies transform by providing products and solutions designed to address a company’s business challenges.
    • Google Cloud consists of products and services like Gmail that companies use to transform.
    • Google Cloud has data centers all around the world and provides a secure private network.
    • Google Cloud is a Platform as a Service.

     

    Scenario: Bright1980 (a fictitious company) is a large enterprise retail company that sells trendy clothing to a target audience of 24- to 45-year-olds. The company’s contract with another cloud provider is up for renewal in six months. After qualifying the customer and conducting research about the industry and company, you meet with a few executives from Bright.  After sharing the insights you’ve gathered from your research on their industry, company, and current cloud provider situation. Which of the following approaches is the best way to begin to identify the appropriate solution for the customer?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Ask the customer about their current cloud provider situation and ask the customer to speak more about their level of satisfaction with the other cloud provider.
    • Ask the customer to tell you more about their business needs and objectives.
    • Tell the customer how Google Cloud solutions can help their business.
    • Tell the customer all about cloud technology and Google Cloud.

     

    When analyzing a customer’s business needs, which of the following approaches should be used?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Analyze the business needs against a solution and use case.
    • Analyze the business needs against Google’s differentiators.
    • Analyze the business needs against a product.
    • Analyze the business needs against a priority service.

     

    The Bright1980 executives asked for a high-level overview of some of the main products and services that Google Cloud offers. 

    Description: The products and solutions offered can help companies modernize their infrastructure, develop new applications to transform customer experiences, manage data at scale to build new capabilities, and generate insights from data with smart analytics so that they can digitally transform, innovate, and drive their business even further.

    Which of the following products and services aligns with the description mentioned?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Google Cloud
    • Google Cloud Professional Services
    • Google Workspace
    • Chrome Enterprise

     

    Description: Reimagine how businesses work by powering teams to be faster, smarter, and more collaborative than ever before. A cloud-native solution that delivers seamless, real-time collaboration, powerful search, and proactive security tools using the scale of signals that Google sees every day.

    Which of the following products and services aligns with the description mentioned?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Google Workspace
    • Google Cloud Partners
    • Chrome Enterprise
    • Google Cloud

     

    Description: A business-focused solution that enables people to work securely in the cloud, getting them up and running quickly with the flexibility to work from anywhere. It is secure by design and offers cloud-based management tools, integration with third-party products, and 24/7 support for IT administrators.

    Which of the following products and services aligns with the description mentioned?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Google Cloud
    • Google Cloud Professional Services
    • Google Workspace
    • Chrome Enterprise

     

    Description: Helps customers and partners get the most out of Google products. They offer service lines such as consulting services, Technical Account Management, and training and certification to ensure that company staff are brought up to speed quickly with the latest knowledge on Google products.

    Which of the following products and services aligns with the description mentioned?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Google Cloud Partners
    • Google Cloud Professional Services
    • Google Cloud
    • Google Workspace

     

    Description: Thousands of trusted, experienced experts covering a wide range of specialties, industries, workloads, and solution pillars. Helps Google Cloud customers innovate faster, scale smarter, and stay secure.

    Which of the following products and services aligns with the description mentioned?

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Google Cloud
    • Google Cloud Professional Services
    • Google Cloud Partners
    • Google Workspace

     

    Proofpoint: BigQuery automatically scales to thousands of cores in seconds. AWS and Azure need manual configuration.

    Identify which key differentiator the proof point aligns with.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Best-in-class Security
    • Best of Google Cloud
    • Fully Managed No Operations
    • Hybrid and Multi Cloud

     

    Proofpoint: Our focus on transformation poses exciting opportunities to evolve business productivity and collaboration, allowing employees to accomplish more.

    Identify which key differentiator the proof point aligns with.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Best of Google Cloud
    • Embedded Artificial Intelligence / Machine Learning
    • Fully Managed No Operations
    • Hybrid and Multi Cloud

     

    Proofpoint: AutoML and BigQuery ML enable teams without data, scientists to use AI/ML with capabilities not offered by competitors.

    Identify which key differentiator the proof point aligns with.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Hybrid and Multi Cloud
    • Fully Managed No Operations
    • Best-in-class Security
    • Embedded Artificial Intelligence / Machine Learning

     

    Proofpoint: Only Anthos enables application deployment and management on-premises and across clouds, with 100% software solution and no hardware lock-in.

    Identify which key differentiator the proof point aligns with.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Best of Google
    • Best-in-class Security
    • Hybrid and Multi Cloud
    • Embedded Artificial Intelligence / Machine Learning

     

    Modigo asks you why Google Cloud would be the best choice for transforming their business. As you start to mention Google Cloud differentiators, you realize you should remember to back up each differentiator with a proof point. 

    Proofpoint: One of the largest privately managed networks, minimizing risk of customers being exposed to the public internet.

    Identify which key differentiator the proof point aligns with.

    Select the correct option, and then click Submit.

    • Best of Google Cloud
    • Best-in-class Security
    • Hybrid and Multi Cloud
    • Fully Managed No Operations

     

    Google Cloud Sales Credentials Answers

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Google Measurement Certification Exam Answers 2025 – Updated

    2 May, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Google Ads Measurement Certification Exam Answer 2025

    Google Measurement Certification Exam Answers

     

    • The Google Ads Measurement assessment consists of 50 questions and you have 75 minutes to complete.
    • You will need a score of 80% or higher to pass

    Measurement is one of the new exams added after the latest Google Ads update (Skillshop). During the exam you get 50 questions randomly from 150 possible questions pool.

     

    Get Certified in Measurement Certification NOW!!!

     

    Questions:

     

    To describe enhanced conversions for leads, what would you say?

    • You’d say it requires Google Click Identifier (GCLID) storage.
    • You’d say it uses third-party data.
    • You’d say it uses hashed, first-party data.
    • You’d say it requires customer relationship management (CRM) system modification.

     

    How would a digital marketing consultant describe the Google tag to a new advertiser?

    • It’s a tag snippet for Google Shopping that’s needed for tracking.
    • It’s a JavaScript framework, also known as gtag.js.
    • It will replace Tag Manager, which has less accurate data.
    • It’s used to deploy and modify both Google and third-party tags.

     

    ===

     

    How would you describe attribution as it relates to the advertising industry?

    • Attribution determines the cost of each asset used in a marketing campaign.
    • Attribution determines how much credit each step of a process should receive.
    • Attribution determines how much credit to award a client for their referral.
    • Attribution determines how much cost each channel requires.

     

    To determine how well your Google Ads account is set to perform, what estimate would you use?

    • You’d use quality score.
    • You’d use attribution score.
    • You’d use optimization score.
    • You’d use recommendation score.

     

    A marketing manager set up conversion tracking and wants to add a column for conversion value per cost. How is that calculated?

    • It’s calculated by dividing the number in the conversions column by the total eligible interactions.
    • It’s calculated by dividing the total cost by the number in the conversions column.
    • It’s calculated by dividing the total conversion value by the total cost of all ad interactions.
    • It’s calculated by dividing the total conversion value by the number in the conversions column.

     

    In what way are incrementality experiments different from A/B experiments?

    • Incrementality experiments typically require a smaller sample size and less sophisticated statistical analysis.
    • Incrementality experiments determine the impact of ads on a consumer’s decision to convert or not.
    • Incrementality experiments measure the relative effectiveness of different versions of a marketing campaign.
    • Incrementality experiments both require a holdback group to determine which version of an ad performs better.

     

    You’re using Google Analytics 4. What would it call interactions on a website or an app?

    • Goal
    • Conversion
    • Incident
    • Event

     

    How does experimentation contribute to a best-in-class measurement approach?

    • Experiments are a way to validate and test insights.
    • Experiments are used to drive a macro budget strategy.
    • Experiments help assign credit across touchpoints.
    • Experiments assist in the collection of multiple data points.

     

    How can an advertiser set up enhanced conversions for web?

    • Enhanced conversions for web can be set up through Google Analytics Manager.
    • Enhanced conversions for web can be set up through Google Tag Assistant.
    • Enhanced conversions for web can be set up through Google Tag Manager, Google tag, or Google Ads API.
    • Enhanced conversions for web can be set up through the Google Ads API for enhanced conversions.

     

    If you’re analyzing the conversion data of your Search Ads campaign in Google Ads in order to see how changes in the attribution model might impact conversion reporting, what report would you use to get that information?

    • You’d use the conversions report.
    • You’d use the click analysis report.
    • You’d use the attribution report.
    • You’d use the campaigns report.

     

    Enhanced conversions for leads can be described in which way?

    • It requires Google Click Identifier (GCLID) storage.
    • It uses uses third-party data.
    • It uses hashed, first-party data.
    • It requires customer relationship management (CRM) system modification.

     

    Why might you want to import Google Analytics conversions to Google Ads?

    • To provide Google Ads access to data that helps optimize bids
    • To view historical data from before the import
    • To let first-party data be sent from websites
    • To link accounts in Google Analytics without auto-tagging

     

    Advertisers can benefit from the power of Google’s AI in what way?

    • Google’s AI replaces the need for analytics solutions.
    • Google’s AI can minimize marketing insights.
    • Google’s AI reduces the volume of search conversions.
    • Google’s AI can optimize performance in real time.

     

    If you need to pick the two types of optimization, which ones would you choose? Choose two.

    • Targeting optimization
    • Channel optimization
    • Bidding optimization
    • Media mix optimization

     

    To describe Google Tag Manager, what two capabilities would you choose? Choose two.

    • You’d say it can only be used to deploy and modify third-party tags.
    • You’d say it has collaboration and versioning capabilities.
    • You’d say it’s a JavaScript framework that’s used to add Google tags directly to web pages.
    • You’d say it allows you to quickly and easily update tags on your website or mobile app from a web interface.

     

    What keyword match type gives Smart Bidding the most data and flexibility to compete in the right auctions?

    • Broad match
    • Phrase match
    • Negative match
    • Exact match

     

    Which of the following describes the criteria for store visits conversion tracking?

    • Store visits conversion tracking is available for all business types, but only in certain countries.
    • Store visits conversion tracking is available in all countries and regions as long as it’s not a sensitive business type or account.
    • Store visits conversion tracking has no mininum impression or click requirements.
    • Store visits conversion tracking requires sufficient data to accurately report store visits and pass Google’s privacy thresholds.

     

    Why might there be a difference in the conversion date between Google Ads and Google Analytics?

    • There might be a difference because Google Analytics can’t attribute conversions to a date for an impressioin, whereas Google Ads can.
    • There might be a difference because Google Analytics attributes conversions to the date of the impression that caused the conversion.
    • There might be a difference because Google Analytics attributes conversions to the day they happen, not to the date of the impression that caused the conversion.
    • There might be a difference because Google Ads attributes conversions to the day they happen, not to the date of the click that caused the conversion.

     

    What’s the definition of a tag, as it pertains to digital advertising?

    • A tag is a large snippet of code that’s placed on the conversion page of a website.
    • A tag is a small snippet of code that’s placed on the conversion page of a website.
    • A tag is a large snippet of code that’s placed on the home page of a website.
    • A tag is a small snippet of code that’s placed on every page of a website.

     

    In terms of advertising, what’s attribution?

    • Determining the cost of each asset used in a marketing campaign
    • Determining how much cost each channel requires
    • Determining how much credit to award a client for their referral
    • Determining how much credit each step of a process should receive

     

    What are three factors that influence conversion volume, along with conversion delay? Choose three.

    • Changes to attribution model
    • Changes to discrepancy model
    • Changes in competition or seasonality
    • Changes to default browser
    • Changes to ads

     

    What’s the correct way to set up enhanced conversions for web?

    • Through the Google Ads API for enhanced conversions
    • Through Google Tag Assistant
    • Through Google Analytics Manager
    • Through Google Tag Manager, Google tag, or Google Ads API

     

    A potential customer is expressing interest in buying a new car. How would you know if this customer is in the awareness stage of their car-buying journey?

    • You’d know because they filled out an email subscription form.
    • You’d know because they called to ask about a test-drive.
    • You’d know because they viewed an online advertisement for a car.
    • You’d know because they recommended the car on social media.

     

    Incrementality experiments differ from A/B experiments in what way?

    • By determining the impact of ads on a consumer’s decision to convert or not convert.
    • By measuring the relative effectiveness of different versions of a marketing campaign.
    • By both requiring a holdback group to determine which version of an ad performs better.
    • By typically requiring a smaller sample size and less sophisticated statistical analysis.

     

    Which of the following is an estimate of how well your Google Ads account is set to perform?

    • Optimization score
    • Attribution score
    • Recommendation score
    • Quality score

     

    To implement sitewide tagging, what do you have to do?

    • You have to turn off auto-tagging in all your Google Ads accounts that are enabled for sitewide tagging.
    • You have to make sure Google Click Identifier (GCLID) still works if using click trackers in the URL.
    • You have to use just the image portion of the JavaScript.
    • You have to make sure the tag still works by loading it within another tracking tag, like Floodlight.

     

    You want to advertise your website with Google Ads, and you’re thinking of using one of Google’s Smart Bidding strategies. Which of the following is a Smart Bidding strategy?

    • Enhanced impressions
    • Target CPA
    • Viewable CPM
    • Manual CPC

     

    What does it mean when ad campaigns are optimized by Google’s AI?

    • They use AI and machine learning technology to predict what will achieve the best conversion outcomes to optimize bidding, creative, etc.
    • They use basic tasks, then software, to automate those tasks, and the process has all the necessary data.
    • They use rules-based attribution and software to achieve desired AI-friendly outcomes to influence the process and avoid optimizing for those outcomes.
    • They use data-driven attribution to automate tasks., and the process has all the necessary data.

     

    Maximize Conversion can be described in which of the following ways?

    • Maximize Conversions aims to achieve an average return on ad spend (ROAS) equal to a desired target.
    • Maximize Conversions is the safest bidding strategy for all business types to optimize their bidding.
    • Maximize Conversions uses machine learning to capture as many conversions as possible within a daily budget.
    • Maximize Conversions automatically limits conversions that don’t align with a desired bidding strategy.

     

    How would you describe the process by which data-driven attribution works?

    • Data-driven attribution credits on an arbitrary basis and may impact optimizations, particularly when leveraging automated bidding data.
    • Data-driven attribution uses country- or region-specific data to credit several consistent ad touchpoints across the Search network, specifically.
    • Data-driven attribution prioritizes specific touchpoints and applies static logic to assign a constant value to a touchpoint along a conversion path.
    • Data-driven attribution leverages an account’s historical data to credit the most impactful ad touchpoints across Search, YouTube, and Display.

     

    A marketing manager is closely monitoring their data to see how effectively their ads are driving online sales and generating leads through sign-ups. When the marketing manager compares Google Ads data with their offline data, they see a difference in the number of sign-ups in Google Ads vs. their offline data source. Assuming everything is working as intended and the issue lies with when a conversion was counted, what’s likely causing this data discrepancy?

    • Google Ads reports conversions against the date/time of the click that led to the conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the date/time of the conversion itself.
    • Google Ads reports conversions against a unique ID of the event that led to the click. Depending on the other data source, it might use the click of the conversion itself.
    • Google Ads reports views against the device type of the view that didn’t lead to a conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the date/time of the conversion itself.
    • Google Ads reports clicks against the date/time of the event that led to the conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the click of the conversion itself.

     

    A marketer added a conversion tracking tag to a landing page on their company’s website. When analyzing purchasing data, they found duplicate conversions. How can the marketer remove duplicate conversions from their conversion count?

    • They can sort the data by time and remove duplicate times found on entries.
    • They can toggle off the possible duplicates option at the top of the chart.
    • They can modify the event tag to capture a unique order ID.
    • They can disable the view-through conversion data column.

     

    How would you describe a campaign that fell short of its target goal?

    • As a video campaign that had an expected brand favorability lift of 5% and an actual brand favorability lift of 5%.
    • As an email remarketing campaign that had an expected lift in brand awareness of 5% and an actual lift in brand awareness of 12%
    • As a search campaign that had an expected increase in return on ad spend of $50.12 and an actual return on ad spend of $10.
    • As a display campaign that had an expected brand awareness lift of 10% and an actual brand awareness lift of 20%.

     

    A marketer wants to analyze the return on investment (ROI) for media. Besides attribution, what method should they use?

    • They should use conversion lift.
    • They should use Smart Bidding.
    • They should use a marketing mix model.
    • They should use viewable CPM.

     

    After implementing conversion tracking for their website, a marketing manager is looking at the campaign report in their Google Ads account. They see that at least two of their ads got over 100 view-through conversions. What action could be called a view-through conversion?

    • One that’s done in-store only and doesn’t require the customer to have interacted with your ad.
    • One in which a customer sees and interacts with the marketing manager’s ad, but then doesn’t complete a conversion on their site.
    • One in which a customer sees but doesn’t interact with the marketing manager’s ad, and then later completes a conversion on their site.
    • One in which there are only conversions from browsers that don’t allow cross-site cookies.

     

    To learn how often an ad click or other ad interaction leads to a conversion, on average, what metric would you use?

    • You’d use conversion value-per-click.
    • You’d use conversion value-per-cost.
    • You’d use conversion rate.
    • You’d use cost-per-conversion.

     

    You’re an advertiser at a large agency, and you want to know how marketing mix models work. Which of the following descriptions explains what marketing mix models do?

    • Marketing mix models evaluate a customer’s long-term marketing value to provide a more accurate view of performance.
    • Marketing mix models are a way to determine the impact of a specific variable on control and treatment groups.
    • Marketing mix models use conversion data to calculate the contribution of each interaction across the conversion path.
    • Marketing mix models are an analysis that shows the impact of marketing on a brand’s sales.

     

    What platform uses event-based data instead of session-based data?

    • Google Ads Conversion Tracking
    • Universal Analytics
    • Google Analytics Classic
    • Google Analytics 4

     

    Which of the following is the first step in setting up conversion tracking?

    • Modify the tag for your website or app after requesting it from your web administrator.
    • Add a conversion tracking tag to your website or app after modifying it in Google Ads.
    • Request a snippet of code from your web administrator and add it to your website for everyone you want to track.
    • Set up a conversion action in Google Ads to measure what you consider to be valuable consumer actions.

     

    If you’re a digital marketing consultant, how would you describe the Google tag to your new advertiser?

    • You’d describe it as a tag snippet for Google Shopping that’s needed for tracking.
    • You’d describe it as a JavaScript framework, also known as gtag.js.
    • You’d describe it as what will replace Tag Manager, which has less accurate data.
    • You’d describe it as being used to deploy and modify both Google and third-party tags.

     

    A marketing analyst is analyzing the conversion data of their Search Ads campaign in Google Ads. They want to see how changes to their attribution model might impact conversion reporting. What report will provide them with that information?

    • The attribution report
    • The conversions report
    • The campaigns report
    • The click analysis report

     

    In what two ways can the Recommendations page in your Google Ads account help with campaign performance? Choose two.

    • It can help maximize your budget by improving bidding and keywords.
    • It can increase your budget if you select to auto apply to recommendations.
    • It can introduce you to new features and trends across Google.
    • It can increase the amount of time and effort spent on optimizing campaigns.

     

    How should marketers evaluate their campaigns?

    • Use lifetime value analysis to examine the impact to brand lift metrics.
    • Focus on the worst-performing ads and reduce the frequency of that ad, then reevaluate.
    • Check whether the result of a specific objective exceeded or fell short of its goal.
    • Check whether all the budget was used for the campaign or not.

     

    A business owner is getting a good amount of traffic from their ads but not enough conversions. What action can they take to improve their conversion rate?

    • Turn off the ads to stop traffic.
    • Reduce campaign budgets.
    • Use more general keywords.
    • Add more negative keywords.

     

    A marketing manager wants to implement the enhanced cost-per-click (ECPC) bidding strategy. How might their agency describe this strategy?

    • It might look at ad auctions, then raise a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • It might look at a listed target return on investment (ROI), then lower a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • It might look at a listed target return on investment (ROI), then raise a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • It might look at ad auctions, then lower a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.

     

    For what reason might an advertiser opt to use enhanced conversions for leads?

    • Because enhanced conversions for leads can improve the measurement of online conversions.
    • Because enhanced conversions for leads can use third-party data to improve their offline lead measurement.
    • Because enhanced conversions for leads can track sales that happen off a website from website leads.
    • Because enhanced conversions for leads can track sales and events that happen on a website.

     

    In what way do view-through conversions get counted?

    • They get counted as conversions that are recorded when users view and interact with an ad, then never convert.
    • They get counted as conversions that are recorded when new users view and interact with an ad, then later convert.
    • They get counted as conversions that are recorded when repeat users view but don’t interact with an ad, then later convert.
    • They get counted as conversions that are recorded when users view but don’t interact with an ad, then later convert.

     

    Which of the following terms can be used to describe the amount of times a unique user will see an ad over a certain time period?

    • Reach
    • Engagement rate
    • Frequency
    • Impression

     

    Enhanced conversions for web can benefit a marketing strategist in what way?

    • By using third-party data to improve the accuracy of your conversion measurement
    • By using hashed, first-party data to unlock more powerful bidding
    • By using Google Analytics to unlock more powerful bidding
    • By using third-party data to unlock more powerful bidding

     

    How would you describe the target ROAS bidding strategy?

    • It determines that if a user’s search is likely to generate a conversion with high value, target ROAS will bid low on that search.
    • It uses historical and uploaded data to set the value of a conversion every time a user searches for products or services that are being advertised. Then it automatically adjusts bids for these ads to maximize return.
    • It determines that if a user’s search is likely to generate a conversion with low value, target ROAS will bid high on that search.
    • It analyzes and intelligently predicts the value of a potential conversion every time a user searches for products or services that are being advertised. Then it automatically adjusts bids for these searches to maximize return.

     

    A marketer wants to track product newsletter sign-ups on their website. What type of conversion action would this be?

    • Pageview
    • Purchase
    • Lead
    • App installs

     

    If an advertiser uses Google’s phone call conversion tracking feature, how are the calls tracked to their account?

    • The calls are tracked by the conversion name for the advertiser’s store.
    • The calls are tracked by a dynamically created Google forwarding number.
    • The calls are tracked by the phone number listed on the advertiser’s official store website.
    • The calls are tracked by the assigned Google Click Identifier (GCLID) set up in the advertiser’s account.

     

    A hungry customer is searching for a place to eat in Florence, Italy, where you happen to own a restaurant called Ristorante Abigaille. The customer performs each of these searches: “restaurant tuscany,” “restaurant florence,” “3 star restaurant florence,” and “3 star restaurant abigaille florence,” then finds your site by clicking on your ads. They make a reservation after selecting your ad that appeared following the “3 star restaurant abigaille florence” search. What keyword would receive credit for this conversion, if using the data-driven attribution model?

    • Each keyword would receive equal credit (i.e., 25% each) for the conversion, because the conversion would be attributed to each keyword equally.
    • The first keyword would receive 100% of the credit for the conversion, because the first keyword would be attributed with the conversion.
    • Each keyword would receive credit for how much it contributed to the conversion, because the conversion would be attributed to each keyword proportionally.
    • The last keyword would receive 100% of the credit for the conversion, because the last keyword would be attributed with the conversion.

     

    How would you turn marketing insights into action?

    • By shifting budgets from well-performing channels to underperforming channels.
    • By increasing the frequency of underperforming ad creatives.
    • By focusing on the right audience for the message shared in that stage of the buying journey.
    • By increasing investment in an underperforming channel.

     

    In setting up the value of an online conversion action, what should you do?

    • Regardless of the value of the lead, always set it as $0.
    • Regardless of the value of the lead, always set it as $1.
    • If the average value of a lead is $20, assign the value as $20.
    • If the average value of a lead is $20, assign the value as $200.

     

    In what way does experimentation help achieve a best-in-class measurement approach?

    • By assisting in the collection of multiple data points
    • By providing a way to validate and test insights
    • By driving a macro budget strategy
    • By helping assign credit across touchpoints

     

    What does Google Analytics 4 refer to as interactions on a website or app?

    • Goal
    • Incident
    • Conversion
    • Event

     

    What report can help show the duration between a user’s first exposure and their subsequent conversion?

    • The navigation report
    • The seasonality report
    • The time lag report
    • The change history report

     

    If you wanted to help an online store owner complete the implementation of conversion tracking tags into their website, how could Tag Assistant help you get that job done?

    • Tag Assistant could automatically create tag code snippets.
    • Tag Assistant could troubleshoot unverified conversion actions.
    • Tag Assistant could tell you which Google Analytics reports are incorrect.
    • Tag Assistant could create the Google Click Identifier tag (GCLID).

     

    If you want to add a column for conversion value per cost after setting up conversion tracking, how does that get calculated?

    • By dividing the total conversion value by the total cost of all ad interactions
    • By dividing the number in the conversions column by the total eligible interactions
    • By dividing the total conversion value by the number in the conversions column
    • By dividing the total cost by the number in the conversions column

     

    To turn marketing insights into action, what action should you take?

    • You should increase the frequency of underperforming ad creatives.
    • You should increase investment in an underperforming channel.
    • You should focus on the right audience for the message shared in that stage of the buying journey.
    • You should shift budgets from well-performing channels to underperforming channels.

     

    Why might an advertiser use enhanced conversions for leads?

    • To track sales and events that happen on a website
    • To track sales that happen off a website from website leads
    • To use third-party data to improve their offline lead measurement
    • To improve the measurement of online conversions

     

    If you want to know the duration between a user’s first exposure and their subsequent conversion, what report do you need?

    • You need the navigation report.
    • You need the seasonality report.
    • You need the time lag report.
    • You need the change history report.

     

    What’s the definition of a Google tag, as described to a new advertiser by a digital marketing consultant?

    • A Google tag will replace Tag Manager, which has less accurate data.
    • A Google tag is used to deploy and modify both Google and third-party tags.
    • A Google tag is a tag snippet for Google Shopping that’s needed for tracking.
    • A Google tag is a JavaScript framework, also known as gtag.js.

     

    How can the power of Google’s AI help advertisers?

    • It replaces the need for analytics solutions.
    • It can minimize marketing insights.
    • It reduces the volume of search conversions.
    • It can optimize performance in real time.

     

    You’re a marketer looking to track product newsletter sing-ups on your website. What type of conversion action should you use?

    • You should use lead.
    • You should use pageview.
    • You should use app installs.
    • You should use purchase.

     

    How does the enhanced cost-per-click (ECPC) bidding strategy work?

    • ECPC looks at a listed target return on investment (ROI), then lowers a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • ECPC looks at ad auctions, then raises a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • ECPC looks at ad auctions, then lowers a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • ECPC looks at a listed target return on investment (ROI), then raises a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.

     

    If a customer wants to buy a new car, what activity might suggest that they’re in the awareness phase of the car-buying process?

    • If they call to ask about a test-drive
    • If they fill out an email subscription form
    • If they recommend the car on social media
    • If they view an online advertisement for a car

     

    Before a marketer can implement sitewide tagging, what’s the first thing they should do?

    • They should us just the image portion of the JavaScript.
    • They should turn off auto-tagging in all your Google Ads accounts that are enabled for sitewide tagging.
    • They should make sure Google Click Identifier (GCLID) still works if using click trackers in the URL.
    • They should make sure the tag still works by loading it within another tracking tag, like Floodlight.

     

    Which of the following is an example of a Smart Bidding strategy?

    • Manual CPC
    • Enhanced impressions
    • Target CPA
    • Viewable CPM

     

    What are two benefits of using the Recommendations page in a Google Ads account to help with campaign performance? Choose two.

    • The Recommendations page can introduce you to new features and trends across Google.
    • The Recommendations page can increase your budget if you select to auto apply to recommendations.
    • The Recommendations page can help maximize your budget by improving bidding and keywords.
    • The Recommendations page can increase the amount of time and effort spent on optimizing campaigns.

     

    To set up conversion tracking, what should you do first?

    • First, add a conversion tracking tag to your website or app after modifying it in Google Ads.
    • First, modify the tag for your website or app after requesting it from your web administrator.
    • First, set up a conversion action in Google Ads to measure what you consider to be valuable consumer actions.
    • First, request a snippet of code from your web administrator and add it to your website for everyone you want to track.

     

    How might Tag Assistant help you complete the implementation of conversion tracking tags into a website?

    • By automatically creating tag code snippets
    • By troubleshooting unverified conversion actions
    • By telling you which Google Analytics reports are incorrect
    • By creating the Google Click Identifier tag (GCLID)

     

    You imported Google Analytics conversions to Google Ads. What’s a benefit of that action?

    • Letting first-party data be sent from websites
    • Linking accounts in Google Analytics without auto-tagging
    • Providing Google Ads access to data that helps optimize bids
    • Viewing historical data from before the import

     

    What are two capabilities of Google Tag Manager? Choose two.

    • It allows you to quickly and easily update tags on your website or mobile app from a web interface.
    • It can only be used to deploy and modify third-party tags.
    • It has collaboration and versioning capabilities.
    • It’s a JavaScript framework that’s used to add Google tags directly to web pages.

     

    If a conversion tracking tag gets added to a landing page of a website and then produces duplicate conversions, what action should be taken to remove those duplicate conversions from the conversion count?

    • Modify the event tag to capture a unique order ID.
    • Toggle off the possible duplicates option at the top of the chart.
    • Disable the view-through conversion data column.
    • Sort the data by time and remove duplicate times found on entries.

     

    If a unique user sees an ad over a given time period, what term can be used to describe the number of times that user saw the ad?

    • Engagement rate
    • Reach
    • Impression
    • Frequency

     

    If you’re a marketer setting up the value of an online conversion action, what would you do?

    • Regardless of the value of the lead, you’d always set it as $0.
    • If the average value of a lead is $20, you’d assign the value as $200.
    • Regardless of the value of the lead, you’d always set it as $1.
    • If the average value of a lead is $20, you’d assign the value as $20.

     

    What could you do to improve your conversion rate if you’re getting a good amount of traffic from your ads but not enough conversions?

    • You could turn off the ads to stop traffic.
    • You could use more general keywords.
    • You could reduce campaign budgets.
    • You could add more negative keywords.

     

    Which of the following can be used to describe enhanced conversions for leads?

    • Uses third-party data
    • Requires Google Click Identifier (GCLID) storage
    • Requires customer relationship management (CRM) system modification.
    • Uses hashed, first-party data

     

    What method can be used to analyze the return on investment (ROI) for media, apart from attribution?

    • Conversion lift can be used.
    • Viewable CPM can be used.
    • Smart Bidding can be used.
    • Marketing mix model can be used.

     

    In what way does Google’s phone call conversion tracking feature track calls to an advertiser’s account?

    • It tracks calls via the assigned Google Click Identifier (GCLID) set up in the advertiser’s account.
    • It tracks calls via the conversion name for the advertiser’s store.
    • It tracks calls via a dynamically created Google forwarding number.
    • It tracks calls via the phone number listed on the advertiser’s official store website.

     

    As a marketer, in what way should you evaluate your campaign?

    • By focusing on the worst-performing ads and reducing the frequency of that ad, then reevaluating.
    • By checking whether all the budget was used for the campaign or not.
    • By checking whether the result of a specific objective exceeded or fell short of its goal.
    • By using lifetime value analysis to examine the impact to brand lift metrics.

     

    How are view-through conversions counted?

    • They’re counted as conversions that are recorded when repeat users view but don’t interact with an ad, then later convert.
    • They’re counted as conversions that are recorded when users view but don’t interact with an ad, then later convert.
    • They’re counted as conversions that are recorded when users view and interact with an ad, then never convert.
    • They’re counted as conversions that are recorded when new users view and interact with an ad, then later convert.

     

    In the world of digital advertising, how would a tag be defined?

    • It would be defined as a small snippet of code that’s placed on every page of a website.
    • It would be defined as a small snippet of code that’s placed on the conversion page of a website.
    • It would be defined as a large snippet of code that’s placed on the conversion page of a website.
    • It would be defined as a large snippet of code that’s placed on the homepage of a website.

     

    A marketer wants to know how often, on average, an interaction leads to a conversion. What metric should the marketer use to get that information?

    • The marketer should use conversion value-per-click.
    • The marketer should use conversion rate.
    • The marketer should use conversion value-per-cost.
    • The marketer should use cost-per-conversion.

     

    The conversion date between Google Ads and Google Analytics is different. Why might that be?

    • Because Google Ads can attribute conversions to a date for an impression, whereas Google Analytics can’t.
    • Because Google Ads attributes conversions to the day they happen, not to the date of the click that caused the conversion.
    • Because Google Analytics attributes conversions to the day they happen, not to the date of the impression that caused the conversion.
    • Because Google Analytics attributes conversions to the date of the impression that caused the conversion.

     

    A marketing strategist is interested in target ROAS bidding. How might their agency describe this bidding strategy?

    • This bidding strategy uses historical and uploaded data to set the value of a conversion every time a user searches for products or services that are being advertised. Then it automatically adjusts bids for these ads to maximize return.
    • This bidding strategy determines that if a user’s search is likely to generate a conversion with low value, target ROAS will bid high on that search.
    • This bidding strategy analyzes and intelligently predicts the value of a potential conversion every time a user searches for products or services that are being advertised. Then it automatically adjusts bids for these searches to maximize return.
    • This bidding strategy determines that if a user’s search is likely to generate a conversion with high value, target ROAS will bid low on that search.

     

    What report can determine how changes to the attribution model might impact conversion reporting when analyzing the conversion data of a Search Ads campaign in Google Ads?

    • The click analysis report
    • The campaigns report
    • The attribution report
    • The conversions report

     

    There are two types of optimization. What are they? Choose two.

    • Media mix optimization
    • Bidding optimization
    • Targeting optimization
    • Channel optimization

     

    A marketer wants to know what keyword match type gives Smart Bidding the most data and flexibility to compete in the right auctions. Which of the following keyword match types would they choose?

    • They’d choose exact match.
    • They’d choose negative match.
    • They’d choose phrase match.
    • They’d choose broad match.

     

    If you want to know how well your Google Ads account will perform, what estimate should you use?

    • You should use optimization score.
    • You should use recommendation score.
    • You should use attribution score.
    • You should use quality score.

     

    You own a restaurant called Ristorante Abigaille in Florence, Italy. A customer finds your site by clicking on your ads after performing each of these searches: “restaurant tuscany,” “restaurant florence,” “3 star restaurant florence,” and “3 star restaurant abigaille florence.” The customer makes a reservation after clicking on your ad that appeared with “3 star restaurant abigaille florence.” Using the data-driven attribution model, what keyword would receive credit for the conversion?

    • The conversion would be attributed to each keyword equally, therefore each keyword would share equal credit (i.e., 25% each) for the conversion.
    • The last keyword would be attributed with the conversion, therefore the last keyword would receive 100% of the credit for the conversion.
    • The conversion would be attributed to each keyword proportionally, therefore each keyword would receive credit for how much it contributed to the conversion.
    • The first keyword would be attributed with the conversion, therefore the first keyword would receive 100% of the credit for the conversion.

     

    When ad campaigns are optimized by Google’s AI, what does that mean?

    • It means they use AI and machine learning technology to predict what will achieve the best conversion outcomes to optimize bidding, creative, etc.
    • It means they use basic tasks, then software, to automate those tasks, and the process has all the necessary data.
    • It means they use rules-based attribution and software to achieve desired AI-friendly outcomes to influence the process and avoid optimizing for those outcomes.
    • It means they use data-driven attribution to automate tasks, and the process has all the necessary data.

     

    What’s an example of a campaign that fell short of its target goal?

    • An email remarketing campaign with an expected lift in brand awareness of 5% and an actual lift in brand awareness of 12%
    • A video campaign with an expected brand favorability lift of 5% and an actual brand favorability lift of 5%.
    • A display campaign with an expected brand awareness lift of 10% and an actual brand awareness lift of 20%.
    • A search campaign with an expected increase in return on ad spend of $50.12 and an actual return on ad spend of $10.

     

    You’re trying to determine how effectively your ads are driving online sales and generating leads through sign-ups, and you compare your Google Ads data with your offline data. That’s when you see a difference in the number of sign-ups in Google ads vs. your offline data source. Assume everything is working properly and the issue lies with when a conversion was counted. What would you say is causing this data discrepancy?

    • You’d say that Google Ads reports conversions against the date/time of the click that led to the conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the date/time of the conversion itself.
    • You’d say that Google Ads reports views against the device type of the view that didn’t lead to a conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the date/time of the conversion itself.
    • You’d say that Google Ads reports clicks against the date/time of the event that led to the conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the click of the conversion itself.
    • You’d say that Google Ads reports conversions against a unique ID of the event that led to the click. Depending on the other data source, it might use the click of the conversion itself.

     

    A marketing manager is viewing the campaign report in their Google Ads account after successfully implementing conversion tracking tags for their website. They see that at least two of their ads generated over 100 view-through conversions. Which of the following actions can be considered a view-through conversion?

    • An action that’s done in-store only and doesn’t require the customer to have interacted with your ad.
    • An action in which there are only conversions from browsers that don’t allow cross-site cookies.
    • An action in which a customer sees but doesn’t interact with your ad, and then later completes a conversion on your site.
    • An action in which a customer sees and interacts with your ad, but then doesn’t complete a conversion on your site.

     

    After setting up conversion tracking, you want to add a column for conversion value per cost. How would that be calculated?

    • It would be calculated by dividing the total conversion value by the total cost of all ad interactions.
    • It would be calculated by dividing the total conversion value by the number in the conversions column.
    • It would be calculated by dividing the total cost by the number in the conversions column.
    • It would be calculated by dividing the number in the conversions column by the total eligible interactions.

     

    A marketing strategist is interested in enhanced conversions for web. What description could their agency provide to explain this feature?

    • Enhanced conversions for web uses Google Analytics to unlock more powerful bidding.
    • Enhanced conversions for web uses third-party data to improve the accuracy of your conversion measurement.
    • Enhanced conversions for web uses third-party data to unlock more powerful bidding.
    • Enhanced conversions for web uses hashed, first-party data to unlock more powerful bidding.

     

    What’s a benefit of importing Google Analytics conversions to Google Ads?

    • The ability to provide Google Ads access to data that helps optimize bids
    • The ability to link accounts in Google Analytics without auto-tagging
    • The ability to let first-party data be sent from websites
    • The ability to view historical data from before the import

     

    The enhanced cost-per-click (ECPC) bidding strategy can be described in which of the following ways?

    • ECPC first looks at ad auctions, before raising a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • ECPC first looks at ad auctions, before lowering a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • ECPC first looks at a listed target return on investment (ROI), before lowering a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.
    • ECPC first looks at a listed target return on investment (ROI), before raising a max cost-per-click (CPC) bid.

     

    What’s the correct way to describe enhanced conversions for web?

    • It uses hashed, first-party data to unlock more powerful bidding.
    • It uses third-party data to improve the accuracy of your conversion measurement.
    • It uses third-party data to unlock more powerful bidding.
    • It uses Google Analytics to unlock more powerful bidding.

     

    If you’re a marketer describing the criteria for store visits conversion tracking, what would you say?

    • You’d say that store visits conversion tracking is available in all countries and regions as long as it’s not a sensitive business type or account.
    • You’d say that store visits conversion tracking is available for all business types, but only in certain countries.
    • You’d say that store visits conversion tracking has no mininum impression or click requirements.
    • You’d say that store visits conversion tracking requires sufficient data to accurately report store visits and pass Google’s privacy thresholds.

     

    If you’re getting good traffic but not enough conversions from your ads, what should you do to improve your conversion rate?

    • You should turn off the ads to stop traffic.
    • You should use more general keywords.
    • You should reduce campaign budgets.
    • You should add more negative keywords.

     

    Enhanced conversions for leads can benefit an advertiser in what way?

    • It can track sales that happen off a website from website leads.
    • It can improve the measurement of online conversions.
    • It can use third-party data to improve their offline lead measurement.
    • It can track sales and events that happen on a website.

     

    How are calls tracked to an advertiser’s account if the advertiser uses Google’s phone call conversion tracking feature?

    • By the assigned Google Click Identifier (GCLID) set up in the advertiser’s account
    • By the conversion name for the advertiser’s store
    • By a dynamically created Google forwarding number
    • By the phone number listed on the advertiser’s official store website

     

    Besides attribution, what’s another method used to analyze the return on investment (ROI) for media?

    • Marketing mix model
    • Conversion lift
    • Smart Bidding
    • Viewable CPM

     

    Google Tag Manager has which of the following two capabilities? Chose two.

    • Google Tag Manager has collaboration and versioning capabilities.
    • Google Tag Manager lets you to quickly and easily update tags on your website or mobile app from a web interface.
    • Google Tag Manager can only be used to deploy and modify third-party tags.
    • Google Tag Manager is a JavaScript framework that’s used to add Google tags directly to web pages.

     

    For event-based data instead of session-based data, what platform should you use?

    • You should use Google Analytics 4.
    • You should use Google Analytics Classic.
    • You should use Universal Analytics.
    • You should use Google Ads Conversion Tracking.

     

    To set up enhanced conversions for web, what should an advertiser do?

    • An advertiser should go through Google Tag Manager, Google tag, or Google Ads API to set up enhanced conversions.
    • An advertiser should go through the Google Ads API for enhanced conversions.
    • An advertiser should go through Google Tag Assistant.
    • An advertiser should go through Google Analytics Manager.

     

    The Recommendations page in your Google Ads account can help with campaign performance in which of the following two ways? Choose two.

    • By introducing you to new features and trends across Google
    • By helping to maximize your budget as it improves bidding and keywords
    • By increasing your budget if you select to auto apply to recommendations
    • By increasing the amount of time and effort spent on optimizing campaigns

     

    A marketing analyst is trying to determine the duration between a user’s first exposure and that user’s subsequent conversion. What report should they use to get that info?

    • They should use the seasonality report.
    • They should use the change history report.
    • They should use the time lag report.
    • They should use the navigation report.

     

    What does the term attribution mean when used to describe an advertising-related occurrence?

    • Attribution means determining the cost of each asset used in a marketing campaign.
    • Attribution means determining how much credit to award a client for their referral.
    • Attribution means determining how much credit each step of a process should receive.
    • Attribution means determining how much cost each channel requires.

     

    To track product newsletter sign-ups on a website, what type of conversion action would a marketer use?

    • A marketer would use lead.
    • A marketer would use purchase.
    • A marketer would use app installs.
    • A marketer would use pageview.

     

    How does data-driven attribution work?

    • It uses country- or region-specific data to credit several consistent ad touchpoints across the Search network, specifically.
    • It leverages an account’s historical data to credit the most impactful ad touchpoints across Search, YouTube, and Display.
    • It credits on an arbitrary basis and may impact optimizations, particularly when leveraging automated bidding data.
    • It prioritizes specific touchpoints and applies static logic to assign a constant value to a touchpoint along a conversion path.

     

    To evaluate their campaigns, what should marketers do?

    • They should use lifetime value analysis to examine the impact to brand lift metrics.
    • They should focus on the worst-performing ads and reduce the frequency of that ad, then reevaluate.
    • They should check whether the result of a specific objective exceeded or fell short of its goal.
    • They should check whether all the budget was used for the campaign or not.

     

    What metric tells you how often, on average, an ad click or other ad interaction leads to a conversion?

    • Conversion rate
    • Cost-per-conversion
    • Conversion value-per-cost
    • Conversion value-per-click

     

    What’s a requirement for implementing sitewide tagging?

    • Use just the image portion of the JavaScript.
    • Make sure the tag still works by loading it within another tracking tag, like Floodlight.
    • Make sure Google Click Identifier (GCLID) still works if using click trackers in the URL.
    • Turn off auto-tagging in all your Google Ads accounts that are enabled for sitewide tagging.

     

    A business owner wants to use Google Ads to advertise their website. They’re considering using one of the available Smart Bidding strategies that Google offers. Which of the following is a Smart Bidding strategy?

    • Manual CPC
    • Viewable CPM
    • Enhanced impressions
    • Target CPA

     

    What are the two types of optimization? Choose two.

    • Media mix optimization
    • Targeting optimization
    • Bidding optimization
    • Channel optimization

     

    What’s the practice you’d want to use for turning marketing insights into action?

    • Increase investment in an underperforming channel.
    • Shift budgets from well-performing channels to underperforming channels.
    • Increase the frequency of underperforming ad creatives.
    • Focus on the right audience for the message shared in that stage of the buying journey.

     

    Target ROAS bidding can correctly be described in which of the following ways?

    • Target ROAS analyzes and intelligently predicts the value of a potential conversion every time a user searches for products or services that are being advertised. Then it automatically adjusts bids for these searches to maximize return.
    • Target ROAS determines that if a user’s search is likely to generate a conversion with high value, target ROAS will bid low on that search.
    • Target ROAS uses historical and uploaded data to set the value of a conversion every time a user searches for products or services that are being advertised. Then it automatically adjusts bids for these ads to maximize return.
    • Target ROAS determines that if a user’s search is likely to generate a conversion with low value, target ROAS will bid high on that search.

     

    How might experimentation be credited with contributing to a best-in-class measurement approach?

    • It can help assign credit across touchpoints.
    • It can be a way to validate and test insights.
    • It can assist in the collection of multiple data points.
    • It can be used to drive a macro budget strategy.

     

    If you want event-based data as opposed to session-based data, what platform would you use?

    • You’d use Google Ads Conversion Tracking.
    • You’d use Google Analytics 4.
    • You’d use Google Analytics Classic.
    • You’d use Universal Analytics.

     

    Apart from conversion delay, what three additional factors influence conversion volume? Choose three.

    • Changes to ads
    • Changes to attribution model
    • Changes to discrepancy model
    • Changes to default browser
    • Changes in competition or seasonality

     

    To compete in the right auctions with the most data and flexibility, what keyword match type does Smart Bidding need?

    • Broad match
    • Exact match
    • Phrase match
    • Negative match

     

    On a website or app, what would Google Analytics 4 refer to as interactions?

    • It would refer to goal.
    • It would refer to conversion.
    • It would refer to incident.
    • It would refer to event.

     

    If an ad campaign is optimized by Google’s AI, what’s happening?

    • The campaign is using data-driven attribution to automate tasks. The process has all the necessary data.
    • The campaign is using basic tasks, then software, to automate those tasks, and the process has all the necessary data.
    • The campaign is using rules-based attribution and software to achieve desired AI-friendly outcomes to influence the process and avoid optimizing for those outcomes.
    • The campaign is using AI and machine learning technology to predict what will achieve the best conversion outcomes to optimize bidding, creative, etc.

     

    While checking out the campaign report in your Google Ads account, you see that after implementing conversion tracking tags for your website, at least two of your ads generated more than 100 view-through conversions. Based on that info, what action would be considered a view-through conversion?

    • A view-through conversion action in when a customer sees and interacts with your ad, but then doesn’t complete a conversion on your site.
    • A view-through conversion action is when a customer sees but doesn’t interact with your ad, and then later completes a conversion on your site.
    • A view-through conversion action is when there are only conversions from browsers that don’t allow cross-site cookies.
    • A view-through conversion action is done in-store only and doesn’t require the customer to have interacted with your ad.

     

    What should you do to set up the value of an online conversion action?

    • You should always set the value as $1, regardless of the value of the lead.
    • You should assign the value as $20, if the average value of a lead is $20.
    • You should always set the value as $0, regardless of the value of the lead.
    • You should assign the value as $200, if the average value of a lead is $20.

     

    A marketing manager wants to know the process by which view-through conversions are counted. How would you say that ’s done?

    • You’d say that view-through conversions are counted as conversions that are recorded when users view but don’t interact with an ad, then later convert.
    • You’d say that view-through conversions are counted as conversions that are recorded when new users view and interact with an ad, then later convert.
    • You’d say that view-through conversions are counted as conversions that are recorded when users view and interact with an ad, then never convert.
    • You’d say that view-through conversions are counted as conversions that are recorded when repeat users view but don’t interact with an ad, then later convert.

     

    How would you explain what a marketing mix model does?

    • It evaluates a customer’s long-term marketing value to provide a more accurate view of performance.
    • It provides an analysis that shows the impact of marketing on a brand’s sales.
    • It determines the impact of a specific variable on control and treatment groups.
    • It uses conversion data to calculate the contribution of each interaction across the conversion path.

     

    In what way can the power of Google’s AI be beneficial to advertisers?

    • By replacing the need for analytics solutions
    • By optimizing performance in real time
    • By reducing the volume of search conversions
    • By minimizing marketing insights

     

    If you’re a digital advertiser, how do you define a tag?

    • As a large snippet of code that’s placed on the homepage of a website
    • As a small snippet of code that’s placed on every page of a website
    • As a large snippet of code that’s placed on the conversion page of a website
    • As a small snippet of code that’s placed on the conversion page of a website

     

    While searching for a place to eat, a tourist visiting Italy finds your restaurant, which is called Ristorante Abigaille in Florence, by performing each of these searches: “restaurant tuscany,” “restaurant florence,” “3 star restaurant florence,” and “3 star restaurant abigaille florence.” The customer clicks on your ads and makes a reservation. Using the data-driven attribution model, what keyword would receive credit for the conversion?

    • Because the first keyword was attributed with the conversion, it would receive 100% of the credit for the conversion.
    • Because the conversion was attributed to each keyword equally, each keyword would share equal credit (i.e., 25% each) for the conversion.
    • Because the last keyword was attributed with the conversion, it would receive 100% of the credit for the conversion.
    • Beacuse the conversion was attributed to each keyword proportionally, each keyword would receive credit for how much it contributed to the conversion.

     

    A potential customer is looking to buy a new car. What activity suggests they’re in the awareness stage?

    • Viewing an online advertisement for a car
    • Calling to ask about a test-drive
    • Recommending the car on social media
    • Filling out an email subscription form

     

    Data-driven attribution works in which of the following ways?

    • By prioritizing specific touchpoints and applying static logic to assign a constant value to a touchpoint along a conversion path.
    • By using country- or region-specific data to credit several consistent ad touchpoints across the Search network, specifically.
    • By leveraging an account’s historical data to credit the most impactful ad touchpoints across Search, YouTube, and Display.
    • By crediting on an arbitrary basis and potentially impacting optimizations, particularly when leveraging automated bidding data.

     

    A marketing manager wants to try Maximize Conversions. How does this bidding strategy work?

    • By aiming to achieve an average return on ad spend (ROAS) equal to a desired target.
    • By automatically limiting conversions that don’t align with a desired bidding strategy.
    • By being the safest bidding strategy for all business types to optimize their bidding.
    • By using machine learning to capture as many conversions as possible within a daily budget.

     

    Store visits conversion tracking can be described in which way?

    • It requires sufficient data to accurately report store visits and pass Google’s privacy thresholds.
    • It has no mininum impression or click requirements.
    • It’s available in all countries and regions as long as it’s not a sensitive business type or account.
    • It’s available for all business types, but only in certain countries.

     

    You want to set up conversion tracking. What’s the first step you should take?

    • You should add a conversion tracking tag to your website or app after modifying it in Google Ads.
    • You should request a snippet of code from your web administrator and add it to your website for everyone you want to track.
    • You should modify the tag for your website or app after requesting it from your web administrator.
    • You should set up a conversion action in Google Ads to measure what you consider to be valuable consumer actions.

     

    If a campaign falls short of its target goal, how might it be described?

    • It might be described as an email remarketing campaign with an expected lift in brand awareness of 5% and an actual lift in brand awareness of 12%
    • It might be described as a video campaign with an expected brand favorability lift of 5% and an actual brand favorability lift of 5%.
    • It might be described as a search campaign with an expected increase in return on ad spend of $50.12 and an actual return on ad spend of $10.
    • It might be described as a display campaign with an expected brand awareness lift of 10% and an actual brand awareness lift of 20%.

     

    If by comparing Google Ads data with offline data you find a difference in the number of sign-ups for ads between the two sources, and you believe the issue lies with when a conversion was counted, what’s the likely source of that data discrepancy?

    • It’s probably due to the fact that Google Ads reports conversions against the date/time of the click that led to the conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the date/time of the conversion itself.
    • It’s probably due to the fact that Google Ads reports clicks against the date/time of the event that led to the conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the click of the conversion itself.
    • It’s probably due to the fact that Google Ads reports views against the device type of the view that didn’t lead to a conversion. Depending on the other data source, it might use the date/time of the conversion itself.
    • It’s probably due to the fact that Google Ads reports conversions against a unique ID of the event that led to the click. Depending on the other data source, it might use the click of the conversion itself.

     

    After adding a conversion tracking tag to one of the landing pages of your company’s website, you analyze the purchasing data and find duplicate conversions. How can you remove those duplicate conversions from the conversion count?

    • By modifying the event tag to capture a unique order ID
    • By toggling off the possible duplicates option at the top of the chart
    • By sorting the data by time and removing duplicate times found on entries
    • By disabling the view-through conversion data column

     

    How are incrementality experiments different from A/B experiments?

    • They typically require a smaller sample size and less sophisticated statistical analysis.
    • They both require a holdback group to determine which version of an ad performs better.
    • They measure the relative effectiveness of different versions of a marketing campaign.
    • They determine the impact of ads on a consumer’s decision to convert or not.

     

    What do marketing mix models show advertisers?

    • They’re a way to determine the impact of a specific variable on control and treatment groups.
    • They evaluate a customer’s long-term marketing value to provide a more accurate view of performance.
    • They’re an analysis that shows the impact of marketing on a brand’s sales.
    • They use your conversion data to calculate the contribution of each interaction across the conversion path.

     

    Which of the following explains why the conversion date might be different between Google Ads and Google Analytics?

    • Google Analytics can’t attribute conversions to a date for an impressioin, whereas Google Ads can.
    • Google Analytics attributes conversions to the date of the impression that caused the conversion.
    • Google Analytics attributes conversions to the day they happen, not to the date of the impression that caused the conversion.
    • Google Ads attributes conversions to the day they happen, not to the date of the click that caused the conversion.

     

    Which of the following describes the number of times a unique user will see an ad over a given time period?

    • Reach
    • Frequency
    • Impression
    • Engagement rate

     

    You’ve been hired as a consultant to help an online store owner. You need to complete the implementation of conversion tracking tags into their website. How can Tag Assistant help you with this task?

    • It creates the Google Click Identifier tag (GCLID).
    • It troubleshoots unverified conversion actions.
    • It automatically creates tag code snippets.
    • It tells you which Google Analytics reports are incorrect.

     

    A marketing manager wants to know what factors influence conversion volume, apart from conversion delay. Choose three. What three additional factors would you cite? Choose three.

    • Changes to ads
    • Changes to default browser
    • Changes in competition or seasonality
    • Changes to attribution model
    • Changes to discrepancy model

     

    How does the Maximize Conversions bidding strategy work?

    • It uses machine learning to capture as many conversions as possible within a daily budget.
    • It aims to achieve an average return on ad spend (ROAS) equal to a desired target.
    • It automatically limits conversions that don’t align with a desired bidding strategy.
    • It’s the safest bidding strategy for all business types to optimize their bidding.

     

     

     

     

    Get Certified in Measurement Certification NOW!!!

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Privacy for Agencies and Partners Certification Exam Answers 2025

    28 April, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Privacy for Agencies and Partners Certification Exam Answers 2025

    Privacy for Agencies and Partners Certification Exam Answers

    • 50 questions in the exam.
    • 80% is required to pass the exam

     

    Privacy for Agencies and Partners Certification Exam Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    Why is Smart Bidding a durable, privacy-safe solution?

    • It’s an attribution model that values the downstream impact of generic keywords (automatically bids up generic keywords that drive a lot of brand conversions).
    • It’s an analytics tool that uses dozens of signals from how users interact with your website. It also enables segmenting users into value segments more effectively than rules-based segmentation.
    • It’s a creative practice that follows all the new best practices for improving ad creative, such as including setting rotation to optimize to conversion, adding all the relevant ad extensions.
    • It’s a subset of automated bid strategies that use machine learning to optimize for conversions or conversion value in each and every auction.

     

    Which two key advertising use cases does the Privacy Sandbox support?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Audience re-engagement
    • Interest-based advertising
    • Content personalization across all devices
    • Seamless data-sharing with advertising brands

     

    Which two Google tagging infrastructures help clients build durable first-party data?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Consent Mode
    • Engaged Conversions
    • Site-wide tagging
    • Google Firestack

     

    When a subset of conversions can’t be tied to ad interactions, which of the following actions should a marketer take?

    What step should a marketer take when they can’t tie a subset of conversions to ad interactions?

    • Adjusting Smart Bidding campaigns daily to avoid waiting for the algorithm to learn and adjust
    • Update Smart Bidding campaigns every day to avoid waiting for the algorithm to learn and adjust.
    • Asking partners for help filling in the gaps using fingerprinting and alternative ID solutions
    • Work with partners who might be able to fill the gaps using fingerprinting and alternative ID solutions.
    • Using conversion modeling to get a more complete picture of advertising performance
    • Use conversion modeling to get a more comprehensive picture of advertising performance.
    • Avoiding buying impressions on browsers and device types for which the ability to measure is declining
    • Avoid buying impressions on browsers or device types that make it harder to measure.

     

    Your client has come to you for advice on optimizing for higher-value conversions.

    Where would you recommend they start?

    If a client is looking to optimize for higher-value conversions, where should they start?

    • By assigning equal values to every conversion that occurs on their site
    • By assigning equal values to every conversion that they see on their site
    • By relying on Google’s machine learning to predict behavior
    • By relying on Google’s machine learning to make predictions
    • By using readily available values, or even static or proxy values, like average order value
    • By using readily available values, or even static or proxy values, such as average order value
    • By setting a Max CPC limit on the strategy to keep the cost of the campaign under control
    • By setting a Max CPC limit on the strategy to ensure the cost of the campaign is under control

     

    Which of the following is a key benefit of using Consent Mode?

    What key benefit will your client get from using Consent Mode?

    • Consent Mode creates an automated integration between the advertiser’s website and Google Analytics 4.
    • They can create an automated integration between the advertiser’s website and Google Analytics 4.
    • Consent Mode provides an option to adjust how Google tags behave based on the user’s cookie consent choices.
    • They can adjust how Google tags behave based on the user’s cookie consent choices.
    • Consent Mode makes it mandatory for users to accept third-party cookies tracking.
    • They can require users to accept third-party cookies tracking.
    • Consent Mode lets publishers offer more audience segments based on users’ consent.
    • They can offer more audience segments based on user consent.

     

    Which strategy is recommended to encourage as many site visitors as possible to share their email?

    Which strategy can help encourage as many site visitors as possible to share their email?

    • Use a single sign-on (SSO) tool like Google or Facebook Connect, which can increase the email sharing rate by 20%-40%.
    • Using a single sign-on (SSO) tool, like Google or Facebook Connect, which can boost the email sharing rate by 20%-40%.
    • Include an email collection pop-up feature to improve chances of email collection.
    • Boosting the chances of email collection by adding an email collection pop-up feature.
    • Adjust the landing page strategy and always place the email-sharing at the checkout page only.
    • Adjusting the landing page strategy and including the email-sharing at the checkout page only.
    • Prioritize more discounts through email, which increases the lifetime value (LTV).
    • Increasing the lifetime value (LTV) by prioritizing more discounts through email.

     

    How does optimized targeting support a cookieless world?

    What makes optimized targeting a good fit for a cookieless world?

    • It was designed to be implemented with Google Analytics 4, which is also well equipped for privacy-safe marketing strategies.
    • Optimized targeting was designed to work with Google Analytics 4, which is also well equipped for privacy-safe marketing strategies.
    • It relies on first-party data, Google audiences, and machine learning instead of third-party data.
    • Optimized targeting relies on first-party data, Google audiences, and machine learning instead of third-party data.
    • It permits third-party cookies without informing users, while using machine learning algorithms that ensure user privacy.
    • Optimized targeting permits using third-party cookies without informing the users, while using machine learning algorithms that ensure user privacy
    • It optimizes Display and Video campaigns to reach users who frequently accept being tracked through cookies across sites.
    • Optimized targeting uses Display and Video campaigns to reach visitors who frequently accept being tracked through cookies across sites.

     

    Your client comes to you for advice on improving their privacy-centric plans.

    What two steps do you recommend they take?

    Which two steps should they take to begin the process?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Reach out to Google’s privacy specialist to request customized recommendations for their business.
    • Speak to Google’s privacy specialist to get customized recommendations for their business.
    • Set aside a budget to explore privacy-centric solutions to help prioritize it.
    • Set aside a budget to explore privacy-centric solutions to ensure it becomes a priority.
    • Take a wait-and-see approach before mapping out their privacy-centric plans.
    • Take a wait-and-see approach before they make any privacy-centric plans.
    • Develop strategies using the Build, Measure, Activate Framework and its privacy-centric solutions.
    • Craft strategies using the Build, Measure, Activate Framework and its privacy-centric solutions.

     

    Your client is looking for a way to compensate for conversion data loss.

    What’s a short-term solution that can solve your customer’s attribution problem?

    When it comes to compensating for conversion data loss, which of the following is a short-term solution that can solve an attribution problem?

    • Use third-party identifiers to make up for any signal loss.
    • Using third-party identifiers to make up for signal loss.
    • Use Marketing Mix Modeling to gain more visibility into cross-channel investment.
    • Using Marketing Mix Modeling to gain more visibility into cross-channel investment.
    • Use enhanced conversions to decrease observable data.
    • Using enhanced conversions to reduce observable data.
    • Use the Google Analytics 4 Assisted Conversions Report to adjust weights of their attribution model.
    • Using the Google Analytics 4 Assisted Conversions Report to adjust their attribution model weights.

     

    Which API from the Privacy Sandbox can help advertisers serve relevant messages to prospective customers without using third-party cookies?

    Which API from the Privacy Sandbox would you recommend they use to reach their goal?

    • Fraud tokens
    • Measurement API
    • Topics
    • FLEDGE

     

    What two key benefits of machine learning support a privacy landscape?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Track performance when the path between ad interactions and conversions is unclear.
    • Develop robust, data-based 1:1 user insights profiles to help boost engagement with users.
    • Connect with qualified audiences, despite having limitations on some signals.
    • Gather the first-party data resources that are used for marketing campaigns.

     

    Why does Google continuously invest in the security of its consumer-facing products?

    Google continuously invests in the security of its consumer-facing products.

    What’s the top benefit for doing so?

    • To collect data more easily through products
    • It’s easier to collect data through products.
    • To increase loading speed of the products
    • It increases the loading speed of its products.
    • To charge a premium for the products
    • It allows Google to charge a premium for its products.
    • To protect personal information and build user trust in products
    • It protects personal information and builds user trust in products.

     

    When an advertiser adds one of their users to the advertiser’s Customer Match list, what happens to that user data?

    What happens to the user data when an advertiser adds one of their users to the advertiser’s Customer Match list?

    • It makes the user’s data publicly available to all marketers.
    • The user’s data becomes publicly available to all marketers.
    • It adds the user’s data to additional Google products automatically.
    • User data gets added to additional Google products automatically.
    • It shares the user’s data with multiple publishers and platforms.
    • User data gets shared with multiple publishers and platforms.
    • It keeps the user’s data confidential and secure.
    • The user’s data stays confidential and secure.

     

    How does conversion modeling benefit a client’s business?

    Which benefits does conversion modeling bring to a client’s business?

    • Ensures the client’s measurement remains privacy-safe, while fueling more efficient campaign optimization and bidding.
    • It helps the client’s measurement stay privacy-safe, while providing more efficient campaign optimization and bidding.
    • Deprioritizes users who have a lower reported performance to ensure the campaign is optimized to strong performance.
    • It deprioritizes users with a lower reported performance to optimize the campaign for strong performance.
    • Helps clients learn from the models by reverse-engineering algorithms and building their own models.
    • It helps clients learn from the models by reverse-engineering algorithms and building their own models.
    • Helps marketers identify people who are similar to their converters, so they can reach the entire interest group.
    • It helps marketers identify people who are similar to their converters so they can reach the entire interest group.

     

    What’s a recommended way to build a privacy-safe, full-funnel marketing strategy?

    Which of the following is considered a best practice for building a privacy-safe, full-funnel marketing strategy?

    • Create an efficient set of bottom-of-the-funnel tactics to maximize ROAS.
    • You should create an efficient set of bottom-of-the-funnel tactics to maximize ROAS.
    • Start with a few mid-funnel tactics that will lead users to the lower funnel.
    • You should start with a few mid-funnel tactics that will lead users to the lower funnel.
    • Build a full-funnel strategy as recommended, then pare it down by removing the most inefficient tactics.
    • You should build a full-funnel strategy, then pare it down by removing the most inefficient tactics.
    • Create a hypothesis strategy that will activate the tactics no matter which funnel you start from.
    • You should create a hypothesis strategy that will activate the tactics no matter which funnel you start from.

     

    Which two Google tagging infrastructures help clients build durable first-party data?

    Your client wants to start collecting first-party data.

    Which two Google tagging infrastructures can help them build durable first-party data?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Consent Mode
    • Engaged Conversions
    • Site-wide tagging
    • Google Firestack
    • Firestack

     

    What does the Privacy Sandbox seek to achieve?

    Which of the following statements about Privacy Sandbox is true?

    • It aims to re-create third-party cookie tracking methods.
    • The Privacy Sandbox proposes to re-create third-party cookie tracking methods.
    • It aims to keep the status quo, but with more control to opt out.
    • The Privacy Sandbox aims to maintain the status quo, but with greater control to opt out.
    • It aims to provide new technology to support key ads use cases, while maintaining privacy.
    • The Privacy Sandbox proposes new technology to support key ads use cases and maintain privacy.
    • It aims to use anonymized PII to target and measure user activity.
    • The Privacy Sandbox aims to use anonymized PII to target and measure user activity.

     

    Your client wants to learn more about how Consent Mode can help their business.
    Which feature of Consent Mode should you highlight for them?

    Your client wants your advice on whether Consent Mode can help their business.

    Which Consent Mode feature should you tell them about?

    • It allows for customization to align with their country’s regulatory needs.
    • Consent Mode can be customized based on their country’s regulatory requirements.
    • It helps recover impression-to-conversion journeys lost through user consent.
    • Consent Mode recovers impression-to-conversion journeys lost through user consent.
    • It retrieves conversion data at an individual user level.
    • Consent Mode recovers conversion data at an individual user level.
    • It aligns the tags’ behavior based on users’ consent choices.
    • Consent Mode adjusts tags’ behavior based on users’ consent choices.

     

    What’s one way that an eCommerce client can use Smart Bidding?

    What’s a best practice for an eCommerce client using Smart Bidding?

    • The client should start with manual bidding first, so Smart Bidding has more data to build on.
    • The client should start with manual bidding first to give Smart Bidding more data to build on.
    • The client should focus on lead-generating strategies to drive a maximum number of conversions.
    • The client should focus on lead-generating strategies to drive the maximum number of conversions.
    • The client should disregard any first-person data and let machine learning do the heavy lifting.
    • The client should disregard first-person data and let machine learning do all the work.
    • The client should use business data such as profit margin to optimize to profit vs. revenue.
    • The client should use business data, like profit margin, to optimize to profit vs. revenue.

     

    A customer is looking to test cookieless geo-experiments.

    What’s an advantage of doing this?

    What’s an advantage of testing cookieless geo-experiments?

    • It’s easy for customers to implement and execute.
    • It can be easily implemented and executed.
    • It requires the use of user-level data for experimentation.
    • It requires using user-level data for experimentation.
    • It doesn’t rely on the use of cross-site tracking for data.
    • It doesn’t rely on using cross-site tracking for data.
    • It’s a good fit for most clients looking to get quick results.
    • It’s a good fit for most clients seeking quick results.

     

    When advertisers want to model user journeys without observable data, which tool within Google Analytics 4 can help them do that?

    What tool within Google Analytics 4 enables advertisers to model user journeys in the absence of observed data?

    When advertisers don’t have observable data, which of the following tools within Google Analytics 4 allows them to model user journeys?

    • Google Tag Manager
    • Enhanced conversions
    • Private mode
    • Consent Mode

     

    Your client isn’t convinced that third-party cookies will be deprecated.
    What should you say to convince your client otherwise?

    Your client believes that third-party cookies aren’t actually going away.

    What should you say to convince your client otherwise?

    • Chrome is committed to withdrawing support for third-party cookies, and most browsers already restrict and block them.
    • Chrome is committed to withdrawing support for third-party cookies like other browsers have done.
    • Data has shown that third-party cookies are no longer effective in capturing real user data.
    • Presently, data proves third-party cookies aren’t effective in capturing real user data.
    • Third-party cookies will be staying; but to get ahead, clients should be innovative and look toward first-party data development.
    • Although third-party cookies are staying, clients can get ahead by being innovative and developing first-party data.
    • First-party data is equally as cost-efficient and simple to implement as cookie-based advertising.
    • First-party data is as cost-efficient and simple to implement as cookie-based advertising.

     

    How do Google’s user privacy solutions help deliver value to advertisers?

    In what way do Google’s user privacy solutions benefit advertisers?

    • By allowing brands to know which users consented to sharing their personal data with them
    • They allow brands to know which users consented to sharing their personal data with them.
    • By instantly providing brands access to users’ personal data to drive incremental revenue
    • They allow brands to instantly connect with users and their personal data to drive revenue.
    • By building user trust in brands, which influences users’ willingness to share their data and purchase from the brand
    • They build user trust in brands, which can make users more willing to share their data and purchase from the brand.
    • By allowing brands to retarget individual users with personalized messages on a 1:1 level
    • They give brands access to retarget users through personalized 1:1 messaging.

     

    What’s a requirement for using enhanced conversions?

    Using enhanced conversions requires which of the following circumstances?

    Which of the following is a condition required for enhanced conversions usage?

    • Using Google Display Ads or Display & Video 360 (DV360) as the main buy-side platform
    • Use Google Display Ads or Display & Video 360 (DV360) as the main ads buying platform.
    • Using sitewide tagging with Google Tag Manager or a recognized third-party solution
    • Sitewide tagging with Google Tag Manager or a recognized third-party solution
    • Using email addresses and mobile numbers to match with Google logged-in data
    • Must have email addresses and mobile numbers to match with Google logged-in data
    • Using Google Ads Conversion tracking as your conversion source
    • Google Ads Conversion tracking as your conversion source

     

    What feature makes Google machine learning modeling different from other privacy-forward proposals?

    • Data from Google’s machine learning can be exported from the platforms and used to gather insights for marketing teams.
    • Google’s Display and Video campaigns use data from competitors’ channels and placements to give algorithms enough information to perform well.
    • Google’s signed-in user base lets their models continue functioning independently of cookies and other identifiers.
    • Google’s machine learning can use inputs from third-party cookies even though they’re deprecated when users accept the cookies of a certain site.

     

    Your client wants to know more about Google’s Privacy Sandbox.

    Which of the following accurately reflects the proposed solutions that you would share with them?

    What are the proposed solutions from Google’s Privacy Sandbox?

    Which of the following is true of the proposed solutions from Google’s Privacy Sandbox?

    • Businesses gain the ability to store third-party cookie information and reach individual users.
    • Allow businesses the ability to store third-party cookie information and reach users on an individual basis
    • It stores third-party cookie information and reach users on an individual basis
    • Businesses can limit tracking for individuals while supporting an open internet ecosystem.
    • Limit tracking of individuals while supporting an open internet ecosystem
    • It limits tracking of individuals while supporting an open internet ecosystem
    • Businesses can maximize both first-party and third-party cookie data while remaining compliant.
    • Allow businesses to maximize both first-party and third-party cookie data while remaining compliant
    • It maximizes both first-party and third-party cookie data while remaining compliant
    • Businesses that advertise solely on the web gain privacy-preserving technologies.
    • Provide privacy-preserving technologies for only web-based advertisers
    • It offers privacy-preserving technologies only to web-based advertisers

     

    What’s an effective way to expand your advertising strategy, while staying privacy-safe?

    What’s a recommended way to broaden your advertising strategy in a privacy-safe way?

    Which of the following is an effective way to broaden your advertising strategy in a privacy-safe way?

    • Advertising to users who are similar to your current high-LTV customers
    • By advertising to users similar to your current high-LTV customers
    • Advertising to users similar to your current high-LTV customers
    • Advertising to users on Display and YouTube who are randomly searching for keywords
    • By advertising to users on Display and YouTube randomly searching for keywords
    • Advertising to users on Display and YouTube randomly searching for keywords
    • Advertising to users who appear to be in market for your competitors’ products
    • By advertising to users who are in market for your competitors’ products
    • Advertising to users who are in market for your competitors’ products
    • Advertising to users who were created manually based on marketing strategy segmentation
    • By advertising to users created manually based on marketing strategy segmentation
    • Advertising to users created manually based on marketing strategy segmentation

     

    How does optimized targeting identify new, high-performing audiences?

    How does optimized targeting find new, high-performing audiences?

    • It optimizes some of the campaign settings — such as geo and language — to expand the reach to a broader audience.
    • It changes some of the campaign settings like geo and language to offer a wider targeting for the audience.
    • It uses Customer Match audiences from other accounts in the same category of the client and applies that information to find new users.
    • It uses Customer Match audiences from other accounts in the same category of the client, leveraging that information to find new users.
    • It builds from existing targeting inputs, including the client’s first-party data, while being powered by privacy-forward machine learning models.
    • It builds off of existing targeting inputs, including the client’s first-party data, while being powered by privacy-forward machine learning models.
    • It scrapes the client’s landing page using an algorithm to find keywords that improve the quality score of the bid.
    • It uses algorithms that collect data from the landing page of the client to find keywords that improve the quality score of the bid.

     

    What’s a main benefit of linking Google Analytics and Google Ads?

    Your client wonders what they’ll get out of linking Google Analytics and Google Ads.

    What main benefit would you share with them to show the value of doing so?

    • You can capture user information built on third-party cookies that would otherwise be inaccessible.
    • They can capture user information built on third-party cookies that otherwise couldn’t be accessed.
    • You can increase the profit margin of the customer by looking at Analytics’ recommended target ROAS for each campaign.
    • They can increase the customer’s profit margin by looking at Analytics’ recommended target ROAS for each campaign.
    • You can use the event data you capture for app install and conversion tracking.
    • They can use the event data captured for app install and conversion tracking.
    • You can download unified reports of Analytics and Ads data that can be integrated in the customer’s CRM.
    • They can download unified reports of Analytics and Ads data that can be integrated in the customer’s CRM.

     

    If you want to drive performance in a privacy-safe way, how can Smart Bidding help?

    What factors allow Smart Bidding to drive performance in a privacy-safe way?

    How does Smart Bidding drive performance in a privacy-safe way?

    • By improving the reach of Display, Video, YouTube, and Gmail campaigns so clients can tap new audience lists across channels.
    • Smart Bidding improves the reach of Display, Video, YouTube, and Gmail campaigns so clients can tap new audience lists across channels
    • It improves the reach of Display, Video, YouTube, and Gmail campaigns so clients can tap new audience lists across channels.
    • By delivering maximum performance against a client’s goals by filling gaps in measurement with third-party cookies and pixels.
    • Smart Bidding delivers maximum performance against a client’s goals by filling gaps in measurement with third-party cookies and pixels.
    • It delivers maximum performance against a client’s goals by filling in any gaps in measurement with third-party cookies and pixels.
    • By allowing clients to reach new consumers using auto-generated Similar Audience lists that they can export to third-party exchanges.
    • Smart Bidding helps clients reach new consumers using auto-generated Similar Audience lists that they can export to third-party exchanges.
    • It allows clients to reach new consumers using auto-generated Similar Audience lists that they can export to third-party exchanges.
    • By using a client’s account conversion data along with billions of signal combinations to set precise bids in each auction.
    • Smart Bidding uses a client’s account conversion data along with billions of signal combinations to set precise bids in each auction.
    • It uses a client’s account conversion data along with billions of signal combinations to set precise bids in each auction.

     

    How can Smart Bidding support a client’s goal to optimize profit rather than revenue?

    How can Smart Bidding support a business goal to optimize profit rather than revenue?

    • Smart Bidding helps clients attribute more observed conversions to their digital campaigns.
    • It can help clients attribute more observed conversions to their digital campaigns.
    • Smart Bidding helps eCommerce clients deliver the right creative, at the right time, to the right person.
    • It can help eCommerce clients deliver the right creative, at the right time, to the right person.
    • Smart Bidding helps clients use business data instead of the transaction value to optimize for better returns.
    • It helps clients use business data instead of the transaction value to optimize for better returns.
    • Smart Bidding can be used for Display, Video, YouTube, and Gmail, to allow for optimization across channels.
    • It’s available for Display, Video, YouTube, and Gmail, for optimization across channels.

     

    Your client would like to improve their marketing strategy with privacy-centric solutions.

    If a client wants to enhance their marketing strategy, which three durable solutions can they adopt today to start that process?

    Your client wants to start rolling out durable solutions that can support their marketing strategy.

    Which three solutions can they adopt today?

    • Enhanced conversions, Google Firestack, and Consent Mode
    • Universal Analytics, enhanced conversions, and Consent Mode
    • Google Analytics 4, enhanced conversions, and Consent Mode
    • Universal Analytics, Google Firestack, and Consent Mode

     

    What’s a recommended way for your client to start getting ahead of privacy changes that will have an impact on how they collect data?

    Your client’s getting ready to launch their privacy strategy, but still need to address ongoing privacy changes that will affect how they collect data.

    What action can they take starting now?

    • Activate their data using complex manual systems, like network-based remarketing.
    • Use complex manual systems, such as network-based remarketing, to activate their data.
    • Adopt tools for tracking app-to-web behavior across all OS devices.
    • Launch a program that tracks app-to-web behavior across all OS devices.
    • Start developing robust third-party inventories with key ad network partners.
    • Develop comprehensive third-party inventories with key ad network partners.
    • Reduce data loss by measuring data accurately through enhanced conversions.
    • Use enhanced conversions to measure data accurately and mitigate data loss.

     

    Why would someone use Google Analytics for Firebase instead of Google Analytics 4, even though both experiences are powered by the same SDK?

    Why might some people continue to use Google Analytics for Firebase instead of Google Analytics 4, despite both using the same SDK?

    • Some app developers continue to use Google Analytics for Firebase because it’s app-focused and it eases most of the deep-linking processes.
    • App developers might continue to use Google Analytics for Firebase because it’s app-focused and it eases most of the deep-linking processes.
    • Unlike Google Analytics 4, Google Analytics for Firebase is compliant with privacy regulations specific to app developers, making it a more useful platform in certain cases.
    • Unlike Google Analytics 4, Google Analytics for Firebase is compliant with privacy regulations specific to app developers, making it a more useful platform in some cases.
    • Some marketers working with clients whose consumers are Android device users might prefer Google Analytics for Firebase over Google Analytics 4.
    • Marketers might prefer to use Google Analytics for Firebase if they’re working with clients whose consumers are Android device users.
    • Analysts prefer using Google Analytics for Firebase due to its reporting tools and better UI, even though the same SDK powers both experiences.
    • Even though the same SDK powers both experiences, analysts prefer to use Google Analytics for Firebase due to its reporting tools and better UI.

     

    Which of the following is true of conversion modeling?

    Which of the following is a key benefit of conversion modeling?

    • Conversion modeling doesn’t need to adapt to address user behaviors because its measurement approach is one-size-fits-all.
    • Conversion modeling uses a one-size-fits-all measurement approach that doesn’t need to adapt to address user behaviors.
    • By using conversion modeling, campaigns and bidding strategies are better optimized, which gives better campaign results.
    • Conversion modeling better optimizes campaigns and bidding strategies, leading to better campaign results.
    • Conversion modeling ensures your clients’ measurement will no longer be required to remain privacy-safe.
    • Conversion modeling makes sure your clients’ measurement no longer needs to be privacy-safe.
    • Conversion modeling helps advertisers quantify the impact of their marketing efforts when a subset of conversions can easily be tied to ad interactions.
    • Conversion modeling lets advertisers quantify the impact of marketing efforts when a subset of conversions can easily be tied to ad interactions.

     

    A customer wants to try a new privacy-centric media strategy and is looking for a way to test effectiveness.

    Which test would help them accomplish this?

    • Test the new media strategy using the Holdback treatment group while keeping the control group the same.
    • Test the new media strategy using the 5% Treatment to test gradual budget increments in the new media strategy while keeping the control group the same.
    • Test the new media strategy using Go-dark with the budget of the new media strategy treatment group while keeping the control group the same.
    • Test the new media strategy using the heavy-up treatment group to increase the budget of the new media strategy while keeping the control group the same.

     

    How does the advertiser identity verification program benefit users?

    What benefit do users get from the advertiser identity verification program?

    • They can give consent for data collection to the advertiser.
    • The ability to give consent for data collection to the advertiser
    • They can access advertiser reviews from the ad.
    • The ability to access advertiser reviews from the ad
    • They can see who’s responsible for the ads they are shown.
    • The ability to see who’s responsible for the ads they are shown.
    • They can contact the advertiser directly.
    • The ability to contact the advertiser directly

     

    What’s an example of Customer Match driving personalized, high-performance campaigns?

    In which way does Customer Match drive personalized, high-performance campaigns?

    • Reaching online and offline users with personalized offers by maximizing uploaded third-party data.
    • It reaches online and offline users with personalized offers by maximizing uploaded third-party data.
    • Reaching users who haven’t shown interest in your products and don’t want to be targeted.
    • It reaches users who haven’t shown interest in your products and don’t want to be targeted.
    • Reaching users who haven’t interacted with your website with personalized messaging to expand your audience size.
    • It reaches users who haven’t interacted with your website with personalized messaging to expand your audience size.
    • Seeking out your most loyal customers and generating more sales by reaching these users with personalized offers.
    • It seeks out your most loyal customers and generates more sales by providing these users with personalized offers.

     

    Why are traditional methods of tracking becoming less reliable?

    • Conversion window times have slowly increased over time, sometimes as long as 60 days.
    • Users are less likely to use their digital devices due to the rise of ad blockers.
    • Browsers such as Safari are increasing the ability for advertisers to use third-party cookies to track conversions.
    • Increasing privacy regulations and technological changes will limit using user data for measurement.

     

    The Privacy Sandbox supports which two key advertising use cases?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Re-engaging audiences
    • Interest-based advertising
    • Content personalization on all devices
    • Seamless data-sharing with advertising brands

     

    What’s true of the Google Analytics 4 data deletion feature?

    What does the new data deletion feature offer businesses in Google Analytics 4?

    • You can remove an individual user’s data or specific fields within a Google Analytics 4 property.
    • It has the option to remove an individual user’s data or specific fields within a Google Analytics 4 property.
    • You can submit a request to delete individual user data to be completed within 2-3 business days.
    • It allows businesses the ability to submit a request to delete individual user data and be completed within 2-3 business days.
    • You can reject or approve a request from a user to delete their information from your database.
    • It has the option to reject or approve the request from a user to delete their information from their database.
    • You can delete negative reviews about your business within Google.
    • It offers the ability to delete negative reviews about their business within Google.

     

    To measure campaign performance without third-party cookies, which Privacy Sandbox API should be used?

    Which Privacy Sandbox API will support measuring campaign performance without third-party cookies?

    • FLOC
    • Attribution Reporting API
    • Topics
    • FLEDGE

     

    An advertiser would like to continue serving relevant messages to prospective customers without using third-party cookies.

    Which campaign type can help unite all non-keyword related Google advertising into one automated cross-product?

    To unite all non-keyword related Google advertising into one automated cross-product, which campaign type should be used?

    • Performance Max Campaigns to combine the best-in-class automation technologies across bidding, targeting, creatives, and attribution to drive growth in conversions and value
    • Use Performance Max Campaigns to combine best-in-class automation technologies across bidding, targeting, creatives, and attribution to help drive growth in conversions and value.
    • App Campaigns for driving consumers to download, take certain actions, or increase their use of an app at the target cost per download/action or target ROAS
    • Use App Campaigns to drive consumers to download, take certain actions, or increase their app use at the target cost per download/action or the target ROAS.
    • Video Action Campaigns to help drive more conversions from YouTube
    • Use Video Action Campaigns to drive more conversions from YouTube.
    • Smart Shopping Campaigns for driving eCommerce revenues at the target ROAS
    • Use Smart Shopping Campaigns to drive eCommerce revenues at the target ROAS.

     

    Since 2017, the ads ecosystem has seen an increased need for machine learning due to which of the following reasons?

    Why has the ads ecosystem seen an increased need for machine learning?

    • In recent years, data scientists began driving machine learning projects and efforts forward.
    • Data scientists began driving machine learning projects and efforts forward.
    • Chrome announced its intent to phase out first- and third-party cookies as soon as an alternative is available.
    • Chrome announced the phasing out of first- and third-party cookies as soon as an alternative is available.
    • Increasing user expectations, privacy regulation, and technology changes have impacted campaign measurability.
    • Increasing user expectations, privacy regulation, and technology changes have affected campaign measurability.
    • Marketers began using machine learning to find patterns to predict behavior and to quickly optimize.
    • Marketers began using machine learning to identify patterns to predict behavior and to quickly optimize.

     

    What will allow Smart Bidding to remain effective after third-party cookies are deprecated?

    What makes Smart Bidding a durable solution that can continue to be effective after the deprecation of third-party cookies?

    • It will continue to be a durable solution given its reliance on first-party cookies.
    • Because it relies upon first-party cookies.
    • It will remain durable since it’s fueled by combining clients’ conversion data with Google’s machine learning.
    • It’s fueled by combining clients’ conversion data with Google’s machine learning.
    • It will remain durable because clients will rely on third-party media platforms for bidding.
    • Because clients will rely on third-party media platforms for bidding.
    • It will continue to be a durable solution because of its reliance on the UID 2.0 solution.
    • It relies upon the UID 2.0 solution.

     

    Which advice should you give to a customer who wants to invest in a durable first-party data strategy?

    Your customer is looking to invest in a durable first-party data strategy. What advice should you give to them?

    • They should consider capturing device IDs to mitigate any signal loss from third-party cookies.
    • Start capturing device IDs to reduce any signal loss from third-party cookies.
    • They should consider investing more in third-party data to round out their first-party data strategy.
    • Increase the budget for third-party data gathering to complement their current first-party datasets.
    • They should consider changing landing page strategy and moving email sharing forward to get a higher percentage of emails.
    • Revamp the landing page strategy and move email sharing forward to get a higher percentage of visitor emails.
    • They should consider offering high discounts in exchange for their consumers’ emails to build their first-party database.
    • Offer high discounts in exchange for visitors’ emails to grow a first-party database.

     

    How can user privacy solutions create a positive business opportunity?

    • By eliminating user controls, users have a more seamless experience navigating an advertiser’s website.
    • By providing the option to reject user data deletion requests, users are more likely to submit their information.
    • By providing a transparent and fair value exchange, users are more likely to share their information.
    • By restricting the ability to view website offerings, users are more likely to offer their personal information.

     

    Which key levers would you recommend to strengthen user trust?

    Which key levers must clients invest in to strengthen user trust?

    • Transparency, security, control, and usefulness
    • Security, transparency, control, and usefulness
    • Transparency, control, personalization, and data collection
    • Data collection, transparency, control, and personalization
    • Security, usefulness, data collection, and cross-site identifiers
    • Usefulness, cross-site identifiers, security, and personalization
    • Control, usefulness, personalization, and cross-site identifiers
    • Usefulness, control, personalization, and cross-site identifiers

     

    What data controls does Google Analytics 4 offer advertisers?

    What data controls can advertisers get from Google Analytics 4?

    • Allows advertisers to store individual IP addresses for advertising purposes.
    • Businesses can store individual IP addresses for advertising purposes.
    • Helps businesses gather information about a user without proper user consent.
    • Businesses can gather information about a user without proper user consent.
    • Helps businesses keep up with ever-evolving industry regulations.
    • Businesses get help keeping up with ever-evolving industry regulations.
    • Enables businesses when notified to reject data removal requests from users.
    • Businesses, when notified, can reject data removal requests from users.

     

    What step should a marketer take when they can’t tie a subset of conversions to ad interactions?

    • Avoid buying impressions on browsers or device types that make it harder to measure.
    • Work with partners who might be able to fill the gaps using fingerprinting and alternative ID solutions.
    • Update Smart Bidding campaigns every day to avoid waiting for the algorithm to learn and adjust.
    • Use conversion modeling to get a more comprehensive picture of advertising performance.

     

    Your client has a high volume of repeat customers and wants your help reaching consumers who will drive the highest conversion revenue.
    How would you recommend they achieve their goal using Smart Bidding?

    How can you use Smart Bidding to reach more consumers who will drive the highest conversion revenue?

    • By using enhanced CPC, as these are the metrics of the future.
    • By doubling down on lead generation efforts to drive new purchasers.
    • By using historical purchase data and optimize toward lifetime value (LTV).
    • By adding smart creatives like RSA to campaigns and ad groups.

     

    What are two key benefits of machine learning in light of the changing privacy landscape?

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Help marketers understand performance when the path between ad interactions and conversions isn’t visible
    • Help marketers to create 1:1 consumer insights profiles to increase consumer engagement
    • Help marketers collect first-party data resources used for their marketing initiatives
    • Help marketers reach qualified audiences, even when some signals are limited

     

    Which of the following explains a heavy-up geo-experiment strategy?

    How does a heavy-up geo-experiment strategy deal with budget?

    • The treatment group budget remains the same while the budget of the control group is suppressed.
    • It keeps the treatment group budget the same while suppressing the control group budget.
    • The treatment group budget remains the same while the budget of the control group is increased.
    • It keeps the treatment group budget the same while increasing the control group budget.
    • The treatment group budget is suppressed while the budget of the control group remains the same.
    • It suppresses the treatment group budget while keeping the control group budget the same.
    • The treatment group budget is increased while the budget of the control group remains the same.
    • It increases the treatment group budget while keeping the control group budget the same.

     

     

    Privacy for Agencies and Partners Certification Exam Answers

     

     

    Filed Under: Certifications

    Google Ads AI-Powered Performance Certification Answers 2025

    19 April, 2023 Por Vicen Martínez Arias

    Google Ads AI-Powered Performance Certification Answers 2025

    Google Ads AI-Powered Performance Certification Answers

    Google Ads AI-Powered Performance Ads Assessment consists of 50 questions and you have 75 minutes to complete.

    You will need a score of 80% or higher to pass

     

    Google Ads AI-Powered Performance Certification Answers

     

    Questions:

     

    What are two main benefits of utilizing the Insights page? (Choose two.)

    Select 2 Correct Responses

    • Insights can be used to discover and diagnose issues around performance.
    • Insights can be used to understand emerging search trends and new converting audiences.
    • Insights can be used for purposes of optimizing Search campaigns.
    • Insights can be used to understand competitors’ weekly spend.

     

    Which is a strong example of a business objective that is needed to define before adopting an AI-powered solution?

    • Cost-per-click
    • Profit
    • Marketing spend
    • Cost of goods sold

     

    ===

     

    A local dessert chain is looking to improve its Google Ads campaign performance across its accounts. What are two ways it can use its optimization score to improve its campaigns? (Choose two.)

    • By determining the extent to which campaigns can be improved and how to go about making improvement
    • By the review and dismissal of recommendations that are relevant to their goal to save time optimizing campaigns
    • By accepting and immediately applying recommendations tailored to their business, which can save time
    • By measuring their score at the individual account level but not their manager account level

     

    A chain of regional bookstores is looking to drive more value from their Google Ads campaigns by creating a value-based bidding strategy for the first time. Which best practice should they follow first in order to get started?

    • Begin with a strong measurement and attribution strategy based on their goals.
    • Enable a volume-based Smart Bidding strategy in all campaigns.
    • Create a value-based Smart Bidding strategy in their top two campaigns.
    • Build a large list of negative keywords to tailor traffic and eliminate uninterested consumers.

     

    Which metric is used for value measurement?

    • Page depth
    • Time spent on site
    • Cost-per-click
    • Cart size

     

    A digital marketing manager working with a national insurance provider hopes to support AI using first-party data. Before they can start using the data, what question do they need to answer?

    • Is there a way our data collection policies can be modified to encourage customers to share as much as possible?
    • What are the data storage capabilities for each marketing team member’s organizational device?
    • How can we start to use this data as quickly as we can, even at the expense of alignment with other teams?
    • Are we aligned with local regulations on data collection and user privacy to ensure we are properly using first-party data?

     

    What’s the benefit of running a true A/B test with campaign experiments?

    • By testing multiple variables at a time, an A/B test gives advertisers information they can use to adjust their campaigns quickly based on insights.
    • By revealing whether their trial campaign drove user action that wouldn’t have taken place otherwise, an A/B test gives insights into user behavior.
    • By running a single campaign at a time, an A/B test allows for a true ramp-down period between each testing period so that results can be decluttered.
    • By running concurrently with an original campaign, a trial campaign controls for external factors, like seasonality, that might otherwise bias results.

     

    What’s a best practice to follow when designing an experiment to test Performance Max campaigns?

    • Create a new CPA or ROAS goal for Performance Max campaigns to achieve.
    • Keep Performance Max budget limited to 10% of other campaigns’ budgets.
    • Optimize Performance Max to a comparable CPA or ROAS target to other campaigns.
    • Run the Performance Max experiment for one to two weeks before evaluating results.

     

    Which Smart Bidding strategy would you utilize to optimize for value?

    • Maximize clicks
    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize conversions
    • Target Impression Share

     

    In traditional marketing organizations, how is budgeting usually handled?

    • With fixed annual budgets that don’t adjust according to demand
    • With quarterly budgets that don’t need prior approval to be increased
    • With budgets that aren’t set for a time period or initiative
    • With budgets that adjust to the price of stock

     

    A digital marketing manager has chosen to upgrade keywords to broad match. Which of these behaviors should they incorporate into their routine optimization cadence in order to guide machine learning?

    • Add more phrase and exact match keywords to improve reach.
    • Eliminate negative keywords that could block relevant traffic.
    • Ignore suggestions to add relevant new keywords.
    • Add Customer Match lists with data that is more than 90 days old.

     

    What role do negative keywords play in a AI-powered Search strategy?

    • They let marketers identify additional searches that customers might be using to locate a business.
    • They make it harder for customers to leave negative reviews about a business.
    • They allow marketers to limit the terms that competitors are able to bid on at auction,
    • They prohibit otherwise qualifying queries from triggering ads for an irrelevant search.

     

    How does a test-and-learn mindset help marketers find success in their AI efforts?

    • It lets leaders spot low performers more easily.
    • It fosters competition across the organization.
    • It encourages teams to break down silos and identify solutions quickly.
    • It helps teams test more than one business objective at the same time.

     

    Which of the following tools can help marketers maximize performance of a value-based bidding strategy?

    • Diagnostic insights
    • Keyword planner
    • Target simulators
    • Ad strength rating

     

    What’s a best practice to follow when creating a Performance Max campaign?

    • Avoid linking a Google My Business or Google Merchant Center feed
    • Use the maximum number of text, image, and video assets possible
    • Limit the number of ad extensions within an asset group
    • Establish conversion tracking after a campaign has been running for two weeks

     

    What are the variables that affect whether an optimization score rec

    • There’s no specific focus, as all types of recommendations are surfaced for all individual and manager accounts
    • Recommendations are surfaced when the system determines that business objectives need to be expanded.
    • Information gleaned from algorithms that identify the changes necessary for the largest increase in campaign spend, independent of performance impact
    • Information gleaned from machine learning and simulations that identify potential performance uplift based on a marketer’s business objective

     

    A digital marketer has upgraded their Smart Bidding strategy to value-based bidding. Which two Google Ads tools should they use regularly? (Choose two.)

    • Performance Planner
    • Keyword planner
    • Ad strength rating
    • Bid strategy report

     

    What are two ways that Performance Planner can help you plan budgets? (Choose two.)

    • Identify the best billing method for a particular account to make timely payments more likely.
    • Model the impact of different budgets to gain insights on how they might affect performance.
    • Determine the size of the opportunity for increased sales across upcoming seasonal periods.
    • Assess the spending-per-keyword in each campaign over the past month.

     

    What’s a best practice when building an account structure designed to improve the performance of AI-powered solutions?

    • Create as many campaigns as possible to achieve business goals.
    • Design campaigns around specific manual optimizaton levers.
    • Focus account structure on business goals, not channel silos.
    • Segment account structure by device and match type to customize creative.

     

    Why are broad match keywords so important?

    • They guarantee that a keyword’s core concept is present in the search term while reaching a volume comprable to what exact match keywords would deliver.
    • Broad match gives marketers an opportunity to reach the maximum number of consumers who are seeking out their offering without having to spend the time adding different keywords.
    • They are needed alongside exact match and phrase match keywords in any ad group if high performace is to be expected.
    • Broad match gives marketers a lot of control over the specific search terms to which ads correspond, as well as the ability to limit volume.

     

    A digital marketing manager for a large retailer manages a fully flexible budget for their campaigns. Which best practice should they follow in order to maximize results from their flexible budget?

    • Cap budgets at the average daily spend to eliminate unnecessary budget usage during seasonal periods.
    • Use shared budgets and portfolio bid strategies to maximize campaign flexiblity and allow AI to do its work.
    • Create a separate budget for campaign experiments and unforeseen market changes.
    • Adjust performance targets monthly or quarterly to optimize AI-driven solutions.

     

    How does uncapping budgets help to fully capture AI’s benefits?

    • Campaigns need enough budget flexibility to maximize AI’s potential.
    • AI only works in newly created campaigns with budgets of $1,000 per day or more.
    • When there’s a limitation placed on a campaign budget, a Smart Bidding strategy will revert to manual bidding.
    • Campaigns will spend more of their budget to reach more customers.

     

    What’s an important benefit of opting into automatically applied recommendations?

    • Marketers select which recommendations are applied across an entire account or manager account, ensuring best practices are applied to all campaigns.
    • AI decides which recommendations to apply automatically to campaigns, without any need for human input.
    • Recommendations are based on the past week of data to react to the current market and avoid optimizations based on old data or settings.
    • Applying recommendations automatically will increase a campaign’s budget or reallocate budget between campaigns when necessary to improve performance.

     

    Which marketing behavior can be done by AI in Google Ads? (Choose three.)

    • Keeping bids consistent during seasonal events
    • Product-level testing and rotation
    • Adjust bids during seasonal events
    • Review of checklists for marketing best practices
    • Creative-level testing and rotation

     

    A digital marketing manager notices the Ad Strength rating of their Responsive Search Ads could be improved. What action can they take to improve Ad Strength?

    • They can create more unique headlines and descriptions.
    • They should avoid using popular keywords in headlines and descriptions.
    • They should use the Ad Strength tool to learn more about how to create a Responsive Search Ad.
    • They can use the Keyword Insertion tool to identify new keyword ideas.

     

    What’s the significance of conversion delay?

    • It refers to the load time for a page that is used to measure conversion actions on the advertiser’s site — an order confirmation page, for example.
    • It is the amount of days required for a newly adopted Smart Bidding strategy to take effect after the first recorded online or offline conversion for a campaign.
    • It is the amount of time that elapses between the clicking of an ad and an advertiser either uploading an offline conversion or completing the conversion on a site.
    • It is the amount of time it takes an advertiser to create a conversion measurement strategy for their Google Ads account.

     

    In a fully AI-powered strategy, which of these three Search features work with one another to deliver performance?

    • Smart Bidding, Responsive Search Ads, Broad match keywords
    • Phrase match keywords, Exact match keywords, Smart Bidding
    • Responsive Search Ads, Image Assets, Broad match keywords
    • Smart Bidding, Responsive Display Ads, Uncapped budgets

     

    When creating a campaign experiment, which is a best practice?

    • Choose two or three metrics that can be used to reliably gauge campaign performance and determine the winner of a particular test.
    • After the end of an experiment, assess performance over a period of time that includes ramp-up.
    • Isolate one variable to focus on for each test and use different tests when assessing the impact of more than one change.
    • As a means of expediting experiments, new ads aren’t subject to the same approval process during time of the experiments.

     

    Which of the following available insights are designed to help advertisers discover consumer interest and category growth trends?

    • Diagnostic insights
    • Asset audience insights
    • Search terms report
    • Search trends and demand forecasts

     

    A local automobile dealership is creating a Performance Max campaign to drive more visits to their location. Which goal should they choose when setting up a new Performance Max campaign?

    • Product and brand consideration
    • Website traffic
    • Local store visits and promotions
    • Brand awareness and reach

     

    An online shoe retailer is looking to create a Performance Max campaign to help drive sales in their sneaker category. How should they get started with Performance Max?

    • Use any Smart Bidding strategy to make bids across channels with AI.
    • Limit sharing audience data in order to allow AI to operate without human input.
    • Build strong creatives customized to their sneaker products or offers.
    • Separate their Google Merchant Center account from their Google Ads account to avoid overlap.

     

    An advertiser’s marketing objective is to generate leads. How can they optimize their Performance Max campaigns for value?

    • Establish a Maximize Clicks bidding strategy to increase website traffic volume.
    • Come up with a strategy of importing offline values by using enhanced conversions for leads.
    • Begin using a Maximize conversion bidding strategy as a means of increasing conversion volume.
    • Establish value rules based on audiences that have been to a local store in the past.

     

    When developing image assets, which of these practices can help drive success?

    • Providing only square images as a means of maximizing the frequency with which assets can serve
    • Centering the most important content in the image asset to maximize impact
    • Selecting images with a white background since these images tend to perform better
    • Always uploading at least four relevant and unique images at the campaign or ad group level

     

    How can a Performance Max campaign help an ice cream shop drive more potential customers to their physical location?

    • By letting them choose the websites on which their ads are shown, resulting in more store visits from potential customers
    • By using AI as a means of locating potential new customers across Google Ads inventory
    • By increasing their incremental conversions through campaigns that include video ad formats
    • By giving them more time to spend honing their unique value proposition through manually created assets

     

    On a fixed annual budget, what’s an effective way to ensure that you have the budget flexibility you need to experiment with campaigns to test their effectivenes?

    • Check out industry reports that can help you predict query demand and set budget accordingly.
    • Set aside a percentage of the budget for use in experiments and response to market changes.
    • Send a supervisor a quarterly budget review as part of a request for additional testing allocations for the upcoming quarter.
    • Create a monthly or weekly sync with the finance team in order to foster collaboration, share news and ideas about campaigns, and encourage flexibility in the budget.

     

    Which value definition is commonly used in measurement strategies that are value-centric?

    • Unique value
    • Actual value
    • Intrisic value
    • Necessary value

     

    If an organization was moving to a value-based bidding strategy for their digital marketing campaigns but needed to operate within a fixed budget, which of these Smart Bidding strategies would meet their needs?

    • Maximize conversion value
    • Maximize clicks
    • Maximize conversions
    • Target ROAS

     

    If a marketer’s goal was to drive more value from lead generation campaigns, why would value-based bidding be a viable solution?

    • Because it would allow them to focus on maximizing website traffic in order to get new potential customers
    • Because it would optimize for driving lead volume, as all customers create the same amount of value
    • Because it would optimize for high-value customers as well as a high volume of leads.
    • Because it would allow them to maximize total conversion value at a desired ROAS target or budget

     

    If digital leaders want to support Google’s AI, which of these steps should be their priority?

    • Developing capabilities in critical areas like high-quality data and a skilled workforce as a means of complementing AI’s benefits.
    • Creating highly specified silos within their organization to permit specialization and multiple budget owners.
    • Establishing budget processes that define digital marketing as a cost center for the organization.
    • Advising teams not to experiment as a means of eliminating risk and maintaining performance stability year-after-year.

     

    Which AI-powered solution delivers the biggest channel and inventory coverage of any Google Ads campaign?

    • Performance Max campaigns
    • Search campaigns
    • App campaigns
    • Video campaigns

     

    What’s a strong example of a business objective that is required when adopting an AI-powered solution?

    • Marketing spend
    • Cost-per-click
    • Profit
    • Cost of goods sold

     

    How does a Performance Max campaign work to find potential customers for an advertiser?

    • By utilizing AI to make decisions around how much money is budgets to various channels like YouTube and Search
    • By letting advertisers create and manage individual text, image, and video ads so that they can better tailor their ads to their intended audience
    • By optimizing campaigns across channels manually and insights into performance drivers
    • By promoting a particular product or service in a single campaign that covers almost all Google Ads inventory

     

    When keywords are created, what is their default match type?

    • Phrase match
    • Exact match
    • Broad match
    • Negative match

     

    Which of these are two key benefits of using the Insights page? (Choose two.)

    • Discovering and applying consumer insights around things like rising search trends and new converting audiences
    • Discovering and diagnosing performance issues so campaigns can be run more succesfully
    • Understanding competitors’ weekly spend through analysis of consumer insights.
    • Improving Search campaigns through the application of new consumer insights

     

    What are the ways that Explanations can be used to improve the performance of campaigns?

    • To reveal top asset combinations for every campaign type in a particular account
    • To uncover why performance changes were made in just a few clicks
    • To review recommendations for headlines and descriptions for the purpose of making stronger ads
    • To determine the optimal level a campaign’s budget should be at in order to maximize performance

     

    What are two ways that the Combination and Assets Report can help a marketer imrpove their creative assets’ performance? (Choose two.)

    • Identify budget limitations that could be preventing assets from being shown in auctions.
    • Find new keywords to add to a campaign so that asset reach can be improved.
    • Examine high-performing assets as a means of inspiring future creative assets.
    • Spot opportunities to replace assets that aren’t performing well.

    or

    • Spot new keywords to be added to a campaign as a means of improving asset reach.
    • Look to high-performing assets as models to inspire future creative assets.
    • Discover the budget limitations could be restricting assets from showing in auctions.
    • Find opportunities to replace low-performing assets with assets that could be more effective.

     

    In which two ways does the insights page help make performance evaluation workflows simpler? (Choose two.)

    • By giving explanations for fluctuations in campaign performance
    • By showing the drivers of a campaign’s week-on-week and month-on-month performance
    • By allowing marketers to see competitors’ ad performance data
    • By putting an automatic pause on campaigns that have low ad strength or a limited budget

     

    Why are Responsive Search Ads valuable?

    • They limit a marketer’s opportunity to compete in additional auctions and match to additional queries.
    • They provide for a wider reach to potential customers by catering to different-sized devices.
    • They save time by allowing for the creation of a single ad with more than one headline and description asset.
    • They manually create customized combinations of headlines and assets to show to different users based on their review of existing data.

     

    For an online sneaker retailer trying to reach a target return metric in the upcoming year, which Smart Bidding strategy can help them meet their goals?

    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize clicks
    • Maximize conversions
    • Target conversion value

     

    Which is regarded to be a best practice for using Performance Planner?

    • Setting up an annual forecast at the start of the fiscal year so budgets can be created accordingly
    • Coming up with month-by-month plans in the tool and regularly viewing updated forecasts
    • Using Performance Planner more during non-seasonal periods, as these are the periods when data is most accurate.
    • Viewing forecasts on a year-to-year basis, since sales data during peak seasonal periods is typically higher

     

    A marketer wants to use Google’s AI solutions to drive more value from their marketing. They know they need to fuel AI with their own privacy-safe data. Which reason describes why their data is valuable to fueling AI?

    • It’s high-quality and captures customer transactions that drive business results.
    • It’s easily replicated by multiple teams within their organization.
    • It’s a strong indicator of industry-wide performance for machine learning.
    • It’s similar to competitor data and can be used to understand how others are performing.

     

    A merchant that wants to grow its online sales is testing different campaign optimizations designed to connect them to more potential customers. What value do these experiments have for the merchant?

    • They can provide the merchant insights on whether proposed changes help reach the marketing objective they desire.
    • They ensure statistically significant results by randomly choosing how much Search traffic will be diverted to an experiment.
    • They let marketers measure changes’ impact and reverse those changes if needed.
    • They can test Google Ads campaigns against TV, print ads, or other traditional media.

     

    A local bakery chain is starting up a Performance Max campaign in hopes of attracting more customer visits to their brick-and-mortar shops. What should they establish as a goal when creating their new Performance Max campaign?

    • Brand awareness and reach
    • Product and brand consideration
    • Website traffic
    • Local store visits and promotions

     

    A digital marketing manager knows that their organization has a fixed annual budget for the upcoming year. In order to test new initiatives, they will need some flexibility to create campaign experiments. Which best practice should they follow in order to create budget flexibility within their clearly defined annual budget?

    • Send a quarterly budget review to their supervisor to request additional budget for testing in the upcoming quarter.
    • Review industry reports to predict query demand for the coming year and what budget level will be required.
    • Plan ahead by setting aside a percentage of budget to be used for testing and reacting to market changes.
    • Set up a monthly or weekly sync with the finance team to share opportunities and results to encourage budget flexibility and collaboration.

     

    Which of the following is considered a best practice when using Performance Planner?

    • When creating plans during seasonal periods, create month-by-month plans in the tool and regularly view the updated forecasts.
    • Check in on forecasts on an annual basis, as data can be skewed when it’s close to an industry’s peak seasonal period.
    • Use Performance Planner most during non-seasonal periods, as data may be less accurate in times of change.
    • For maximum impact, create an annual forecast at the start of the fiscal year to determine budgets.

     

    If a digital marketing manager was to upgrade their keywords to broad match, which behavior should they incorporate into their routine optimization efforts in order to guide machine learning?

    • Disregarding suggestions to add relevant new keywords
    • Removing negative keywords that could block relevant traffic
    • Adding Customer Match lists that contain data more than 90 days old
    • Adding more phrase and exact match keywords in order to improve reach

     

    Which of these marketing behaviors can be done by AI in Google Ads? (Choose three.)

    • The review of marketing best practices checklists
    • Keeping bids consistent during seasonal events
    • Product-level testing and rotation
    • The adjustment of bids during seasonal events
    • Creative-level testing and rotation

     

    When creating an account structure designed to improve AI-powered solutions’ performance, which is a best practice?

    • Building campaigns around specified manual optimization levers
    • Segmenting account structure via device and match type with the aim of customizing creative
    • Creating the most campaigns possible in order to reach business goals
    • Focusing account structure on business goals as opposed to channel silos

     

    Which three Search features work together to drive performance in a fully AI-powerd strategy?

    • Phrase match keywords, Exact match keywords, Smart Bidding
    • Smart Bidding, Responsive Search Ads, Broad match keywords
    • Smart Bidding, Responsive Text Ads, Uncapped budgets
    • Responsive Search Ads, Image Assets, Broad match keywords

     

    A digital marketing manager is looking to use Performance Planner to create his budget plans. What are two ways that Performance Planner can help him with budget planning? (Choose two.)

    • Forecast the impact of different budgets to understand how performance may change.
    • Identify the opportunity size for upcoming seasonal periods of increased sales.
    • Understand which billing method is best suited for an account.
    • Review how much each keyword in a campaign has spent over the past month.

     

    Which is a key benefit of opting into automatically applied recommendations?

    • AI strategically determines and automatically applies the recommendations that are most likely to have the biggest impact on campaigns.
    • Only the past week of data is used to inform recommendations, which means optimizations are based only on recent activity.
    • Marketers choose recommendations that are applied across a whole account or manager account, helping ensure that best practices are followed.
    • When recommendations are applied, campaign budgets are increased or allocations between budgets are changed as a means of helping to drive performance.

     

    How can campaign performance be improved through the use of Explanations?

    • By letting marketers see the top asset combinations for each campaign type in an account
    • By letting marketers review recommendations for headlines and descriptions in order to make stronger ads
    • By letting marketers understand why performance changes were made in just a few clicks
    • By letting marketers determine what level a budget should at in order to achieve maximum performance

     

    A local pizza chain is looking to improve their Google Ads campaign performance across their accounts. What are two ways that they can use their optimization score to improve campaigns? (Choose two.)

    • Measure their score at the individual account level, but not their manager account level.
    • Save time by accepting and immediately applying recommendations tailored to their business.
    • Identify how much existing opportunity for improvement their campaigns have and how they can be improved.
    • Review and dismiss recommendations that are relevant to their goal to save time optimizing campaigns.

     

    What’s a common type of value definition used in value-centric measurement strategies?

    • Necessary value
    • Intrisic value
    • Actual value
    • Unique value

     

    An online retailer has a goal of increasing the value they see from their Search campaigns, and the Chief Marketing Officer has set a target return metric they need to achieve in the coming year. Which Smart Bidding strategy is the right fit for this organization?

    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize clicks
    • Maximize conversions
    • Target conversion value

     

    Which of these insights are intended to help advertisers understand consumer interest and category growth trends?

    • Asset audience insights
    • Search trends and demand forecasts
    • Diagnostic insights
    • Search terms report

     

    A digital marketing manager is transitioning their campaigns to a value-based bidding strategy. They want to drive more value from their campaigns, but need to operate within a fixed budget. Which Smart Bidding strategy is the right fit for this organization?

    • Maximize conversions
    • Maximize conversion value
    • Maximize clicks
    • Target ROAS

     

    When working with a value-based bidding strategy, which of these tools can help drive maximum performance?

    • Diagnostic insights
    • Target simulators
    • Ad strength rating
    • Keyword planner

     

    Which of the following is considered a best practice when creating effective image assets?

    • Keep the most important content in the center 50% of the image asset.
    • Only provide square images to maximize how often assets can serve.
    • Always upload four or more relevant and unique images at the campaign or ad group level.
    • Choose images with a white background as they tend to have stronger performance.

     

    When designing an experiment to test Performance Max campaigns, which is a best practice to follow?

    • Making sure the Performance Max budget is limited to 10% of other campaigns’ budgets.
    • Setting up Performance Max with a comparable CPA or ROAS target to other campaigns
    • Establishing a new CPA or ROAS goal for Performance Max campaigns
    • Running the Performance Max experiment for one to two weeks before assessing the results

     

    In traditional marketing organizations, which of these is a typical budgeting strategy?

    • Budgets that adapt to stock price performance
    • Fixed annual budgets that don’t fluctuate with demand
    • Budgets that aren’t set for a particular time period or initiative
    • Quarterly budgets that can increase without approval

     

    A digital marketer has incorporated value-based bidding into their Smart Bidding strategy. Which two Google Ads tools should they consider? (Choose two.)

    • Keyword planner
    • Performance Planner
    • Bid strategy report
    • Ad strength rating

     

    If you were in charge of a flexible budget for all of a large retailer’s campaigns, what steps would you take to maximize success?

    • Develop shared budgets and portfolio bid strategies as a means of maximizing campaign flexibility and using AI to full advantage.
    • Define new performance targets every month or quarter in order to optimize AI-driven solutions.
    • Develop different budgets for campaign experiments and unforeseen market changes as a means of improving chances for success.
    • Prevent unneccessary budget usage during seasonal periods by capping budgets at the average daily spend.

     

    What can be done to improve the Ad Strength rating of Responsive Search Ads?

    • Don’t use popular keywords in headlines and descriptions
    • Use the Keyword Insertion tool as a way to find new keyword ideas.
    • Use the Ad Strength tool to learn best practices for making a Responsive Search Ad
    • Make headlines and descriptions more unique

     

    A retailer is looking to grow their online sales this year. To do so, they plan to experiment with a few campaign optimizations to help them reach more customers. What’s the value of this retailer using campaign experiments to test campaign optimizations?

    • Campaign experiments randomly chooses how much Search traffic will be diverted to an experiment, guaranteeing statistically significant results.
    • Campaign experiments can help marketers understand whether proposed changes help reach their desired marketing objective.
    • Campaign experiments are used to test Google Ads campaigns against traditional media campaigns, like TV or print ads.
    • Campaign experiments allow marketers to measure the impact of campaign changes and revert back to original campaigns, if needed.

     

    What’s a benefit of Responsive Search Ads?

    • Responsive search ads limit a marketer’s opportunity to compete in more auctions and match to more queries.
    • Responsive search ads review data to manually choose the best combination of headlines and assets to show users.
    • Responsive search ads save time by creating one ad with multiple headline and description assets that can be shown in different configurations to different users.
    • Responsive search ads allow advertisers to share their messages with more potential customers, by permitting ads to display properly for different device sizes.

     

    What determines whether or not an optimization score recommendation appears for a particular account?

    • Insights derived from machine learning and simulations that spot potential performance uplift in regards to a marketer’s specific business objective
    • There’s no specific focus, with recommendations of all types being surfaced for all individual and manager accounts.
    • Recommendations are surfaced any time there’s a perceived need for advertisers to expand their business objectives.
    • Insights derived from algorithms that identify changes needed for the largest increase in campaign spend regardless of impact

     

    An online furniture outlet is hoping to create a Performance Max campaign to help them boost sales for a new line of couches. How should they get started with Performance Max?

    • Utilize any Smart Bidding strategy as a means of making bids across channels using AI.
    • Design effective creatives that are tailored to the new line of couches for which they wish to increase sales.
    • Put a limit on the sharing of audience data so that human input doesn’t interfere with AI-powered processes.
    • Make sure their Google Merchant Center and Google Ads accounts are separate so that they can avoid overlap.

     

    What’s a benefit of negative keywords?

    • Marketers can add negative keywords to campaigns to limit the terms their competitors can bid on in an auction.
    • A negative keyword strategy is crucial to identifying additional searches that customers may be using to find a business.
    • Negative keywords prevent an otherwise eligible query from triggering an ad that isn’t aligned with the search’s intent.
    • Adding negative keywords can help prevent customers from leaving poor reviews about a business.

     

    A marketer’s goal is to use Google’s AI solutions to drive increased marketing value through the use of their own privacy-safe data. How could they articulate the value of using this data to other members of their team?

    • The data can be replicated with ease by different teams in their organization.
    • The data is a powerful indicator of industry-wide performance for machine learning.
    • The data is comparable to competitors’ data and can thus be used to gauge others’ performance.
    • The data comes straight from their customers, which makes it high-quality for this purpose.

     

    A digital marketing manager working with a national insurance provider is looking to support AI with first-party data. What’s a question they’ll need to answer before they can start using the data?

    • How can our data collection policies encourage our customers to share as much as possible?
    • How much data storage capability is available on each marketing team member’s corporate device?
    • How can we begin to use this data as quickly as possible, even if it means not aligning with other teams?
    • How are we aligned with local regulations on data collection and user privacy to ensure we are using first-party data the right way?

     

    A marketer is looking to drive additional value from their lead generation campaigns next year. Why would value-based bidding be the right solution for them?

    • All consumers create the same amount of value, so value-based bidding will optimize for driving lead volume for her business.
    • Bidding towards value allows marketers to optimize for high-value customers and high volume of leads at the same time.
    • Value-based bidding uses AI to maximize total conversion value at a desired ROAS target or budget.
    • Using a value-based bidding strategy allows marketers to focus on maximizing website traffic to gain new potential consumers.

     

    Which match type is the default match type to which all keywords are assigned?

    • Negative match
    • Broad match
    • Exact match
    • Phrase match

     

    If the marketing team at a local restaurant wanted to use their Google Ads campaigns for the purpose of increasing visits to their location, how could Performance Max help them?

    • It could let them choose the websites on which their ads are shown.
    • It could allow more time to spend crafting their unique value proposition through the use of manually created assets.
    • It could help them increase total incremental conversions by 13% on average through video ad formats.
    • It could help them find new customers across Google Ads inventory through the use of AI.

     

    In a fully AI-powered strategy, which of these three features of Search work in tandem to deliver performance?

    • Smart Bidding, Responsive Search Ads, Broad match keywords
    • Smart Bidding, Responsive Display Ads, Uncapped budgets
    • Responsive Search Ads, Image Assets, Broad match keywords
    • Phrase match keywords, Exact match keywords, Smart Bidding

     

    A digital marketing manager is working with a national insurance provider and wants to use first-party data in their AI eforts. Before they can start using the data, what question do they need to answer?

    • Is it possible to modify our data collection policies to encourage customers to share as much as possible?
    • In what ways can we begin using this data as quiclkly as possible, even at the expense of alignment with other teams?
    • What are the capabilities for data storage on each of the marketing team members’ corporate devices?
    • To what extent are we aligned with local regulations on data collection and user privacy that help us ensure the proper use of first-party data?

     

    A local camping supplies shop wants to improve its Google Ads campaign performance across its accounts. Which two ways can it use its optimization score to improve campaigns?

    • By reviewing and dismissing those recommendations which are relevant to their goal.
    • By identifying opportunities for campaign improvement and the means of making those improvements
    • By accepting and applying recommendations for their business, which saves time
    • By measuring their score at the individual account level but not the manager account level.

     

    What’s a best practice when using Performance Planner?

    • Looking at forecasts on a year-by-year basis, since sales data tends to be higher during an industry’s peak seasonal period.
    • Utilizing Performance Planner the most during non-seasonal periods, since these are the time when data is most accurate.
    • Developing month-by-month plans in the tool and viewing updated forecasts routinely
    • Creating an annual forecast at the beginning of the fiscal year in order to determine budgets

     

    How can a Performance Max campaign find new consumers for an advertiser?

    • Promote a product or service across nearly all Google Ads inventory with a single campaign
    • Manually optimize campaigns across channels with insights into performance drivers
    • Use AI to allocate budget to specific channels, such as Search and YouTube.
    • Create the opportunity for advertisers to build and manage individual text, image, and video ads

     

    Which of the following is considered a best practice when creating a campaign experiment?

    • Focus tests on one variable at a time and use separate tests to examine the effects of more than one change.
    • After an experiment ends, evaluate performance over a timeline that includes the ramp-up period.
    • When experimenting with creatives, new ads are not subject to ad approvals, so experiments can be expedited.
    • Pick two or three metrics to evaluate campaign performance and determine the winner of a test.

     

    How does opting into automatically applied recommendations help an account-holder?

    • It helps to maximize the effectiveness of recommendations since it triggers automatic increases in budgets to cover the costs of recommendations.
    • It helps ensure that best practices are applied across all campaigns, since marketers themselves choose which recommendations are applied across a whole account or manager account.
    • It helps ensure that recommendations that are most likely to have the impact on campaigns are the ones that are applied, since this analysis and implementation occurs automatically.
    • It helps make sure that optimizations are based on recent rather than old activity, since only the past week of data is used to inform them.

     

    What characterizes conversion delay?

    • This refers to the number of days it takes for a newly adopted Smart Bidding strategy to take hold after a campaign’s first recorded online or offline conversion.
    • This is the total load time of a website page, such as a confirmation page, which is used to measure a consumer’s conversion actions on the advertiser’s site.
    • This refers to the time it takes for an advertiser to create a conversion measurement strategy for their Google Ads account.
    • This is the amount of time that occurs between the selection of an ad and an advertiser having uploaded an offline conversion or completed the conversion on a site.

     

    An online beauty supply retailer has established a target return metric for the forthcoming year. Which Smart Bidding Strategy can help them achieve this objective?

    • Target conversion value
    • Maximize clicks
    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize conversions

     

    Which is a best practice when setting up a Performance Max campaign?

    • Ensuring that your Google My Business and Google Merchant Center feed are operating under separate accounts
    • Using the maximum amount of assets permissible, which includes text, image, and video assets
    • Starting conversion tracking after a campaign has been running for two weeks
    • Minimizing the number of ad extensions used within an asset group

     

    What are two key benefits of using the Insights page? (Choose two.)

    • Understand how much a marketer’s competitors are spending each week.
    • Uncover new consumer insights such as rising search trends and new converting audiences.
    • Optimize Search campaigns through insights specifically intended for that purpose.
    • Identify and diagnose performance issues to better run successful campaigns.

     

    What are two ways that the Combination and Assets Report can help a marketer improve their creative assets’ performance? (Choose two.)

    • Identify opportunities to replace low-performing assets with assets that have better potential.
    • Uncover budget limitations that may be restricting assets from showing in auctions.
    • Identify new keywords to add to a campaign to improve asset reach.
    • Use high-performing assets as inspiration for future creative assets.

     

    In what two ways does the insights page help a markterer make their workflows for performance evaluation simpler? (Choose two.)

    • By pausing campaigns automatically if they have low ad strength or a limited budget
    • By providing the reasons for inconsistent performance across campaigns
    • By providing ad performance data from competitors that can be useful for marketers looking to to make adjustments to their own business
    • By identifying the drivers of a particular campaign’s week-on-week and month-on-month performance

     

    Which of these is a strong example of a business objective that needs to be identified when adopting an AI-powered solution?

    • Profit
    • Cost-per-click
    • Cost of goods sold
    • Marketing spend

     

    Which of these AI-powered solutions provides the most channel and inventory coverage of any Google Ads campaign?

    • App campaigns
    • Video campaigns
    • Performance Max campaigns
    • Search campaigns

     

    If you’re leading a marketing team and your team’s goal is to support Google’s AI, which of these steps should you prioritize?

    • The creation of highly specified silos within the organization that allow for specialization and multiple budget owners.
    • The encouragement of teams to avoid experimentation in order to eliminate risk and help ensure stable levels of performance year-after-year.
    • The establishment of budget processes that define digital marketing as a cost center for the organization.
    • The development of capabilities in key areas like high-quality data and a skilled workforce as a means of complementing AI’s benefits.

     

    What value is gained by utilizing broad match keywords?

    • Broad match keywords let marketers exercise more control over the specific search terms to which particular ads line up, and they allow for volume to be limited.
    • Broad match keywords can help marketers maximize their reach to customers who are seeking out their offerings without having to spend time adding new keywords.
    • Broad match keywords are necessary to guarantee high performance — they must be included alongside exact match and phrase match keywords.
    • Broad match keywords guarantee that a keyword’s core concept remains in the search term while achieving comparable volume to exact match keywords.

     

    When developing an experiment intended to test Performance Max campaigns, which best practice should be followed?

    • Setting the Performance Max CPA or ROAS target to a level comparable to other campaigns
    • Running the Performance Max experiment 1-2 weeks before evaluating results
    • Setting an altogether new CPA or ROAS goal for Performance Campaigns
    • Limiting the Performance Max budget to 10% of other campaigns’ budgets

     

    A pet food store chain hopes it can increase the value of its Google Ads campaign by creating its first value-based bidding strategy. What should it do first?

    • Develop a value-based Smart Bidding strategy in the store’s top two campaigns.
    • Develop a strong, goal-based measurement and attribution strategy
    • Develop a volume-based Smart Bidding strategy across all campaigns
    • Develop a big list of negative keywords to prevent traffic from uninterested customers

     

    What’s a common budget strategy in traditional marketing organizations?

    • Fully flexible budgets based on stock price performance
    • No set budget for a time period or initiative
    • Fixed annual budgets that do not change even if demand fluctuates throughout the year
    • Quarterly budgets that do not need approval to increase

     

    What is the value of running a true A/B test with campaign experiments?

    • A/B tests can help marketers understand if their trial campaign drove user action that wouldn’t have occurred otherwise.
    • In an A/B test, trial campaigns run at the same time as the original campaign, controlling for external factors (e.g. seasonality) that may otherwise bias results.
    • An A/B test runs one campaign at a time, allowing a true ramp-down period between each testing timeframe to declutter results.
    • An A/B test is designed to test multiple variables at one time, allowing advertisers to learn and quickly adjust their campaigns based on findings.

     

    An art supplies store catering to a large local student population is setting up a Performance Max campaign with the intent of driving more customer visits to its in-person location. What should its marketing team establish as a goal when creating its Performance Max campaign?

    • Product and brand consideration
    • Local store visits and promotions
    • Website traffic
    • Brand awareness and reach

     

    An organization hoping to grow its online sales is testing out different campaign optimizations intended to connect them to more potential customers. What value do these experiments have for organization?

    • They allow for the measurement of changes on campaigns and permit marketers to easily revert back to original campaigns, if needed.
    • They guarantee results that are statistically significant by randomly choosing how much Search traffic will be diverted to an experiment.
    • They let marketers test Google Ads campaigns’ effectiveness against that of traditional media campaigns like TV or print ads.
    • They can help the organization figure out whether proposed changes can help them achieve their intended marketing objective.

     

    You’re a digital marketing manager for a large children’s clothing retailer that maintains a flexible budget for all campaigns. What best practice should you follow to see the best results from your budgeting flexibility?

    • Creating a different budget for campaign experiments and unanticipated market changes
    • Capping budgets at the average daily spend as a means of curbing unneeded spending during seasonal periods
    • Changing performance targets monthly or quarterly as needed to optimize AI-driven solutions
    • Utilizing shared budgets and portfolio bid strategies to get the most out of AI on a flexibile budget

     

    What’s the use in running a true A/B test with experiments?

    • By letting marketers know whether or not a trial campaign drove user action that wouldn’t have otherwise taken place, it gives marketers a fuller understanding of user behavior.
    • By running simultaneous to an original campaign, a trial campaign controls for external factors, like seasonality, that might otherwise introduce bias.
    • By running individual campaigns one-after-another, an A/B test gives room for enough of a ramp-down period between tests that results can be decluttered.
    • By testing more than one variable at a time, an A/B test provides advertisers with information they can use to quickly adjust their campaigns.

     

    A digital marketer has chosen to upgrade their Smart Bidding strategy by incorporating value-based bidding. Which two Google Ads tools should they routinely use?

    • Keyword planner
    • Bid strategy report
    • Performance Planner
    • Ad strength rating

     

    Which of these tools can equip marketers to drive higher performance in a value-based bidding strategy?

    • Target simulators
    • Diagnostic insights
    • Keyword planner
    • Ad strength rating

     

    What are Responsive Search Ads good for?

    • They limit a marketer’s ability to compete in more auctions and match to more queries.
    • They manually select the best combination of headlines and assets based on their review of data.
    • They are a time-saver that allow for the creation of one ad with a number of headline and description assets.
    • They cater to different device sizes, allowing advertisers a wider reach in regards to potential customers.

     

    Which of the following is regarded as a best practice for creating a campaign experiment?

    • Focus each test on one variable at a time and use different tests to assess the effects of more than one change.
    • After an experiment has ended, examine performance over a timeframe that includes a ramp-up period.
    • Select two or three metrics to assess campaign performance and determine the winner of a test.
    • Use a different approval process for new ads during experiments so that experiments can be conducted more expeditiously.

     

    What efforts should digital leaders prioritize in order to support Google’s AI?

    • Build highly specified silos within their organization to allow for specialization and multiple budget owners.
    • Build capabilities in key areas such as high-quality data and a skilled workforce.
    • Create firm budget processes to solidify digital marketing as an organization’s cost center.
    • Coach teams to avoid experimentation in order to eliminate risk and keep performance stable year-over-year.

     

    A digital marketing manager has upgraded their keywords to broad match. Which behavior should they build into their regular cadence of optimization to guide machine learning?

    • Dismiss recommendations to add relevant new keywords.
    • Create additional phrase and exact match keywords to improve reach.
    • Add Customer Match lists with data older than 90 days.
    • Remove negative keywords that may block relevant traffic.

     

    What’s the default match type for all keywords?

    • Phrase match
    • Broad match
    • Exact match
    • Negative match

     

    Which Smart Bidding strategy optimizes for value?

    • Target Impression Share
    • Maximize clicks
    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize conversions

     

    What’s the purpose of uncapping budgets to fully capture AI’s benefits?

    • Google’s AI only works in newly created campaigns with budgets of at least $1,000 per day.
    • Campaigns that incorporate Google’s AI spend more of their budget to reach more customers.
    • When a campaign’s budget is limited, a Smart Bidding strategy will convert back to manual bidding.
    • Campaigns need enough flexibility in the budget to allow Google’s AI to work to its fullest potential.

     

    An online bicycle retailer wants to create a Performance Max campaign to help them drive sales for a new line of electric bicycles. What first step should they take with Performance Max?

    • Put any Smart Bidding strategy into action in order to make bids across channels using AI.
    • Limit sharing audience data to prevent human input from interfering with AI-powered operations.
    • Build strong creatives that are tailored toward the electric bicycles they’re selling.
    • Make their Google Merchant account separate from their Google Ads account as a means of avoiding overlap.

     

    Which is a best practice that should be used when creating an account structure designed to improve AI-powered solutions’ performance?

    • Creating as many campaigns as feasible in order to achieve business goals
    • Designing campaigns around specified manual optimization levers
    • Focusing account structure on business goals rather than channel silos
    • Segmenting account structure according to device and match type as a means of customizing creative

     

    Which AI-powered solution offers the greatest channel and inventory coverage of any Google Ads campaign?

    • Video campaigns
    • App campaigns
    • Performance Max campaigns
    • Search campaigns

     

    If a digital marketing manager was switching over to a value-based bidding strategy for their campaigns, but needed to work within a fixed budget, which Smart Bidding strategy would work best for them?

    • Maximize conversions
    • Maximize conversion value
    • Target ROAS
    • Maximize clicks

     

    How can Explanations be used to help improve campaign performance?

    • To browse headline and description recommendations to create stronger ads
    • To show the top asset combinations for each campaign type in an account
    • To uncover the reasons behind performance changes in just a few clicks
    • To identify the ideal budget level a campaign needs to maximize performance

     

    If a marketer wanted their lead generation campaigns to deliver more value in the upcoming year, how could value-based bidding help them?

    • It would optimize for driving lead volume, since all customers create the same amount of value.
    • It would allow them to focus on the maximization of website traffic as a means of attracting new potential customers.
    • It would let them optimize for high-value customers and a high volume of leads simultaneously.
    • It would allow them to maximize total conversion value at a desired ROAS target or budget.

     

    How can advertisers, with the marketing objective of generating leads, optimize their Performance Max campaigns for value?

    • Build value rules based on audiences known to visit a local store.
    • Use a Maximize conversions bidding strategy to drive conversion volume.
    • Create a strategy of importing offline values by using enhanced conversions for leads.
    • Create a Maximize Clicks bidding strategy to drive website traffic volume.

     

    How does a test-and-learn mindset allow marketers to find success with Google’s AI?

    • Fuels competition across the organization.
    • Helps teams test multiple business objectives at the same time.
    • Encourages teams to break down silos and quickly identify solutions.
    • Allows leaders to identify low performers more quickly.

     

    What kinds of factors contribute to an optimization score recommendation being surfaced in an account?

    • Insights gained from machine learning and simulations that identify potential performance uplift based on a marketer’s business objective
    • The results of agorithms which identify the changes that would lead to the largest increase in campaign spend, irrespective of performance impact
    • When advertisers need to expand their business objectives, recommendations are surfaced.
    • Every type of recommendation is surfaced for every individual and manager account.

     

    A chain of sporting goods stores wants to boost the value of its Google Ads campaign with a value-based bidding strategy. What should its first step be?

    • Enable a volume-based Smart Bidding strategy for all current campaigns
    • Make sure it has a strong, goal-based measurement and attribution strategy in place
    • Establish a value-based Smart Bidding strategy in their top two campaigns.
    • Create a large list of negative keywords to help eliminate traffic from uninterested consumers.

     

    What’s an example of a metric used to measure value?

    • Time spent on site
    • Cart size
    • Page depth
    • Cost-per-click

     

    A marketer is thinking about leveraging Google’s AI solutions, using their own privacy-safe data, as a means of increasing value from marketing. What is a benefit of using their own privacy-safe data for this purpose?

    • The data is a very good indicator of industry-wide performance for machine learning.
    • The data is easily replicable by various teams across their organization.
    • The data can be used to gauge competitor performance.
    • The data is high-quality, originating with their customers.

     

    How are potential new customers identified through a Performance Max campaign?

    • Performance Max leverages AI to make budgeting decisions for specific channels like Search and YouTube.
    • Performance Max promotes a particular service or product throughout almost all Google Ads inventory in one campaign.
    • Performance Max optimizes campaigns across channels manually and insights into performance drivers.
    • Performance Max allows advertisers to create and manage individual text, image, and video ads.

     

    Which two ways can Performance Planner help marketers for purposes of budget planning? (Choose two.)

    • Estimate the opportunity for increased sales during upcoming seasonal periods.
    • Review the amount of spending for each keyword in a campaign over the past month.
    • Ascertain how different budgets will impact performance through insights gained.
    • Decide which billing method accomodates a particular account.

     

    Why is it important to uncap budgets to fully capture the benefits of Google’s AI?

    • Google’s AI will only work in newly created campaigns with budgets of $1,000 per day or more.
    • Campaigns that adopt Google’s AI spend more money to reach more customers.
    • A Smart Bidding strategy will revert to manual bidding when a campaign’s budget is limited.
    • Campaigns need sufficient budget headroom to allow Google’s AI to work to its fullest potential.

     

    What are two ways that the Insights page can help a marketer simplify performance evaluation workflows? (Choose two.)

    • Provide explanations to understand performance fluctuations in campaigns.
    • Automatically pause campaigns that have low ad strength or limited budget.
    • Share competitor ad performance data to help marketers adapt and grow their business.
    • Identify drivers of a campaign’s week-on-week and month-on-month performance.

     

    Which value defnition is commonly used in value-centric measurement strategies?

    • Unique value
    • Actual value
    • Necessary value
    • Intrisic value

     

    You’re working on a fixed annual budget but wish to test new initiatives through campaign experiments. What’s an effective way to create the budget flexibility you’ll need?

    • Deliver a quarterly budget review to a superior, for purposes of requesting additional funds for testing in the next quarter.
    • Allocate a percentage of the budget for use in testing and responding to changes in the market.
    • Establish a monthly or weekly sync with the finance team to share ideas and encourage flexibility in the budget.
    • Look over industry reports to better anticipate query demand for the coming year and funding that will be required to accomodate this.

     

    When setting up a Performance Max campaign, which is a best practice?

    • Putting conversion tracking into place two weeks after a campaign is launched
    • Limiting the amount of ad extensions used within an asset group
    • Avoiding linking a Google My Business or Google Merchant Center feed
    • Utilizing the maximum number of permitted text, image, and video assets

     

    Which metric is used to measure value?

    • Cart size
    • Cost-per-click
    • Page depth
    • Time spent on site

     

    A local coffee shop is looking to drive more store visits from their Google Ads campaigns. Why should they consider using a Performance Max campaign?

    • Performance Max campaigns that include video ad formats allow advertisers to see an average increase of 13% total incremental conversions.
    • Advertisers can use Performance Max campaigns to choose the websites on which they show ads, which could result in more store visits from potential customers.
    • A Performance Max campaign can help them find new valuable customers across Google Ads inventory through the use of AI.
    • The manual creation of assets allows advertisers to spend time crafting their unique value proposition.

     

    For developing image assets that are effective, which of these is a best practice that should be followed?

    • Placing the most important content at the center 50% of the image asset
    • Making it a habit to upload four or more relevant and unique images at the campaign or ad group level
    • Using images with a white background since these images usually deliver better results
    • Providing square images exclusively in order to maximize how often assets are able to serve.

     

    What is conversion delay?

    • The amount of time between a user clicking an ad and that user completing a conversion action on a site, or, an advertiser uploading an offline conversion
    • The period of time it takes an advertiser to properly create a conversion measurement strategy for their Google Ads account
    • The load time of the website page used to measure online conversion actions for the advetiser’s site, such as an order confirmation page
    • The number of days it takes a newly adopted Smart Bidding strategy to ramp up after a campaign’s first recorded online or offline conversion

     

    How do negative keywords assist a Search campaign?

    • They can help eliminate the possibility of customers writing unfavorable reviews about a particular business.
    • They prevent ads from being delivered for searches that might otherwise qualify but most likely don’t match the intent of the search.
    • They give marketers insight into what other searches customers are using to arrive at their business.
    • They allow marketers to add negative keywords as a means of limiting the terms competitors can bid on at auction.

     

    How does a test-and-learn mindset help marketers achieve success with Google’s AI?

    • By encouraging teams to break down silos and identify solutions quickly.
    • By promoting competion across the organization.
    • By helping teams test more than one business objectives at the same time.
    • By empowering leaders to spot low performers more quickly.

     

    What’s a benefit of using broad match keywords?

    • Broad match allows marketers to reach the most possible consumers searching for their product or service, while saving time from adding a variety of keywords.
    • Broad match offers marketers a great deal control over the specific search terms that ads match to, and volume may be limited.
    • Broad match ensures the core concept of a keyword is present in the search term while reaching similar volume to what exact match keywords would provide.
    • Broad match keywords must be present alongside both exact match and phrase match keywords in any ad group to ensure high performance.

     

    If an advertiser’s marketing objective is to generate leads, how can the advertiser optimize their Performance Max campaigns for value?

    • Create value rules based on audiences that have visited a local store in the past.
    • Develop a strategy of importing offline values through the use of enhanced conversions for leads.
    • Utilize a Maximize conversions bidding strategy in order to increase conversion volume.
    • Create a Maximize Clicks bidding strategy to propel website traffic volume.

     

    Which marketing behavior can benefit from AI? (Choose three.)

    • Adjusting bids during seasonal events
    • Reviewing marketing best practice checklists
    • Product-level testing and rotation
    • Keeping bids consistent during seasonal events
    • Creative-level testing and rotation

     

    When optimizing for value, which Smart Bidding strategy would you use?

    • Maximize conversions
    • Maximize clicks
    • Target Impression Share
    • Target ROAS

     

    How can lagging Ad Strength for Responsive Search Ads be improved?

    • By avoiding commonly used keywords in headlines and descriptions
    • Through the use of more unique headlines and descriptions
    • By using the Ad Strength tool to learn more about how to make a Responsive Search Ad
    • Through the use of the Keyword Insertion tool that can spot new keyword ideas

     

    What are the variables that affect whether an optimization score recommendation is surfaced in an account?

    • Information gleaned from algorithms that identify the changes necessary for the largest increase in campaign spend, independent of performance impact
    • There’s no specific focus, as all types of recommendations are surfaced for all individual and manager accounts
    • Recommendations are surfaced when the system determines that business objectives need to be expanded.
    • Information gleaned from machine learning and simulations that identify potential performance uplift based on a marketer’s business objective

     

    Google Ads AI-Powered Performance Certification Answers

     

    Filed Under: Certifications

    « Previous Page
    Next Page »

    Google Workspace promo code FREE

    G Suite promo code

    Categories

    • Certifications
    • Google Workspace News
    • Hosting
    • Technology

    Try SemRush FREE

    Semrush FREE coupon

    Aviso legal - Politica de privacidad - Politica de cookies - Contratación
    DMCA.com Protection Status